THE LIBRARY 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES 
 
^_ 
 
 <^C5- 
 
 ER 
 ER 
 
INSTRUCTION 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND: 
 
 A Simple Arrangement of the Essentials of 
 Graham Phonography for All Schools. 
 
 Comprising also a "Progressive Scheme of Word-Sign Study; 
 
 t/l T^evised Version of Smith's Numerals ; <A {Manual of 
 
 ^Blackboard Illustrations for Shorthand Teachers; 
 
 and Suggestions for Typewriter Practice. 
 
 THE SYLLABLE THE UNIT OF WORD ANALYSIS. 
 BY 
 
 BATES TORREY, 
 Author of "Practical Typewriting." 
 
 Published by Charles E. Comer, Boston, Mass. 
 
Copyright, I&Q3, 
 
 by 
 Bates Torrey. 
 
 The Sailings Press, Boston, Mass. 
 
Jg PREFACE. 9_ 
 
 So many books have been prepared on the subject 
 
 of shorthand that preface material has become scarce. 
 
 v> It would be profitless to declare there is anything new 
 
 * (outside of tricks of arrangement) in this work, 
 
 j because nothing original has been produced about 
 
 g- shorthand for many years. It would be likewise 
 
 - 1 vain to say this is a profound treatise. We could 
 
 not write such a book and would not if we could ! 
 
 ?* In popularizing shorthand study there is no use 
 
 dredging deprofundis. The convincing writer should 
 
 ^ dwell with his audience. 
 
 A publisher waited for these pages to issue from 
 the pen, which fact disarms the criticism that it was 
 made to sell ; and considerable experience teaching 
 shorthand was the impulse directing the pen, which 
 should have weight if the record of a successful 
 instructor counts for aught. 
 
 a 
 
 448596 
 
There are too many manuals of shorthand already. 
 That is cheerfully granted. Yet none of them show 
 a "royal road" to its acquirement, whatever their 
 claims. There is no such road. But as improved 
 vehicles of locomotion and new methods of propul- 
 sion almost bring time and distance to naught, so in 
 shorthand improved methods of instruction make 
 easier the journey to proficiency, and hasten arrival 
 at that destination. 
 
 The learner is our audience. We address him with 
 deep designs, as these pages will disclose. We care 
 more for the impression (as shown by accomplish- 
 ment) the book makes upon him than for e.r <-ntlf<l,- 
 comments of rival authors, or the opinions of theorists 
 on teaching. 
 
 BATES TOR KEY. 
 
TO TEACHERS. 
 
 Another case of "pernicious authorship," we seem 
 to hear you remark; but be kind enough to examine 
 the contents of this volume before classing it with the 
 rank and file. We venture to say it will be found 
 near enough like the others to shatter no idols, and 
 unlike enough to deserve a reading. 
 
 It has been made for teachers and schools. 
 Observe the sequence of action. Everything is 
 systematic, and every progression has a meaning. 
 Design pervades every step ; no accidents are allowed 
 to happen. Much unwarranted effort in shorthand 
 study has prevailed ; it remains for teachers to com- 
 bine in banishing the same. 
 
 The shorthand of today must be practical if any- 
 thing, therefore only the essentials need be studied. 
 For abstruse treatment, consult the standard text- 
 books of the systems : this the teacher can always do 
 to advantage. The business man has no time for 
 deep study of social problems, leaving that for the 
 political economist or the lecturer on finance. We 
 may consider the average student of shorthand as 
 bent upon the business of brief writing; and being 
 eager for quick results, depends upon the teacher to 
 administer wisely to his need, out of knowledge 
 wherever obtained . 
 
 We are of the opinion, also, that practical short- 
 hand is quite as much a mechanical art as an intel- 
 lectual one ; hence the prominence given herein to 
 mechanical processes. Anyone in search of theory 
 
can find enough bf it in the works of the system 
 makers ; but this being a working plan, rather than a 
 varnished model, the mechanical is admitted if it will 
 serve the purposes of effective instruction. For even 
 in the sublime presence of the arch theorist himself 
 (whoever he may be), his amanuensis must needs 
 write according to fluent methods ; and those who 
 are unhappy if they do not have a daily baptism of 
 theory will turn from these pages unconsolable, 
 simply because we have to confine ourselves to the 
 performable in shorthand rather than to the imagin- 
 able ! 
 
 u It is a condition and not a theory which confronts 
 us." The essence of good teaching is to adapt the 
 means to the pupil. If there is one study that 
 demands such tact more than any other, it is short- 
 hand. Consequently certain elements of instruction 
 are herein made important, and there is furnished 
 sufficient variety to fit every need. 
 
 A few of the more obvious features of the book 
 are : 
 Common sense nomenclature and definitions. 
 
 Reading as well as writing from the beginning. 
 Systematic arrangement of principles. 
 Progressive and interesting tasks. 
 
 Early neglect of vowels and position. 
 Word-Signs favorably presented. 
 
 Business correspondence a feature. 
 A tested system of writing figures. 
 
 Blackboard illustrations for Teachers. 
 Suggestions for typewriter practice. 
 
TO THE STUDENT. 
 
 This book has been made especially for you 
 after watching a great many of you work, and in- 
 spired by your work, appreciating your needs. Like- 
 wise your discouragements have been noted, and a 
 mitigation sought for and found. The aim has been 
 to render shorthand study interesting. If interest 
 can be awakened early, and maintained continuously, 
 good work and tangible results will follow. 
 
 Assuredly tvork is necessary in shorthand study ; 
 but it would be unreasonable to expect it to continue 
 with stolid doggedness when all the conditions were 
 unfavorable. "We have endeavored to make them 
 favorable by divesting the subject of disagreeable and 
 useless features, and clothing it with pleasanter ones. 
 
 We trust that success has attended our efforts. At 
 any rate may it attend yours. Therefore work 
 win ! 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PART I. DESK WORK. 
 
 STEP 1. The scheme of consonant signs and its management. 
 
 STEP II. Joined consonant strokes. Early word-signs. 
 
 STEP III. Circle-S and its modifications. Simple phrases introduced. 
 
 STEP IV. The vowel and vowel procedure. 
 
 STEP V. Diphthongs. The tick denned and illustrated. Position 
 
 foreshadowed. Group word-signs, List I. 
 STEP VI. Further consonant signs, strokes S and Z, Wand Y. Kule 
 
 for syllabic writing. Treatment of H. 
 STEP VII. Syllabic R and L, with specific Rules for same, con-, com-, 
 
 cog-, -ing and -ings. Group word-signs, List II. 
 STEP VIII. Simple stroke word-signs. Special practice material. 
 
 Remarks upon syllabic shorthand, angles and " convenience." 
 
 Conclusion of Part I. 
 
 PART II. BUSINESS SHORTHAND. 
 
 STEP IX. Initial hooks, L and R. Vowels omitted, and position 
 substituted. 
 
 STEP X. Circle-S and the initial hooks. Group word-signs, List III. 
 
 Syllabic halving introduced. Dictation begun. 
 STEP XL Final hooks, F, V and N. Group word-signs, List IV. 
 
 Position continued. Numbers, Lesson I. Dictation. 
 STEP XII. Further final hooks -shun and -live. Group word-signs, 
 
 List V. Halving continued. Numbers, Lesson II. Dictation. 
 STEP XIII. The business letter. Business phrases. Numbers, Lesson 
 
 III. Letter-writing in shorthand. Dictation. 
 STEP XIV. Further developments of halving. Group word-signs, 
 
 List VI. Speed practice. Dictation. 
 STEP XV. The lengthening principle. A shorthand multiplication 
 
 table. Prefixes and affixes. Models for dictation practice. 
 STEP XVI. Expedients for swift and legible writing. Shorthand 
 
 penmanship. Dictation. Conclusion of Part II. 
 
 PART III. ADVANCED INQUIRY. 
 
 Word-signs classified. Word-signs of Parts I. and II. presented alpha- 
 betically. Imitative word-signs. The great list, 19 pages. Sa- 
 cred word-signs. Shorthand text for reading practice, 11 pages. 
 
 Instructive articles upon: Syllabication Angles and Direction of 
 Strokes Distinguished Words A nalogy Phrasing Syllabic-S 
 Alternative Procedure Vowel Implication. Suggestions for 
 Typewriting. 
 
 Index. 
 
 Appendix (in Teachers' edition). 
 
PART I. Introductory Steps. 
 
 DESK WORK. 
 

 5TEP I. 
 
 SCHEME OF CONSONANT SIGNS. 
 
 Sign. 
 
 Sound Conventional 
 Name. Name. 
 
 Power and Use. 
 
 Written Downward 
 
 
 Tub -} 
 Duh 
 . Puh 
 Buh 
 Chub 
 
 T 
 D 
 P 
 B 
 ; CHav 
 
 T 
 D 
 P 
 B 
 
 C1 
 
 in T-ip 
 " D-ip 
 " P-ut 
 " B-ut 
 " Ch-.at 
 
 or Tuh-ip 
 " Duh-ip 
 " Puh-ut 
 " Buh-ut 
 " Ri-ph 
 
 1 
 
 \ 
 
 \ 
 
 
 P 
 
 Juh ^J J " J-ug " Gin Gem 
 
 a 
 
 03 
 
 Kuh |K K " K-it " C in Cat 
 
 Guh I Gay G " G-et " Guh-et 
 
 
 
 Fuh F F " F-at " Fuli-at 
 
 .L. v 
 
 uh 
 
 J... 
 
 Thuh 
 
 Dthuh 
 
 Shuh 
 
 Zshuh 
 
 V " V-at " Vuh-at 
 
 iTH TH"Th-ish 
 
 My-th 
 
 THe TH"Th-y " Wi-th 
 iSH SH" Sh-y " Wi-sh 
 
 Z " A-z-ure " Sin Leisure 
 
SCHEME OF CONSONANT SIGNS Continued. 
 
 Sound 
 Sign. Name. 
 
 Conventional 
 Name. 
 
 Power and Use. 
 
 Ruh 
 uR 
 Luh 
 uL 
 
 R in R-ate 
 R " Ar-t 
 L "L-aps 
 L " Al-ps^ 1 
 
 Followed ,-j 
 
 a 
 g 
 
 fi Preceded 
 
 >. > 
 
 * Followed o 
 
 Preceded w 
 
 o 
 
 if. 
 
 Muh 
 
 Nuh 
 
 to 
 
 M M"M-ew Na-me 
 
 N N " N-ew Mai-ne 
 
 iNG as" K-ing In-k 
 
 Suli or Zuh 
 
 iS 
 
 S " Hi-ss or Z in Bu-zz 
 
 Willie Brief Way W'W-oo " Wuh-oo 
 
 Semi- 
 vowel 
 n.... Yuh ] Brief Yay Y " Y-ou " Yuh-ou 
 
 TT , ( Breath- 
 
 Huh j ing Hay H " H-at " Huh-at 
 
STEP I. 
 
 THE ALPHABET AND EARLY STUDY. 
 
 (1) The foregoing is a classified scheme of signs 
 for the consonant sounds of language, and is not to 
 be considered in any sense as an alphabet of letters. 
 It is so arranged that the size, shape and direction of 
 writing the signs can be seen at a glance. 
 
 (2) These signs are segments of the circle and 
 straight lines, the length of the straight lines being 
 about one-sixth of an inch, and the distance between 
 the extremities of a curve should be the same. 
 
 (3) The consonant signs are written in the direc- 
 tions indicated, and the first fourteen are made alter- 
 nately light and shaded, to picture Whispered and 
 Voiced sounds. This ingenious distinction should be 
 taken advantage of in memorizing the sounds and their 
 signs. 
 
 (4) The liquids, L and R, the nasals, M, N, 
 LNG, and the breathing H, are less regularly formed ; 
 
14 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP I. 
 
 while S, Z, W and Y are very brief characters which 
 are termed appendages simply. Note particularly 
 the liquids, as they have repeated mention farther on. 
 
 (5) SH (shuh) is written upward or downward for 
 purely mechanical reasons. That direction is selected 
 which makes the better angular junction with another 
 sign, as illustrated below. When alone, SH is always 
 written downward. 
 
 duh-shuh guh-ghuli nuh-sliuh muh-shuli luli-shuh puh-shuh 
 
 U ~D. 3. <=J CL \1 
 
 (6) L standing alone is invariably written upward. 
 
 (7) In order to appreciate fully the consonant 
 sounds, words must first be reduced to their vocal ele- 
 ments. In the Diagram two names are applied to the 
 consonants, namely, the sound-name* and the con- 
 ventional-name. The former represents the con- 
 sonants as devoid of vowel modification as may be 
 possible. The Conventional name resembles the 
 regular alphabet, and is desirable for class-room use 
 after the student has attained some proficiency ; though 
 it should never be confounded with the consonants of 
 the common alphabet of letters. 
 
 (8) The vowels of the English language are A 
 E I O U and sometimes W and Y. The vowels 
 are not considered at this stage of study. 
 
 *The indefinite sound " uh " has been selected for this 
 nomenclature, because to speak a consonant requires sonic 
 vowel assistance, but the less it is like the common vowels 
 the more closely the combination approaches the primary con- 
 sonant. We presented this form of sound-name in 1886, 
 and have ever since used it with success as a convincing way 
 of "talking" the consonants. 
 
STEP I.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 15 
 
 (9) Name the consonants and vowels in the fol- 
 lowing words ; and then, ignoring the vowels, give 
 its most primary sound to each consonant, speaking 
 the sound-name tuh, buh, kuh, vuh, as the case may 
 require : 
 
 r-o (tuh-oo) d-o (duh-oo) p-a (puh-ah) b-e 
 
 3(t)-ch 
 
 e(d)-ge 
 
 g-o 
 
 i-f 
 
 f-ie 
 
 e-gg 
 
 sh-e 
 
 th-e 
 
 th-y 
 
 m-e 
 
 a-sh 
 
 n-o 
 
 k-ey 
 
 y-e-t 
 
 t-u-b 
 
 b-a-d 
 
 nr-e-t 
 
 h-a-t 
 
 g-u-m 
 
 c-a-t 
 
 3h-a-p 
 
 ar-k 
 
 r-u-g 
 
 el-k 
 
 th-i-n 
 
 th-e-m 
 
 r-i-ug 
 
 sh-o-p 
 
 ii-s-u-al 
 
 e-v-e-n 
 
 ch-ea-p 
 
 g-e-m 
 
 ah-a-s-e 
 
 in-k 
 
 th-a-t 
 
 k-e-g 
 
 f-e(t)-ch 
 
 t-a-g 
 
 d-i-g 
 
 m-u-ff 
 
 Signs for the foregoing words : 
 
 1 \\ 
 
 / /.LI 
 
 ....( J...U 
 
 Lu. 
 
 LLVL 
 
 
 
 C...U 
 
 XT, 
 
 s\ ^ 
 
 A Ai 
 
 (L 
 
 ^ 
 
 . p 
 
 (10) Cultivate the habit of speaking the sounds 
 when both reading and writing. Do not confound 
 juh with guh, for it must be remembered that G (as 
 a letter) has both a hard and a soft sound, while J 
 has not. Note also that C of the alphabet is not 
 represented upon the Diagram, because C, hard, is 
 K ; and C, soft, S. Separate thuh clearly from 
 dthuh, and do not be diverted from the true sounds 
 by unsuggestive spelling. Forget spelling for the time 
 being ! 
 
16 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP I. 
 
 (11) The first fourteen signs will be more readily 
 learned when the relations between them are under- 
 stood, viz. : 
 
 1. That two sounds uttered with the organs* of 
 speech in the same position are paired. 
 
 2. That one of each pair is a whispered sound, 
 and the other a voiced. 
 
 3. That the whisper is represented by a hair-line 
 character, and the voiced by a shaded one. 
 
 (12) The remaining sounds, and corresponding 
 signs, are less regular and suggestive, but are not 
 difficult to memorize. Remember that these characters 
 picture the phonetic (sound) elements of language, 
 and should appeal more to the ear than to the eye. 
 At the same time the eye does for the memory what 
 the ear (in this case) does for the understanding; 
 therefore it is essential that all the signs should be 
 written many times while being memorized. Each 
 should be known by its name, preferably the sound- 
 name at this step, and the names spoken as writing 
 progresses. 
 
 The attention of the student is directed to the 
 blackboard illustrations, which should be displayed 
 upon the walls, and which are intended to supplement 
 the scheme of study set forth in the Steps. 
 
 Also note the suggestions for typewriter practice in 
 Part III. Typewriting is acknowledged to be an 
 especially appropriate auxiliary to the practice of short- 
 hand writing, and if it is intended to use the latter in 
 a business way, the acquii'ement of a good style of 
 typewriting should take place coincidently with short- 
 hand study. 
 
 * The lips, teeth, tongue, palate or throat. 
 
rilACTICAl, SHORTHAND. 
 
 17 
 
 (I.'!) Fill one or inure lines with each consonant 
 sign very carefully traced, as: 
 
 LLCLCLLCL 
 
 ooooooooo 
 
 OOOOOOOOO 
 
 CCCC 
 
 (14) ADVICE to STUDENT. Write the 
 whole scheme of signs in this way five times, or 
 until each character can be written in a satisfactory 
 manner. 
 
18 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP I. 
 
 (15) Always write shorthand with :v pen, because 
 of the shadiug required, and upon ruled paprr, using 
 the lines as a guide to direction. There is a penman- 
 ship to shorthand as well as to other writing. Hold the 
 pen-stock outside the index finger, as in ordinary 
 writing, but allow the top to point a little outward 
 from the shoulder. When executing the shaded charac- 
 ters juh r guh or ung, twist the pen-handle slightly 
 with the fingers, without moving the hand very much 
 from normal position. 
 
 (16) DEFINITIONS. A Stroke in short- 
 hand writing is a consonant sign with or with- 
 out appendages. The possible appendages are 
 suh (called also circle-S) , its loop modifications, 
 brief wuh or yuh, or the hooks. 
 
 A stroke commonly stands for a syllable 
 in simple (and theoretic) shorthand. This 
 book makes the syllable the unit of word 
 analysis, and the term STROKE will be used 
 with marked intent throughout these pages. 
 
 The followin characters are all Strokes : 
 
 (17) The stem is that part of the stroke to which 
 the appendages are attached. 
 
 (18) Write the length of each stroke one-sixth of 
 an inch, and draw the characters with scrupulous 
 exactness. Shade the straight strokes evenly through- 
 out, but taper the curves at the ends like examples 
 given. The curve should take the same direction 
 as a straight line extended between its extremes, and 
 be the same length as the straight line of similar 
 direction. 
 
STEP I.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 19 
 
 (19) Write the stems only in the direction speci- 
 fied by the Diagram, thereby becoming able to identify 
 a stroke quite as much by its direction as by length 
 or thickness. Write slowly and with painstaking ; do 
 not lift the pen from the beginning to the end of a 
 stroke. Also have the stems of the same relative 
 length ; future legibility depends largely upon this. 
 
 (20) Repeat the writing and enunciation of the 
 simple stems and strokes thus far given until they 
 are pronounced perfect. 
 
 The student should be prepared to answer the 
 following questions, which are designed to furnish re- 
 view practice. Some are also a trifle eductive (draw- 
 ing out) in character : 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS STEP I. 
 
 What scheme does the Diagram show? What descrip- 
 tive features of the consonants are shown? How many 
 consonant signs are given? What significance attaches to 
 the queer names tuh, duh, puh, buh? What do the conven- 
 tional names resemble? Is this scheme of signs at all like 
 an alphabet? Why not? What are the English vowels? Are 
 they considered now? Probably why not? Name a word 
 in which // is a vowel. Name the first fourteen consonant 
 signs in order. Describe the signs in their relations of 
 size, shape and direction. What is a whisper? A voice? 
 What is the sound of G in gpt? In germ? 
 
 What are the liquids? The nasals? The semi-vowels? 
 The breathing? Is the same sign used forSorZ? Is not 
 this a trifle strange? Name some other letters or sounds of 
 like character (C, K, J, G). Which sounds more like a hiss, 
 S or Z? Which like a buzz? Why are L and R called 
 liquids? What are the consonant sounds in schism, 
 sword, psalm? How many signs are given for wuh and 
 yuh? What is the difference between them? Is there any 
 difference except direction? Which 11 is used when it is 
 preceded by a vowel sound? Is it vowel or vowel sound we 
 should be particular to note? Which R is employed when a 
 vowel sound follows? Which L is used under similar 
 circumstances? 
 
20 INSTRUCTION I\ [ STKP I. 
 
 What sound of language does huh represent? Docs 
 "huh " strike you as a good name for it? Does it at all re- 
 semble the hiss of a cat? Recite the consonant sounds, 
 lining the sound-name of the Diagram. Is II sometimes 
 called the aspirate? (Yes.) What are the consonant sounds 
 in bdellium, phthisic, Czar, quay ? Is there a marked dillcr- 
 ence between voiced and whispered sounds? How many of 
 the consonant signs are irregular in formation ; that is. not 
 paired? At what angle is tuh struck with reference to the 
 line? At what angle does chuh depart from tuh? At Avhat 
 angle does rnh or huh lift from knh? Spell //////<. <jhn*t. 
 throwjh, by sound. What are the consonants in Lhromjli .' 
 The vowels? Do the words gem and i/iun, suggest why 
 guh and juh are often confounded? Is it important to 
 speak the exact sounds while writing? Why? What is a 
 stroke? A stem? 
 
 Why write shorthand with a pen? Why use ruled paper? 
 How are straight strokes shaded? How curves? What 
 length of stroke should be fixed upon? What distance above 
 a line should never be exceeded? (Two-thirds the space 
 between the ruling.) How should the pen be held? Is it 
 necessary to disturb hand position very much to write guh 
 or ing? Is a fixed direction of strokes necessary? Why? 
 What primitive material are the signs snpposably derived 
 from? Are the curves longer than straight strokes? 
 What direction are kuh, guh, muh, nuh and ing written? 
 Huh? Is shuh invariably written downward? Why some- 
 times upward? How is L written when standing alone? 
 What helps to memorize the first fourteen siirus? Which 
 do you consider the better angle in the illustrations of shuh 
 joined to another stroke? 
 
 Does correct spelling assist any in determining the con- 
 sonant sounds? What are the organs of speech? What are 
 phonetics? What is an appendage? Name three. How 
 does the attitude of the pen-holder differ from the position 
 when writing long-hand? Name a few words containing 
 zshuh. A few containing guh or juh. A few containing 
 both guh and juh. What is a syllable? Name a syllable in 
 which II is followed by a vowel sound. Preceded. L 
 followed. Preceded. Name a word containing a stem and 
 an appendage. Do you understand thoroughly everything 
 in Step I.? 
 
STEP II.] 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 21 
 
 STEP II. 
 
 TO JOIN CONSONANT STROKES: 
 
 (21) The signs which separately stand for sounds 
 (or strokes for syllables) are joined together to denote 
 words. 
 
 (-2-2) RULE: Join the beginning of the 
 second stroke (or sign) to the end of the first, 
 the third to the second in like manner, and so 
 on, taking care to trace each stem in its proper 
 direction, and not lifting the pen until the end 
 is reached. The resulting character is termed 
 an outline. 
 
 (23) As an exercise for preserving the exact di- 
 ivctiou and relations of stems, write the signs for the 
 following sounds, joining them as above directed, and 
 extending the outline after the fashion of these illus- 
 trations : 
 
 Write: Diik-kuh-slmh-nuh-ul. Kuh-nuh-suh-tuh- 
 nuh-tuh-nuh-puh-ul. Puh-luh-nuh-puh-tuh- 
 nuh-shuh-ruh. Suh-puh-ur-nuh-nmh-ruh-ruh. 
 Vuh-zuh-buh-luh. Nuh-vuh-nuh-suh-buh-ul. 
 Kuh-muh-puh-ruh-nuh-huh-nuh-suh-buh-ul. 
 Ruh-puh-ruh-huh-nuh-suh-vuh. Puh-ur-vuh- 
 ur-shuh-mih. Kuh-suh-puli-nuh-shuh-nuh. 
 
 Tuli-piih-ruh-tnh-ur. Shuh-ur-tuh-huh-nuh- 
 diili. Kuh-imili-ur-shuh-ul. 
 
22 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP n. 
 
 (24) When in doubt, a simple way to disclose the 
 consonants of a word is to write it in letters, spelling 
 phonetically (by sound), dividing into correct sylla- 
 bles, and then cancelling the vowels and silent conso- 
 nants, like 
 
 ^d-/-k/-sh/n, Sfi-lfii-ffl, Skfi-jty, 
 
 The part not cancelled is the consonant skeleton of 
 the word. Represent this skeleton by the appropriate 
 signs of the Diagram, joining them as the rule directs. 
 Always ignore silent letters, whether consonants or 
 vowels. 
 
 (25) A curved sign repeated must exhibit an 
 angle at the point of junction, but a repeated straight 
 stem is a double length, as 
 
 (26) Note the difference of incline to chuh and 
 rub. (see blackboard). Curves are made flat* rather 
 than arched. Any stroke may be slightly changed in 
 direction to invite a convenient junction, as 
 
 (27) The excitement of fast writing sometimes 
 leads to shading the wrong stroke ; that is, when 
 a darkened stem follows a light one the eager mind 
 anticipates, and the hand obeys the will. This should 
 
 * As the riirht line is the shortest distance between two 
 points, so the fluent curve is the one which more nearly 
 approaches the straight line. 
 
STKI' II.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 23 
 
 not occur in slow writing if care be taken. Treat 
 consecutive light and heavy lines as follows : 
 
 T-D P-B K-G B-N Luh-iNG H-G M-iNG P-iNG 
 
 (28) In order to give the writing a good appear- 
 ance it may be well for the beginner to make the first 
 vertical stroke of any outline rest upon the line ; 
 although this is not absolutely necessary, the relation 
 of outline and ruling having no particular importance 
 until " position" is reached. 
 
 (29) Write the proper consonant skeletons for 
 the following simple words : 
 
 Cat dog pup hen pig rat path good 
 mum fife nun make bathe hat red pink 
 ship goal dish bush jail nap came can 
 shell babe mat Ned pipe map Tom pat 
 neck take tap food rode mud cup bat 
 cab lip dip lobe kid pug dim pad 
 
 The student should write each task at least five 
 times, correcting and revising after each writing ; then 
 hand to the teacher a nice copy of the last rendering. 
 
 (30) Copy the following shorthand outlines of the 
 above words many times : 
 
24 INSTRUCTION IN [sTK.r II. 
 
 (31) The most diflicult part of primary shorthand 
 writing is to forget the spelling, and to represent the 
 exact consonant skeleton of a word. The eye has 
 commonly been trained to spell and to remember 
 spelling in the use of language; but in shorthand 
 writing the 'ear must be equally disciplined. Repre- 
 sent in shorthand the following unphonetic spelling : 
 
 Write : Duck laugh cough thumb etch gem 
 lamb image knack palm talk through catch 
 knave ache luck thatch knee judge Dutch 
 dumb gauge pity gnaw myth calm bank ditch 
 balm page vogue write edge enough loaf 
 tomb bouquet budge peach walk magic 
 
 (32) No reading will be required in this step, 
 because the vowel sounds are not indicated, and there- 
 fore the word outlines are incomplete. Yet, after 
 writing the next exercise it may be well to use the 
 notes for a reading lesson, just for practice in attain- 
 ing a quick recognition of the consonant signs. 
 
 (33) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Peach cage cheap joke gig beach jug book 
 dip king muff ink fame peek mush nick 
 sham keep cane make hate came Jove voyage 
 theme damage chimney myth tomato drem 
 jamb potato meed gimp shaggy mob thing 
 boom shave main match name chum pang 
 junk Jamaica unpack memento coacli Pope 
 choke tobacco ticket cabbage pocket Clioctnu 
 tattoo nominee five dado enigma poppy 
 cuckoo main Nain haughty badge bang gong 
 phenomena feminine message 
 
STK1' II.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 25 
 
 (34) WORD-SIGNS : 
 
 DEFINITION. A Word-sign is a sign for a 
 word; generally a part for the whole, resem- 
 bling longhand abbreviation. The more sug- 
 gestive the part, the better the word-sign. 
 
 (35) Word-signs appear for two reasons: (1) to 
 furnish brief outlines for the frequently recurring* 
 words of language; and (2) to provide fluent form 
 for those outlines which in full would exhibit awkward 
 elements. 
 
 (36) It has been the wont to consider word-signs 
 as necessarily an arbitrary creation. True some are, 
 but the majority are not, and thereby is shorthand 
 illuminated. It is believed a thorough appreciation 
 of the systematic word-sign study, underlying the 
 arrangement of these steps, will convince the most 
 skeptical that word-signs can be divested of half their 
 terrors, if presented properly and given reasonable 
 attributes. Purely arbitrary systems of shorthand 
 have not nourished alongside the phonetic idea, and 
 the arbitrary word-sign will gradually be superseded 
 by the suggestive one; all of which is in the direction 
 of reason and simplicity, which in shorthand stands 
 for speed and legibility. 
 
 (37) Word-signs are absolutely indispensable in 
 order to make shorthand practical : that is, equal to 
 the demands of business. The student should memo- 
 rize the word-signs exactly as presented, taking note 
 of their position with respect to the line, and the 
 nature and extent of abbreviation, as Avell as attracting 
 
 *From 1LT) to l.">0 words like Of bnt to when iiw 
 that (hi* //in/, etc., constitute fully one-half of ordinary 
 discourse or writing. 
 
26 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP II. 
 
 to the task all the helps of suggestion and association 
 that may appear. The following examples are fnml 
 forms; in fact, a word-sign is not susceptible of 
 further abbreviation. 
 
 (38) SIMPLE STROKE WORD-SIGNSLIST 1 : 
 
 do 
 
 be have 
 
 will 
 
 shall was 
 
 * which 
 
 I 
 
 \ L 
 
 C 
 
 ; ) 
 
 / 
 
 them or they him or am 
 
 think 
 
 usual-ly 
 
 hope 
 
 
 ( ^ 
 
 ( 
 
 ; 
 
 \ 
 
 are 
 
 you or your 
 
 yet 
 
 were 
 
 would for 
 
 ^jX* 
 
 n 
 
 u 
 
 c 
 
 3 V_ 
 
 (39) Learn the word-signs so they will be appre- 
 ciated by two faculties, the ear and the eye. Memorize 
 them thoroughly, having thought of their sounds, or 
 the resemblance of sound, and exerting as much 
 reason in the endeavor as may be needed ; then have 
 another test your knowledge in two ways first, by 
 asking what the word- sign is for such and such a 
 word ; and, second, by writing the word-signs and 
 asking what they stand for. Much writing of the 
 word-sign lists serves to fix them in the mind. 
 
 (40) The student should arrange each day's work 
 in a fair proportion of study of the principles, 
 writing words and sentences illustrative of the same, 
 reading shorthand from the book or blackboard, and 
 making a point to submit to the teacher the written 
 result of the day's labor, which same should be cor- 
 rected and returned the following day. At the same 
 time ask questions during the progress of the work, in 
 order not to remain long in error if any detail of Hie 
 subject is not understood. Cultivate the habit of self- 
 criticism. Write, correct, rewrite. Never knowingly 
 hand in an error. 
 
 *See characters of Step VI. 
 
STEP II.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 27 
 
 (41) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 The following sentences are to be composed of the short- 
 hand material thus far given. Employ word-signs freely, 
 and write well. No mark of punctuation is necessary ; 01 "y 
 a blank space of about an inch between sentences. 
 
 Write these sentences also from dictation, and read them 
 without the key : 
 
 They are. Are you ? Will you have them ? Which 
 are due? Have hope. You shall have. They shall 
 be. Will have them. You would be. Which was for 
 him? They would thiuk. Will yet be. Will have 
 them thiuk. A,h ! your hope will be vain. Shall you 
 have them yet ? Usually they will have. Shall thiuk 
 they have. Will you have him do it? You hope they 
 were willing. Think they would have. They will 
 have him yet. Do they think you will be? Which 
 will usually do? 
 
 Your theme was good. Ned and Tom will have 
 money. It will be thorough. Unpack your tobacco 
 package. Which ticket will it be? Your gig will be 
 damaged. Do they usually have him for judge? 
 They hope your ship will make no voyage. They 
 gauged your keg. Your thatch was shaggy. Which 
 muff do you think cheap? Were your teeth good for 
 gum? Will you have him come? Which are you 
 willing they shall have? Would you have them go? 
 You will not get half you need. They hope you will 
 be here ('ere) Monday. 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS STEP II.: 
 
 How are word outlines formed of the consonant strokes? 
 What is the rule for joining strokes? Is there more than 
 one way to do this? How many directions does a stem 
 commonly have ? Is it proper to lift the pen before an 
 outline is linished ? What is an outline ? How long a word 
 outline can be written ? Can you make the outlines in Sec- 
 tion 28 stand for words ? What words ? What are pho- 
 netics ? What is spelling phonetically ? What is the 
 
28 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP IT. 
 
 simplest way to discover the exact sounds of a word ? 
 Spell imaijc, bouquet and lauijh by sound. Why are tbe 
 vowels stricken out of the words now considered ? Why 
 the silent letters ? 
 
 What is the consonant skeleton of a word ? How are 
 curved characters joined ? Straight ? At what angle does 
 clmh incline? Ruh ? Which is the quicker curve, a Hat or 
 an arched? Can the curvature or direction of a stroke be 
 changed ? How much ? And what for ? Why does a 
 writer sometimes shade the wrong stem ? What is the 
 consonant skeleton of nominee, typewriting, short Innid.' 
 Does English spelling assist in arriving at the exact sounds 
 of a word ? Which is exerted more in spelling, the eye or 
 the ear; that is, which helps the memory more ? Which in 
 writing phonetically ? Is reading the outlines required at 
 this stage? Can you read what you write? If not, why 
 not? 
 
 What is a word- sign ? What are word-signs for? Are 
 they difficult to learn? Are some easier than others ? Which 
 are the easier? Are word-signs necessary in shorthand 
 writing ? In what sense is the word practical used as 
 herein applied to shorthand ? What demand does business 
 make of shorthand ? Must practical shorthand be written 
 rapidly ? Must it be legible ? How are word-signs to be 
 learned ? Name five of the simple word-signs given. What 
 is the word-sign for hope., think, yet? Do all these word- 
 signs rest on the line ? Is this to be remembered ? What 
 sort of a mental process conduces to ease of shorthand 
 Avriting? What is the sign for usual S How would you 
 know when this same sign was made for usual I;/ .' Is 
 zshuh a common sound ? Name three words containing the 
 same sound. 
 
 What do 'ave, 'ope and 'im remind you of (Cockney dialect, 
 perhaps)? How can the same sign stand for you ar.d nnm- 
 him or am ? Are him and ant the same parts of speech 
 in grammar? Are they employed similarly in a sentence? 
 Then you would infer that different parts of speech will not 
 conflict if they have the same sign ? What position with 
 reference to the line is now recommended for outlines ? 
 Which stroke determines the position alluded to ? What is 
 a ' final form ? '.' How can word-signs best be memorized ? 
 What two ways are good for examining upon the word- 
 signs ? 
 
 Do you understand fully all the teachings of Step II.? 
 
STKP III.] PRACTICAL SUOKTIIAND. 29 
 
 STEP III. 
 
 CIRCLE-S AND MODIFICATIONS: 
 
 ( \'2) Thus far the characters have been principally 
 linear, but circle-S (or /) and brief wuh and yah 
 merit special consideration. 
 
 (!.")) The small circle () is in this step written 
 mostly in the evolnte, or unrolling, direction (see 
 blackboard), and is always read first when 
 initially applied. Remember also that S is read 
 last when written last. 
 
 (41) Mechanically considered wuh and yuh are 
 apparent I j halves of . They are presented in two 
 si in pcs for convenience in securing good angular junc- 
 tion with the strokes to which they may be applied. 
 
 (45) Note particularly that circle-S and the brief 
 wuh and yuh forms are only appendages, to be 
 joined to consonant stems as a component part of a 
 stroke. 
 
 (1C) RULE. Circle-S (or Z*) is written 
 
 (1) On the right side of upright stems. 
 
 (2) On the upper side of horizontals (run 
 
 and huh being classed as such). 
 
 (3) On the inside of curves. 
 
 * The small circle occasionally stands for Z in final 
 .situations. 
 
30 INSTUUCT1ON IN [STEP III. 
 
 EXAMPLES : 
 
 sF Ds sCH Ts Ks sG Us Hs sV sN sTH 
 
 A 
 
 This is S attached to a simple stem, and entirely 
 unsyUabic. 
 
 (47) Circle-S between two curves, or followed by 
 a curve, conforms generally to the direction of the 
 second stroke ; as 
 
 noiseless nasal atheism facile pianissimo for-same 
 
 Exception might be made in cases of extreme 
 awkwardness. 
 
 (48) Circle-S between straight strokes that make 
 an angle is turned outside the angle. This is de- 
 manded as a law of motion, irrespective of rules to 
 the contrary. 
 
 bask passage task Jessica paschal discuss risk 
 
 _JL J- 
 
 (49) Write : Does said pass (pas) sap puss 
 sell loose choose sage sod gas sit tease 
 face seem nice miss seen hiss some sash 
 soothe save sign smoke vase fix (x is A'*) 
 sing sand chase case despise Jessop sake 
 soap dusk gossip miser wrestle basic passive 
 vassal misseth desk facile atheism nicely passage 
 missile lessen moisten 
 
STKl' III.] PRACTICAL SIIOKTHAND. 31 
 
 (50) Rule : \Vuh and yah join to the strokes 
 at an angle, like 
 
 wit weak yoke wing you whip yell Yates 
 
 (51) Exception: Except that wuh (only wuh) 
 attaches to the signs for L, M, N, R, in imita- 
 tion of a hook. Always upward R and L ; never the 
 downward. 
 
 when well one where whim worth work whelp 
 
 .^ C *~*. *f.. .0. </{..</^:...C^. 
 
 (52) The following are to be regarded as ex- 
 ceedingly improper joinings of wuh and yuh. The 
 student should note them carefully, and be warned. 
 
 C. ...... C. ...... C 
 
 (53) Although wuh and yuh may be written in 
 two directions, the involute and evolute, preference 
 should be given the latter. Avoid junctions like the 
 following, when such are wholly unnecessary : 
 
 weed wish yoke watch wife weep 
 
 ......... I .............. }. ............ _ ............ Z ............. C .............. \ ........ 
 
 (54) Wuh and yuh may be disjoined in rare 
 cases when absolutely inconvenient to attach them. 
 
 (55) Circle-S intiy be .written within either wuh 
 or yuh, like 
 
 sweet Swede swell swear swan twice yes-sir 
 
 ....] ........ I ....... C ....... c/ ........ <u ........ 1 ........ *__ 
 
32 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP III. 
 
 (50) When the letters W and Y precede a vowel in 
 a word, they represent consonant sounds. In the next 
 step it will be shown when W and Y are vowels. 
 
 (57) Write: Wake weep web weed wag 
 yak wink yank wear yacht wife sweet weave 
 withe swash when* (wen)' swim woof whim* 
 wash wagon went once yam weight unwell 
 word wheat* whiff wasp whack wheel twice 
 unworthy wool twain weary wax PMwin work 
 wind swap unwieldy swing swollen yours 
 (yuh-s) queen qualm bewail dwell quell 
 yellow Wednesday acquire square Ipswich warm 
 equipage squall ammonia equinox insignia 
 unison inquest twist maniac young euphony 
 Europe eulogy nephew twig Dwight unique 
 
 MODIFICATION OF CIRCLE-S: 
 
 (5K) The addition of the sound of T or 1) (tuh 
 or duh) to the sound denoted by the circle-S may be 
 indicated by a small loop, called the st-loop, or 
 stuh. 
 
 pass passed days dazed save stave 
 
 V :> I I C L... 
 
 (50) A further sound of R is added by enlarging 
 the loop. This larger loop is called the str- 
 loop, or ster. 
 
 past pastor boast boaster fast faster 
 
 * The aspirate (huh) is not written in words beijmnini? 
 ich, as legibility is not impaired by its omission. 
 
STKI' III.J I'KAOTICAL SIIOKTIIAM). 33 
 
 . (60) T\vo sounds of S or Z (i.e., ses, sus, sis, 
 etc.)? ZS or SZ, are denoted by enlarging the circle. 
 This is called the ses-circle, or ses. 
 
 fuss fusses base bases lace laces 
 
 ......... L ............ L ............. \, ............. No ......... C. ............ <?_ ...... 
 
 (61) A third sound of S is represented as follows 
 (also S after a loop) : 
 
 excesses possesses recesses tests posters masters 
 
 (62) Cautions. Double-S in spelling is not 
 necessarily two sounds of S. Be governed solely by 
 the sounds. 
 
 The use of stuh initially on straight strokes (more 
 especially light lines) is of doubtful -value, because 
 mechanically difficult* to execute and preserve legi- 
 bility. 
 
 If proof of the above were needed, let the student wcite 
 very rapidly the words step, stock, state, employing the 
 loop for sf, when it will be demonstrated that the pen move- 
 ment has an almost irresistible tendency to turn straight 
 stems into curves. On the other hand shaded straight 
 strokes are less liable to be so affected, and words like stuli, 
 stui/. stni/e, can conform to theory and be written with the 
 loop. Curved stems are obviously unaffected, and admit the 
 stuh-loop invariably. 
 
 Stuh primarily stands for st or ftd in the same 
 syllabic stroke ; another syllable would require the 
 addition of tuh or duh. 
 
 Ster (str) should never be used initially. 
 
 * The tendency of expert stenographers to write words 
 like jn'i iist'i! with the stroke-D for the past tense shows 
 that the motion required for the loop is displeasing, even 
 when linal; confirming the opinion that it is more a matter 
 of dynamics than of shorthand theciVy. 
 
34 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP III 
 
 (63) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Past best pieces guesses feast stone pieced 
 just stitch state paused stage coaster Chester 
 host jester lest Hester most hisses success 
 guest toaster Nestor stakes losses amazed 
 castor advised sashes seems must steam sense 
 abscesses ' stems Sussex suggest masses Lester 
 lobster decisive Dexter postal mastiff justify 
 ensilage successes songster misses diseases 
 investor register sausage system Sisyphus 
 destiny thesis tests Moses bases buster 
 necessaries Jesus season youngster successive 
 hazed insist Mississippi testify schism Susan 
 staff Texas roosters possessor 
 
 (64) WORD-SIGNS LIST II. 
 
 special subject necessary fl.-st steuograph-y-er mistake 
 ' \ \ vQ 
 
 next 
 
 system as or has 
 
 come, Co. 
 
 without 
 
 
 
 .....e... 
 
 
 e 
 
 her 
 
 several soon 
 
 this i 
 
 t 
 
 ^ 
 
 P 
 
 ^k X. _s 
 
 c 
 
 
 (65) The plural of word or word-sign forms is 
 denoted by attaching the circle-S, which also can 
 stand for the affix self, as 
 
 subjects systems mistakes himself herself yourselt 
 ...\> t. STXrr?. ^>. J .... 
 
8TKP III.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 35 
 
 (66) A word- sign can constitute a part of the 
 outline of a derivative word : 
 
 specially unusual severally mistaken unnecessary willing 
 
 READ BLACKBOARD SENTENCES No. 1 : 
 
 (This and subsequent reference to blackboard to be 
 observed when the teacher prepares illustrations according 
 to the accompanying exhibit of Blackboard Suggestions.) 
 
 (67) PHRASES : 
 
 Definition. A phrase in shorthand consists 
 of two or more word outlines joined. Phrasing 
 is done to facilitate speed, and when that is accom- 
 plished the practice is warranted ; otherwise not. Natu- 
 ral phrases, almost unconsciously written, are useful ; 
 but phrasing must be cultivated coincideutly with other 
 procedure. In furtherance of that idea, a few common- 
 place phrases will be presented in the following steps. 
 More extended remarks regarding phrasing as an 
 artistic and valuable development of shorthand writing 
 will appear near the close of this volume. 
 
 (68) SIMPLE PHRASES I.: 
 
 you-will would-be you-are shall-have 
 
 will-be must-be hope-you-will 
 
 as-soon-as as-yct you-ina\ 
 
 Q-9 * r^->.... 
 
36 INSTRUCTION IX [STKI' III. 
 
 (69) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 (Write these sentences slowly and carefully, remembering 
 to apply the principles, suggestions, word-signs and phrases 
 thus far learned. Prepare a neat paper specifying the step 
 and section number. Submit same to teacher for correc- 
 tion, never consciously handing in an error. Use the 
 sentences for dictation practice when they can be accurately 
 written.) 
 
 It will soon be necessary. This special stenographer 
 himself. Which will you wait for? They hope this 
 subject will be as you desire. Stenographers have 
 special systems. Necessary facility comes soon 
 enough. Edward's first subject was ''Ensilage." 
 Suggest some special system. Several testify for 
 him. Hester raised it herself. Atheism has some 
 lessons. Several seasons have passed. Yes, as usual, 
 though you may think her system unnecessary. Have 
 him sweep off this wax. Edwin's nasal passage was 
 stopped. Wash this wool when you think it necessary. 
 Jesse's system has passed best tests. As soon MS 
 you come you may have him know it. Dexter regis- 
 tered by mistake. You will have him do it well, won't 
 you? Last month Bessie's weaving was unworthy. 
 They are coming as usual next season. Twain's 
 whim was specially funny. Do you think Wednesday 
 will be soon enough? It shall be done, though 
 Winnie was unwilling. This unwieldy subject has 
 some sage sense. 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS STEP III.: 
 What is the small circle for S called? What else? In what 
 direction does the pen move when circle-S is written ! Is 
 this a familiar motion ? Where do you see it illustrated? 
 How do wuh and ynh resemble circle-S? Are they written 
 similarly? Are these characters strokes? Why are two 
 directions of wuh and yuh presented? When is S read in 
 an outline? Is there anything peculiar about this? Is an 
 appendage usually considered before its principal stroke? 
 (It is not.) When is S read last? How is S attached to 
 
STKT III.] PRACTICAL SHOKTHAXD. 37 
 
 upright stems? How to horizontal? How to curves? How 
 formed between two curves? How between straight strokes 
 that make an angle? How between T and D or P and B? 
 What law governs the place of the S outside an angle? 
 What other use has S? How is self indicated? 
 
 How are wnh and ynh joined to strokes? Any exceptions 
 to this practice? What phonetic quality have L and K? 
 ( Liquids. ) Is wnh ever attached to clownward-ll or down- 
 wan 1-L? Why not? (The form will conflict with a later 
 principle.) (\inSbejoinedtowuhandyuh? How? What 
 does the word "modification" mean? How is circle-S 
 changed in form? What is Stub? What does it stand for? 
 What isSter, and its meaning? How is clonble-S indicated? 
 How two sounds of S? Does English spelling have any force 
 in the matter? Does the same sign stand for SZ, ZS, ZZ, 
 etc.? What is it called? What does it look like? How 
 many times larger is it than circle-S? (Five.) How is a 
 third sound of S denoted? S after a loop? 
 
 How would the words hawd, chased, cased, be written? 
 The words 1nisie<l, msf;/, elicit/ What is the caution with 
 regard to the loops? is it a matter of theory, or does it 
 relate to practical writing? Why should expert writers 
 sometimes use a stroke when the loop is called for? 
 Why does stuh, initial or final, attach better to a shaded 
 stroke than to a light? Is stuh employed when another 
 syllable is needed? How is the plural number of a word- 
 sign denoted? Does this differ from the usual procedure? 
 l'an the word-signs enter into the make-up of other word 
 outlines? 
 
 What is a phrase? What docs phrasing amount to? Are 
 phrases readily made? Always? Do they come by inspira- 
 tion? How is facility is phrasing acquired? Mention a 
 simple phrase. Is it time wasted at this stage to invent 
 phrases? (Yes.) Do the right kind of phrases hasten 
 speed? Why? 
 
 Write on the blackboard any bad joinings of wuh or yuh 
 with another sign. What motion, involute or evolute, is it 
 preferable to give to wnh and yuh? Which of these motions 
 is like that of the hands of a clock? How are the words 
 <'!,<. n-liijT. n-lnii-k, written? Where lies the difficulty in 
 writing the outlines of unirichlly, inm-dl, ninr,,rthy? How 
 would yon write hrim/l. <l"-i'U, </iti/ / What is the single 
 word that defines the law of motion? (Dynamics.) 
 
 Have yon committed to memory the word-signs of Steps 
 II. and ILL? 
 
 448596 
 
38 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP IV. 
 
 STEP IV. 
 
 THE VOWELS AND VOWEL PROCEDURE: 
 
 (70) Definition. A vowel is a free, voiced sound 
 made with the vocal organs more or less without con- 
 tact. Only twelve vowel sounds are utilized, although 
 this is obviously but a partial* exhibit. However, 
 the following signs are sufficient for all practical 
 purposes in shorthand writing. Vowels are repre- 
 sented by dots and dashes disjoined, and made shaded 
 or light according to the strength of the sound. 
 
 (71) The vowel signs are divided into four groups, 
 the same sign serving in each group, which is placed 
 to (beside) the consonant stroke in three positions, 
 the difference of place indicating the variation of sound. 
 
 (72) LONG VOWEL SCALE: 
 
 LOXG 1 e like ee in fee 
 
 DoT 2 a " ay " lay V (. / medial 5 position. 
 
 VOWEL SIGNS: 3 Sir " ar " far 
 
 I,OXG 1 Sw like aw in maw f~^ initial 
 
 DASH 26 " ow " mow sf^ medial I position. 
 
 VOWKL SIGXS: 3 Co " oo " moo" ^ final ) 
 
 It will be noted that the above are all shaded signs, 
 standing for extended vowel utterance. The " long " 
 vowel is one that can be indefinitely sounded. 
 
 (73) The same vowel sign is used for words like 
 pa, palm, ah, as for far, park, yard, though the latter 
 class (in which a is followed by ?) far outnumbers the 
 other. A proper rolling of the r apparently modifies 
 
 *A alone is said to have nine delicate shades of sound : 
 five are common. 
 
STEP IV.] 
 
 PKACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 39 
 
 the sound of the a. In some sections * of the United 
 States par is pronounced like pa, no sound of r being 
 heard. Good pronunciation demands a slight rolling 
 of the r, though as far as shorthand is concerned the 
 above vowel indication is sufficient. 
 
 (74) SHORT VOWEL SCALE: 
 
 SHORT i 
 
 DOT 2 
 
 VOWEL SIGNS : 3 
 
 like i 
 
 SHORT 
 
 DASH 
 
 VOWEL SIGNS 
 
 initial ) 
 
 medial 5 position. 
 
 final ) 
 
 initial ) 
 
 medial > position. 
 
 final ) 
 
 (75) The figures in the above groups indicate 
 initial, medial or final position, with reference to the 
 consonant stroke. The words and outlines for illustra- 
 tion will make this plain. The beginning of a stroke 
 is always first position for the applied vowel sign. A 
 precise direction of strokes is necessary. 
 
 (7G) EXAMPLES OF APPLIED VOWEL SIGNS : 
 
 key wake make 
 
 Shah wrought rope soup set switch wick sack 
 
 sash 
 
 up 
 
 J 
 
 whoop watch shoo caw 
 
 \ \ i j - 
 
 * Some New Yorkers (and the same is true of certain 
 sections of the South) give to the r such an excess of trill 
 that it seems as though a vowel foreign to the word followed 
 it. This provincialism makes of bird bitr-yid, of earth 
 ur-yith, murder mur-yider, and heard hnr-yid. 
 
40 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP IV. 
 
 EXAMPLES Conti* tied : 
 
 talk oath soap slioe post jib etch 
 
 The position of vowel signs between two strokes 
 will be explained further on in this step. 
 
 (77) A singer sounding the intervals of music 
 runs up the "do, ra, me, fa" scale until the desired 
 note is reached. When seeking for the vowel sound 
 of a word, the shorthand student should sing the E 
 A AR AW O GO I E A O U OO- 
 vowel scale until he has such a clear idea of the sound, 
 sign and sign position, that he can instantly apply his 
 knowledge. 
 
 (78) Recite the correct vowel sounds in the fol- 
 lowing words : 
 
 Note not beat fat niay fate fix top food 
 good but that took fed sad soot off map 
 hid did pet hot let gag sum mean gate 
 harm root cart food part ask fall soft 
 aught said Shah laugh pea eight neigh soak 
 dough Stella gnaw ache knee thaw brew 
 deaf true daub taught. 
 
 The learner is recommended to select a variety of 
 words, and strive to utter with exactness their sounds, 
 both consonant and vowel. 
 
 (79) Exceptional. In the foregoing vowel scale 
 there is no provision for the vowels of words like <u'r, 
 err, whole, pair, her, etc. This is understood (see 
 Sect. 70), and such words are to be represented by the 
 signs of the sound of nearest resemblance, as 
 
 air err whole sir mare worm 
 
 .3. ....... 3. ......... r. 
 
STI-'.r IV.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 41 
 
 (-SO) Circle-S and brief wuh and yiih have no 
 vowel position, being merely appendages. They are 
 always rcarJ first when attached to the beginning of a 
 stroke, and if a vowel occurs it is applied and read 
 with reference to the stroke as a whole. 
 
 VOWEL BEFORE OR AFTER A STROKE : 
 
 (.si) RULE. A vowel sound heard before 
 a consonant is written before the stroke ; i.e., at 
 the left of an upright, and above a horizontal. 
 A vowel after a consonant is placed at the right 
 of vertical strokes and below horizontals. 
 
 (See examples under Section 76.) 
 
 (s2) The above is not a precise statement. The 
 actual procedure is to write the consonant outline 
 first, and then place the vowel signs, whether 
 they are to appear before or after the stems. 
 
 (83) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 (Insert all vowel signs according to the sound, and 
 not the spelling. ) 
 
 Ate ought eat art oat aim tar toe char 
 hoe shoe foe seethe doe sooth once ache 
 watch since such knee neigh thaAv though 
 sad stop soup stain gnaw Yates own owing 
 ode oath awed eve ebb itch owed ash soak 
 she tease dose seed seat pass piece guesses 
 pester pieces stage hisses host poster mosses 
 want sweep weave fuss hay axe jaw odd 
 Joe Shaw obey wages Opie ado aha census 
 Eph pause noses Jay eighty chaise egg show 
 into switch face sting whip web echo Webster 
 steam sake wept stove widow wave dazed 
 sum lost musters thesis Swede stem roses 
 test spaced ashy lest oxen sixty safety stucco 
 
42 INSTRUCTION IN [.STEP IV. 
 
 (84) READING EXERCISE : 
 
 L/J.1.1LJ ..... ; 
 
 I \ 
 
 h.A 
 
 (85) There is no particular need of indicating the 
 vowel that is understood within the ses character. 
 The common words, like same, /s, o?r, w/.sf, etc., 
 in the foregoing reading exercise, will further on have 
 word- sign forms ; so but little attention need now 
 be paid to them except as instruments to teach the 
 vowels. 
 
 (8G) VOWEL SIGNS BETWEEN STROKES: 
 
 Vowels before and after single consonant strokes 
 have already been noted. A vowel between two 
 strokes that represent a word of one syllable takes 
 three situations : 
 
 1. First position vowels are written (in correct 
 place) after the first stroke, as 
 
 beat feet heat bit tit fiit 
 
SIT.l' IV.] 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 43 
 
 2. Second position vowels are written after the 
 first stroke if long; but before the second if short, 
 .as 
 
 bait 
 
 fate 
 
 hate 
 
 but 
 
 shut 
 
 hut 
 
 fe_*] \ 
 
 3. Third position vowels are written before the 
 second stroke, as 
 
 bat 
 
 hat 
 
 foot 
 
 hood 
 
 * In other words, all first and all long second posi- 
 tion vowels are applied to the first consonant ; and 
 every other vowel to the second ; the design being 
 to make the place of the vowel show its character, 
 even if the dot or dash be carelessly written. 
 
 * This is the traditional rule, formulated for a time when 
 vowels were more used than now. The treatment we would 
 surest for this situation is this : 
 
 Rule. A vowel sign occurring between two strokes that 
 stand for a syllable should be written in proper position after 
 the first stroke, when convenient ; otherwise, before the 
 second stroke. The measure of convenience may be illus- 
 trated as follows : 
 
 take cool rang dash depth rap 
 
 look 
 
 catch 
 
 7 
 
 the endeavor being to keep the Towel out of angles 
 and ambiguous positions; and that accomplished, all fur- 
 ther effort may end. 
 
44 INSTRUCTION IN [sTEr IV. 
 
 (87) Where two strokes stand for two syllables, 
 the vowel sign is applied to the stroke of its syllable, 
 as 
 
 poet poem Leon Cayenne Cohen bevy coda 
 
 (88) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 (Always execute the full consonant outline first, 
 and then apply the vowel signs.) 
 
 Tip deep fat fade mark meek feed took 
 book did read can look been done road 
 foot ship note sham rude boat that much 
 made get good rush push ditch shock leave 
 leech shook lave patch depth latch vim vex 
 hark botch match tax thick tub teetli kith 
 chin kin chat knit lady* many Effie Emma 
 Annie Eddie Abbie papist memento gummy 
 tobacco funny mimic sesame invest symphony 
 dusky twit Memphis dusty late receipt fishy 
 evade showed nail route theme lathe towage 
 thief piano fasten muscle 
 
 For words like Emma and Annie write as many 
 strokes as there are syllables, and vowelize according 
 to Sect. 87. 
 
 (89) Use a pen for all these exercises, selecting 
 one not so pliable as to shade too broadly. Since the 
 advent of reliable fountain pens the pencil has become 
 unpopular for shorthand, not only because pen notes 
 are superior in point of legibility, but because con- 
 tinued use of the pencil hurts other penmanship. 
 
 * Note that final // has the vowel sound of i. In the words 
 one and once the vowel takes the sound of wuh. These are 
 peculiar aspects of w and y. 
 
STKI* iv.] :M:ACI icAi, SHORTHAND. 45 
 
 (1)0) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 Proper nouns arc distinguished from ihe i;ias> of words 
 by tlic underscore. 
 
 READ BLACKBOARD SENTENCES No. 2. 
 (1)1) REMARKS: 
 
 After the consideration of one more principle 
 (diphthongs), the student will have shorthand material 
 sullicient to represent all the sounds of language, so 
 that word outlines can be read ; which leads to the 
 remark that everything written should be read, and 
 read many times in order to acquire perfect familiarity 
 with every step. Write the same thing many times. 
 Read that writing many times. Shirk nothing. These 
 tasks cannot be dwelt upon too long or too assiduously. 
 
 ('.1 2) Do not lift the pen ofteiier than necessary. 
 Make each consonant outline entire before removing 
 the pen from the paper. Much of the procedure of 
 this immual is in the direction of avoiding foolish pen 
 liftings. A pertinent illustration of this will be found 
 in the use of the ticks in Step V. ; and the early dis- 
 carding of the vowel sign obviates much pen lifting. 
 
46 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP IV. 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS STEP IV.: 
 
 What is a-vowel? Ho\v many are mentioned in this step? 
 How are they represented? Do these dots and dashes bear 
 any resemblance to other shaded and light characters? Is 
 there a design in so indicating the vowels? There are how 
 many dot-vowel signs? How many clash? Name the long 
 dot-vowels. The long dash. The short dot. The short dash. 
 Name all the first position vowels. Where is first position? 
 Does it have anything to do with the ruling of the paper? 
 Name four of the third place vowels. How many more are 
 there? How many shades of sound is voweJ-a said to have? 
 Name three words containing dash vowel signs. Name throe 
 containing the short-dot signs. What do the figures refer 
 to in Sects. 72 and 74? Does spelling appear to regulate the 
 vowel sounds? How are the "exceptional" vowels repre- 
 sented? (Sect. 79.) 
 
 How would you pronounce Noah, Eva, EUa. J How is the 
 vowel read when written before a stroke containing wuh? 
 Then wuh is really a consonant without vowel limitation? 
 Which are written first in an outline, the consonants or 
 vowels? A vowel read before a consonant is how written? 
 Which side of an upright stroke? Which side of a horizon- 
 tal? How about curves? Are the vowel signs ever joined 
 to the consonant? Is it necessary to indicate the vowel 
 within ses? What is the best way to discover the vowel 
 sounds of a word? What is the vowel " scale " ? Sound it. 
 
 Do vowels between two strokes have a fixed or variable 
 position? What governs the position? Do the syllables 
 have anything to do with it? What is the rule for first posi- 
 tion vowels? For second? For third? Why is such pains- 
 taking demanded? What will it amount to when vowels are 
 discarded? When is y a vowel? Give a few examples. 
 How would you Avrite Annie to make it differ from Ann? 
 Eddie from Ed? Emma from Em? What is the rule? 
 
 When two vowels occur between two strokes, what is 
 done? There are probably how many syllables? Then the 
 syllable idea really settles the question? Which is prefer- 
 able to use, a pen or a pencil? What is a foolish pen- 
 lifting? Sing the vowel " scale." 
 
STKP V.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 47 
 
 STEP V. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS : 
 
 (93) Definition. The diphthong is a double 
 vowel. There are four diphthongs, namely : 
 
 AI, OI, EU (EW) and OU (OW) 
 
 (94) Diphthongs have two positions AI and 
 OI first, and EU and OU third ; and they are 
 generally placed to the consonant stroke like the 
 vowel signs, through occasionally attached. 
 
 EXAMPLES: 
 AI OI EU OU hive ahoy pew vow poise bough 
 
 JOINED DIPHTHONGS: 
 few iron idea height Hyson cue eyes bow 
 
 1 1 ^ -, * \ 
 
 DIPHTHONG WORD-SIGNS : 
 I ayeorhili new how now 
 
 V 
 
 >-/ A -....V*i 
 
 (95) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Toys pews aisle file vices noises ally 
 (ul-luh) spice sky avoid dew rouse ounce 
 Idaho lieu Ohio mew accuses Hugh 
 amuses China voice houses eying highness 
 high sliced shyster ivy desire voyage vouch 
 review couch nephew widely chew annoy 
 moist ahoy hew hoister juices argue Depew 
 rescue feud hourly bureau writhe 
 
48 1XSTKI.XTION IX [SHOT V. 
 
 (96) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 V 
 
 \ 
 
 \ ^ i T 
 
 I ... P _ -Oi I. 
 
 r 
 
 (97) THE TICKS: 
 
 Definition. The tick is the shortest linear charac- 
 ter in shorthand writing, being in length less than 
 half a stroke. Signs so small demand certainty of 
 direction and nicety of attachment when joined. 
 
 (98) The ticks are introduced to stand for fre- 
 quently* recurring words, and their quality of being 
 joined saves pen lifting. 
 
 (99) The or he is denoted by a light tick- 
 executed in the direction of chub, or puh ; that is, 
 obliquely with reference to the line, not to the stroke 
 to which it is attached, as 
 
 the-dog the-cat he-will he-may lic-luis as-he 
 
 f < 
 
 L 
 
 the-subject the-match the-same he-would the-hat 
 
 * C. C. Beale reports that in 180,000 words, covering all 
 kinds of matter, counted and classified, the and he occurred 
 9,'JGO times, and a and and 7,598 times. By comparison, a 
 few other words approaching them in frequency were : for, 
 3,3!)4; have, 2,304; to, 4,920; we, 4,050; you, 7,530. 
 
STEP V.] riiACTICAL SHORTHAND. 41) 
 
 (100) A, an and and are denoted by a tick 
 written in the direction of tub or kuh ; that is, 
 upright or horizontal with reference to the line. 
 
 a-dog a-cat ami-will and-may an-axe an-atom 
 
 I - 
 
 and-this and-o and-a and-the a-hat a-rate 
 
 (101) As the examples indicate, these ticks are 
 joined,* and really make a phrase form, with the 
 word denoted by the tick as the first member. Al- 
 ways write the tick first, and read it first. Standing 
 for actually another word, the tick takes precedence 
 (in reading) of even the circle-S. The use of S-tuh 
 initially, instead of stuh, favors the joining of a 
 tick. 
 
 (102) Another feature of the tick (see 101) is 
 that it can be joined, if need be, to the preceding out- 
 line, thereby becoming the second member of the. 
 phrase so formed. Whether the tick shall be joined 
 to the preceding or following outline is governed by 
 convenience. The single stroke word-signs are com- 
 monly followed by the tick, as 
 
 in-thc for-the have-the by-thc which-he 
 
 (, 
 
 * 111 rare cases, where a fluent junction would be im- 
 possible, a tick-word hcy'uininy a sentence may be denoted 
 by a tick disjoined. 
 
50 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP V. 
 
 (103) The two directions of the ticks are granted 
 to secure good angles at the point of attachment, 
 which gives rise to the following remark : 
 
 (104) Angles in shorthand. It is well to ap- 
 preciate, even at this step, the importance of good 
 angles at the junction of strokes. There is this dis- 
 tinction of angles, the acute is good, the obtuse is 
 bad, the right angle is indifferent. The acute angle 
 is termed good, because speedy writing has no effect 
 upon its character. The obtuse is less desirable, 
 because it is likely to degenerate into a curve when 
 rapidly written. The angle as a " study" in shorthand 
 writing is of exceeding interest ; it lias the most to do 
 with the difference between theoretical and practical 
 shorthand. 
 
 (105) The ticks make urgent demand for good 
 angles ; therefore two considerations are paramount 
 when the tick is to be joined, 1st, the best angle 
 when a choice is had of two directions; 2d, a forward 
 direction of pen movement. If both cannot be secured, 
 the quick (acute) angle is the more to be desired. 
 
 (106) TICK JOININGS : 
 Quick angles /~v...V> ..... | __ \ ........ / _____ ^/ < /.... 
 
 Slow angles 
 
 J \_^_ ^ / -^ ^ 
 
 (107) TICK WORD-SIGNS: 
 
 who 
 all already ought of or on to but should whom 
 
 \ I / \ I / 
 
STKP V.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 51 
 
 The tick word- signs are not commonly joined to 
 long outlines, though occasionally to the single stroke 
 word-signs when the form will not ch.sh with the 
 other signification of the tick, i.e., he, the, and, etc. 
 
 of-such of-this on-this of-them to-him 
 
 I. t 
 
 to-\vhoin too-many to-which shoulcl-be it-sh'd-be 
 
 (108) TlCK PHRASES: 
 
 Of-the, to-the, and-a, and-the, etc., which are 
 purely tick phrases, are better joined together than 
 to the preceding or following stroke, in order that 
 these minute characters may be given a workable size. 
 Therefore, always phrase the ticks when possible, 
 and at quick angles. 
 
 of-the to the on-the he-should and-a and-the 
 
 On and should are written upward ; forward direc- 
 tion and phrasing demand this. 
 
 In the mental picture of what is to be written the 
 tick forms an integral part of the whole outline. If 
 the writer misses attaching one where it was intended 
 to go, let him not go back and " touch up," but apply 
 to the following stroke. 
 
 (109) POSITION: 
 
 Two notions of position prevail in -shorthand. 
 ( )ne has already been noted, namely, the place or 
 position of the vowel sign beside the consonant stroke. 
 
52 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 This is vowel position, and has sole reference to the 
 outline. Another view is that of strokes and outlines 
 with respect to the line written upon. This is outline 
 position. The two ideas blend into one when vowels 
 are discarded. Until then the word-signs only will 
 illustrate outline position. 
 
 (110) For the easier mastery of the word-signs 
 they will be often represented in groups ; that is, 
 the same sign in three positions (1) above (2) 
 upon, and (3) across (or below) the line. 
 
 GROUP WORD-SIGNS List I. : 
 
 
 \2 
 
 be, 
 
 object 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 to-be 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 time 
 
 
 2 
 
 it 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 at, 
 
 mt 
 
 .// 
 
 1 
 /.. 2 
 
 each 
 
 which 
 
 / / 
 
 ' 3 
 
 much 
 
 M 
 
 1 
 
 if 
 
 
 V 
 
 ( 2 
 
 for, 
 
 fact 
 
 
 V. 3 
 
 half 
 
 )> 
 
 ^ 1 
 
 here 
 
 _ , 
 
 .^\ 2 
 
 her 
 
 
 
 ' 3 
 
 our 
 
 
 /" 2 \vill 
 
 .' /TT.... 3 whole, allow 
 
 
 1 ever 
 
 '2 have 
 
 3 however 
 
 1 these 
 
 2 tliis 
 
 3 those, thus 
 
 1 we-are 
 
 2 where 
 
 3 a ware 
 
 
 wish, she 
 
 shall 
 
 issue 
 
 It will be noted that the most common word rests 
 upon the line, which is the natural attitude for writing. 
 The positions of the others will have to be considered 
 more or less arbitrary until that matter can be viewed 
 from a more rational standpoint. For the time behi"; 
 memorize the group word-signs, seeking to know each 
 by its place as much as by its form, and employ them 
 carefully in the writing exercises which follow the re- 
 spective lists. 
 
 READ BLACKBOARD SENTENCES No. 3. 
 
STEP V.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND 53 
 
 (111) FURTHER COMMON WORD-SIGNS III. : 
 
 I 
 
 ... because 
 
 . c 
 
 is or his we or with 
 
 ..V .... happy -what 
 
 ^ s \j 
 
 when ye or y ear 
 
 ~7~... common beyond 
 
 shall-be this-is this-is-to-be 
 
 (112) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 This choice must first be taken. You will have 
 no home next year. Avoid foul-mouthed youth, but 
 may thy choice be nice boys. Who abused him so 
 foully? New spice is necessary for the best pies. At 
 what time should I come? Be up and awake while 
 the day is young. I will ride whenever and wherever 
 you desire. Avoid resigning yourself to his power. 
 Your wine would be well enough if you were willing 
 to do what was right with it. A reward will be paid 
 for all work well done. Where we are aware of a 
 mistake your words won't be worth much. Too many 
 are annoyed by this noise. A moist season makes the 
 rye look well. Soon he will come witli them or with 
 you. If you wish you may come now. I will do 
 whatever (what -j- ever) you advise me to do. 
 
54 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP V. 
 
 * You must wake early and leave for Watson, 
 where your son awaits you. The Swede swore he 
 would switch the boy who stole his money. As he 
 was walking on the beach a big wave wet his shoes. 
 
 SUGGESTION AND COMMENT: 
 
 The student should read shorthand aloud as a daily 
 exercise. The reading of English in the common 
 schools is a matter of regular practice, in order tluit 
 facility may be gained in the management of pro- 
 nunciation, inflection, and all that pertains to good 
 elocution. 
 
 Not less should shorthand be read, but for the dif- 
 ferent purpose of training the eye to a quick recogni- 
 tion of the forms. If such reading is aloud, the 
 critical student will not be satisfied with a halting, 
 garbled version of his notes, but strive for a fluent 
 and accurate rendering, and so acquire perfect fa- 
 miliarity with the characters. 
 
 There is no reason why shorthand slowly written 
 should not be as legible as print; and it will be if thr 
 writer executes proper outlines, and learns to know 
 them at sight. 
 
 The zigzag mark thus far employed for the under- 
 score may be considered the m-dash of stenography. 
 It may usurp the office of the dash (or hyphen) when 
 written between characters, or it may serve for the 
 parentheses when made to enclose phrases. Placed 
 beneath an outline, it may indicate a desire for em- 
 phasis or call particular attention to a new or 'technical 
 word in unfamiliar matter. 
 
 *The starred sentences are quoted, Avith permission, 
 from ANDREW'S GUADED SENTENCE BOOK, published by H..L. 
 Andrews, Pittsburg, Pa.; and while acknowledging the obli- 
 gation, we warmly recommend the student of shorthand to 
 procure the book for study auxiliary to any system. 
 
STEP V.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 55 
 
 (113) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 (After reading the follow ing sentences enough to become 
 thoroughly familiar with every character, copy the outlines 
 at least Jive times for practice in shorthand penmanship. 
 See Step VI. for the new stroke which begins the second 
 sentence.) 
 
 ^ 
 
 L 
 
 J 
 
 _L i i i c 
 
 ) 
 
 c r ^ 
 
 ?..... A. ...V <^> LTT-. 
 
 \ ( r ILL 
 
 I ( > ^ . J 
 
REVIEW QUESTION STEP V.: 
 What is a diphthong? How many are there? What posi- 
 tions do they take? Which are first position? Which third? 
 Is there a diphthong sound in the words ml turf. >nitnn\ 
 lin-ratnre.S Are diphthongs ever joined to strokes? Name 
 the diphthong word-signs. Do the appendages of recic and 
 now appear to be parts of the diphthong signs? 
 
 What is a tick? How long is a tick? Are ticks ever 
 shaded? Is the direction of the ticks for he, the, a, an and 
 and important? Is it convenient to attach a tick to a stroke 
 beginning with the St-loop? Is the tick joined always to 
 the following outline? What governs this? Name a tick 
 word-sign. Is the tick word-sign ever shaded? Name the 
 shaded ones. Why are some placed above the line? How 
 can the same tick stand for both he and thi'S An and mxl? 
 Are outlines of different parts of speech likely to conflict? 
 (They are not.) Mention a few such cases already pre- 
 sented. (You and your, him and am, ye and year.) What 
 direction does the the-tick take with reference to the line? 
 Does the direction of a stem influence the direction of the 
 tick? What is the direction of the and- tick? Why is 
 an option given of two directions? Do angles have any 
 bearing? Are angles important in shorthand? Why is 
 legibility enhanced by proper angles? Which is the best 
 angle? Which the worst? Are forward strokes desirable? 
 Which the better, a quick angle or a forward stroke? 
 Illustrate, a bad angle. What direction are on and should 
 written? Of, to, but, who, ought? Why are who and umjht 
 written downward? Name a few tick phrases. 
 
 What is position? How many notions of position pre- 
 vail in shorthand? What is the first notion of it? What the 
 second? Are they allied? What illustrates the first idea? 
 What the second? 
 
 What is a group word-sign? Give an example. How 
 many in a group? Which word takes the position on the 
 line generally? What is third position? Do the vowels 
 fix the position of all these word-signs? What are the signs 
 and positions of the words issue, a//""', liftlf.' Are the word- 
 signs more readily learned in groups? 
 
STO1> VI.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 57 
 
 STEP VI. 
 
 (114) ADDITIONAL CONSONANTS: 
 
 Sound 
 Sign. Name. 
 
 Conventional 
 Name. Power and Use 
 
 
 ^ ^ 
 fe / Sub 
 
 Es S in Es-py Pi-ous 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 /.... Znb 
 
 Zc Z " Zc-ro Ra-7ee 
 
 
 P 
 
 3 ..7... Wuh 
 
 Way W " Way, Sway, 
 
 West 
 
 ja 
 
 c f- 
 
 ^ V... Yuh 
 
 Yav Y " Yea. Yost. 
 
 Y ab or 
 
 These strokes are rarely used except initially and 
 finally. 
 
 (115) Syllables. The appearance of the vowel 
 leads to the first notion of syllabic representation in 
 shorthand writing, because a vowel is the simplest 
 form of the syllable. A single consonant cannot be a 
 syllable, and the more common syllables consist of a 
 vowel and a consonant. 
 
 (116) Syllabic treatment of word outlines is 
 greatly conductive to legibility. One reason for this 
 is that the habit is early formed to" look upon words as 
 combinations of syllables ; and if the shorthand out- 
 line can be made to imitate this structural feature, the 
 eye comprehends the meaning of the form thus graphi- 
 cally pictured. 
 
 (117) GENERAL RULE. "When con- 
 sidering the outline for a word, write a. stroke 
 for a syllable, as far as may be possible. This 
 is the principle underlying the word forms and 
 writing procedure of this manual. 
 
58 INSTRUCTION IN [STK1> VI. 
 
 (118) The need of a stroke form for S, Z, wuh 
 and yuh is incidental to syllabic outline formation, 
 and its use produces the variety of outline needed to 
 prevent conflict of words. 
 
 (119) RULE FOR STROKE-S: 
 
 Employ the stroke-S, i. e.)> when S is the 
 only consonant sound in an initial or final 
 syllable. Stroke-S might appropriately be termed 
 Syllabic-S. 
 
 es-sence sense sci-on sign ra-cy race Cy-rus sire* 
 
 <^ L <^ 
 
 (120) The circle-S () is used in all other situa- 
 tions. It is seldom found necessary to employ the 
 stroke-S medially ; and, besides, the circle is the more 
 fluent hinge (so to speak) at the junction of strokes. 
 
 (121) The above rule is of almost universal appli- 
 cation. The rare occasions for a slightly different 
 application of it are (1) when another S occurs in 
 the same syllable (because the appendage ses does 
 not furnish the vowel implication needed), and (2) 
 a few cases where a distinguishable outline is needed. 
 For example : 
 
 cease assess (whispers) size sizes (voice) ask sack asp sap 
 
 J .} 1 1. 
 
 Hereafter circle-S will be termed S simply, and the 
 alternate form stroke-S. 
 
STKP VI.] PUACTICAI, SHORTHAND ,-)!) 
 
 (122) RULE FOR STROKE-Z : 
 
 The stroke form is always used when Z is 
 the first sound in a word; in all other cases it 
 follows the rule of Section ng. 
 
 zeal Zanzibar zone zest zero rosy mazy asthma 
 
 b ) 
 
 (123) RULE FOR STROKES WUH AND YIJH : 
 
 The stroke forms are employed when wuh 
 or yuh is the only* consonant sound in a syl- 
 lable, except that S and its loop modifications 
 may be included in the same syllabic stroke. 
 
 way yea wary payee ways sway yeast west "Wooster 
 
 > f V\- Tr \ __!_>_ 
 
 (124) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Waste ceases Essex society over Stacy 
 science Siam secede seance zig-zag Sophia 
 assist seditious Swazey noisy Zerah assister 
 Swansea hazy osage serene fussy Worcester 
 saurian serious pussy posy Assyrian (es-ruh-n) 
 sofa Sepoy sedate estimate escape espouse 
 Savoy estate esteem series esquire sorrows 
 pursue ensue Yerxa saucy Wiswell Pickwick 
 Orwell see-saw solo Xenia 
 
 READ BLACKBOARD SENTENCES No. 4. 
 
 * It is interesting to note the similarity of treatment of 
 the two forms of S and the two forms of wuh and ynh. 
 
GO INSTRUCTION IN [STEP VI. 
 
 (125) READING EXP:RC1SE: 
 
 Plurals of words ending with stroke- S generally 
 finish with the circle-S, as policies, f<(U<i<-ifx. 
 
 (126) THE ASPIRATE HUH: 
 
 It has been remarked that huh could be omitted 
 from words like ^cheel, whim, whiff, without mate- 
 rially affecting legibility. The syllabic use of wuh 
 suggests other words of the same class, the outlines 
 of which need not contain huh, though there may be 
 strong aspiration. We refer to words like 
 
 why whiz whey whoa whisk whist whistle 
 
 ^ V 
 
 It may not be commonly noted that 
 
 <//, etc., if spelled by sound, appear as hwcn, lin-(>r<>. 
 and the theoretic rendering furnished for this 
 situation is an H-tick prefixed to , wr and //// 
 respectively. 
 
 This is well enough, so far as theory goes, but in 
 this method we have ample use for the tick in another 
 direction ; therefore treatment like that presented in 
 the next section is made to prevail. 
 
STK1' VI.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. Gl 
 
 (127) HUH GENERALLY OMITTED: 
 
 Though frequent in spelling, H is obscure in 
 sound, and may often be omitted without danger to 
 legibility. When necessary use the stroke- H, con- 
 sidering it merely in the light of a word identifier in 
 special cases ; as, for instance, 
 
 is hat, because ___]____ would be at 
 is hitch, because would be each 
 
 hate, because | would be it 
 
 hood, because I would be hud 
 
 (128) But stroke-H does not join favorably to 
 muh and ur, so an oblique tick is recommended for 
 this situation ; jjs 
 
 hem hammer horse mohair humane Hammond 
 
 At the same time proficient writers stand in no urgent 
 need of this device, and receive ample assistance from 
 position or the context to freely read unaspirated . 
 outlines. 
 
 (129) When huh is preceded by another character, 
 oftentimes its hooked beginning is imperfectly formed. 
 This is no blemish ; merely the result of fluent writing. 
 Note the following : 
 
62 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP VI. 
 
 (130) Stroke-H may be omitted from the outlines 
 of the following words : 
 
 Write : Here home happy hope her horse 
 harm help white height health had 
 half homely history halve harmony 
 humanity hand hamper happen harp 
 whiskey heart whisper whew wheez<es 
 heard whence whirl whine whimper 
 whisker whop whale whack mishap 
 whole hour adhere 
 
 (131) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 (132) WORD-SIGNS IV. : 
 
 ./... especial r thank, youth, thousand 
 
 L 
 
 L 
 
 ask 
 
 essential ....?*.. together 
 
 into influence 
 
 .unto * suggestion 
 
Sll'.l' VI.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 63 
 
 It is a wise plan to have a sort of ' ' knowledge 
 book," wherein to copy word-signs and all valuable 
 hints received regarding shorthand. Have the book 
 small enough to be easily carried in the pocket, and 
 refer to it at odd moments. 
 
 (133) FURTHER PHRASES: 
 
 I J V 
 
 ...(1....V.. vou-wlll-have ... n r ,, 
 
 V.... we-have 
 
 c 
 
 p . would-have \? to us 
 
 WC-Wlll 
 
 with-rnc vo for us 
 
 ) c 
 
 -*/ we-sliall 
 
 TT>... with-him in-his 
 
 
 
 -t I 
 
 ..\>.. iii-this \ we-thinl 
 
 Note how ws and 7's are represented above. 
 Write only the phrases given, and positively no other. 
 rhrasing is often desirable, although not absolutely 
 essential. Many good writers do not phrase at all. 
 It is a development of the subject which may or may 
 not be followed. 
 
 (134) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 When writing, always reason out the full outline before 
 putting pen to paper ; but having decided what the strokes 
 are to be, then write them without a pause. A tick prefixed 
 or affixed is a part of the full form ; do not go back to 
 " touch up " characters, or to attach ticks. 
 
 We will give thanks unto Him. Cease this un- 
 necessary waste. Society has this season for exercise. 
 
64 INSTRUCTION IN ' [STEP VI. 
 
 Hei: essay showed special thought and was essentially 
 wise. Life to us is especially rich in hope. Celina 
 was " scienced " in the choicest ideas of stenography. 
 The Sepoy was accused because he was first in the 
 uprising. The astute owl allows no mouse to escape. 
 We are happy because we know how many will come 
 from Essex. We shall use Worcester sauce next 
 season. He says " Ahem ! " when he has the asthma. 
 Lucy lies in a hammock on the piazza. He hitched 
 his horse beside the hedge and headed for home. Be- 
 cause of seditious schemes his influence was wasted. 
 Salome, the physicist, knew how to make essences out 
 of herbs. We must have silence in the game of Whist. 
 We shall be especially influenced by your advice. The 
 deceased is said to have caught the disease in New 
 Zealand. If you will espouse this cause now I shall be 
 especially happy. The sausages were sizzling in a 
 saucer on the stove. 
 
 (135) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 L^VlLJ 
 
 ii 
 
 t 
 
STEP VI.] . PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 65 
 
 (136) REMARKS: 
 
 The sentences herein given are not remarkable for 
 their coherency or wisdom. They are presented simply 
 to illustrate certain phases of word structure certain 
 pronounced sound situations and intended to im- 
 press the rules and principles so strongly that the stu- 
 dent will be led to ever after recognize the situations, 
 and be able to apply the right procedure. 
 
 To the shorthand writer words are the compounds 
 of syllables, and syllables expressive of situations for 
 which stenographic principles are devised ; and whether 
 it be this or that of the principles which have been, or 
 are to be, introduced, it is for the student to appre- 
 ciate the situation, know that there is certain treatment 
 to appertain, apply the same quickly and the deed 
 is done ! 
 
 (NoTB As allied to the study of Syllabic-S, See Vowel 
 Implication, p. 2G9). 
 
66- INSTRUCTION IN [STEP VI. 
 
 > REVIEW QUESTIONS, STEP VI.: 
 
 How many new signs appear in this step? What are 
 they? When used? Why not introduced before? (Because 
 they have such limited and special use.) Do these complete 
 the exhibit of primary shorthand material? (They do.; 
 Could these strokes be called syllabic: .s, z, ni or >j'f (Yes.) 
 What is the syllable in word structure? What is the rule 
 for dividing a word into syllables? How does a dictionary 
 indicate the syllables? "What is the general rule for syllabic 
 shorthand writing? What is the advantage of syllabic 
 treatment? 
 
 When is stroke-S used? Is it used for medial syllables? 
 Name three words for which it is proper to use stroke-S or 
 Z. What would these outlines stand for if S was used? 
 Does the rule apply when another sound of S is included in 
 the same syllabic stroke? Give a few instances. (See Sect. 
 121.) What is the rule for stroke-W or Y? Do they essen- 
 tially follow the same rule as stroke-S? Then the two forms 
 for W, Y and S are practically for the same reason? 
 
 Would you employ the stroke-S for the termination -ism* 
 How would that syllable be represented? How would ccdac 
 and ceased be written? And by analogy what would be a 
 way to write the syllable cist? Yet how would resist and 
 possessed be written? Why this variation? 
 
 Why is ask a word-sign? Why into and nnt> Is it not 
 because they are departures from suggestions already given? 
 Should beginners phrase? How much? Do all writers 
 phrase? To what extent is it safe? 
 
 When can huh be omitted? Name two wuh-words that 
 have a sound of huh not indicated. How are home, /m/v'.v- 
 her and the like written? What is stroke-H ever used for? 
 When is Z always employed? In other situations what rule 
 is followed? How is H represented before muh and ur? 
 Why is this? What are stenographic principles apparently 
 devised for? What should, be the endeavor of the student in 
 shorthand study? 
 
STK1 1 VII. J PRACTICAL SIIOUTHAM). 67 
 
 STEP VII. 
 
 UPWARD AND DOWNWARD RANDL: 
 
 (137) Reference to the scheme of consonant signs 
 will show two strokes for each R and L. These have 
 important application in syllabic writing, because their 
 direction is dependent upon the adjacent vowel. 
 They also present an early step in the discarding of 
 vowels ; although at this stage the student need only 
 take cognizance of the syllabic tendency of the two 
 forms for R and L, and endeavor to understand and 
 apply them before proceeding further. 
 
 (138) Rule : Upward-R (Rtth) ..&..... is used 
 for the sound of R when it is followed by a vowel 
 sound in the same syllable ; and always after M. 
 
 <V 
 
 Downward-R (uR) /..- is used for the sound of 
 
 R when it is preceded by a vowel sound ; and always 
 before M. 
 
 (139) Rule : IIpward-L (Luh) *..L .'..... is used 
 for the sound of L when it is followed by a vowel 
 sound, and in monosyllabic words after S, as sa/e, 
 Stud. 
 
 ,-/- 
 Downward-L (uL) M ,... is used for the sound 
 
 of L when it is jnweded by a vowel sound ; but it 
 is never written alone. 
 
 See also positives and negatives contrasted in Step XVI. 
 
68 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP VII. 
 
 (140) EXAMPLES: 
 
 wreck ark rear array limb elm chair chary 
 
 lasso also fall follow Lowell ally lower early 
 
 i 
 
 l (X Cr f\ V 
 
 Cl 
 
 error Rarus fear fury rain earn pill pillow 
 
 4^-^ 
 
 Cicero Caesar jewel July leeway alway failure follower 
 
 \ 1. 1- try \ i 
 
 o 
 
 (141) EXCEPTIONS: 
 
 The foregoing is a clear rendering of a syllabic 
 situation for the advantage of beginners* in writing 
 and reading legible shorthand. The following excep- 
 tions in favor of a mechanical facility of execution are 
 for all practical writing : 
 
 Always write upward-R before Always write upward-L before 
 
 I < !.,( __ i\_ 
 
 "This distinction between upward and downward L and 
 R should be justified, in the estimation of the student,, if it 
 did nothing more than distinguish the frequent final syllables 
 -ry and -ly from-er, -or and -al. 
 
STEP VII.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. G9 
 
 POOK ANGLE 
 earth arch urge room summer elves help health 
 
 7 7 7 
 
 GOOD ANGLE 
 
 X ^J /I V. <r>^.__,(\^\j7_ 
 
 (142) in words like mellow, valley, Rollo, the 
 student is sometimes in doubt whether to write down- 
 ward or upward L, or both. The practice is to make 
 the strokes correspond to the number of syllables, and 
 select the L which will best show this without vowel 
 assistance, namely, the upward. 
 
 follow swallow gulley hallow Shelley bellow 
 
 V 
 
 (143) In shorthand writing double letters are 
 commonly considered as having but one sound ; but 
 for some words a syllabic structure must be given to 
 the outline to distinguish them from words containing 
 the same sounds, but fewer syllables. This treatment 
 greatly assists legibility when vowels are discarded. 
 
 annoy Emma abbey allay innocence essay Effle arrow 
 
 JA 
 
 (144) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Bear ball pair fall ring rake ark rug 
 argue coal halo elbow Lora Aurora narrow 
 orb veal shawl lily reveal layer Alma lazy 
 
70 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN' 
 
 [STEP VH. 
 
 loathe reach lazily arch purity apology foliage 
 
 arrester melody raised sorrow oars sources 
 
 Cicily outlaw wry Howell scissors Silas 
 beware Rowena yellow bewail Cyrus rely 
 
 chill ullage lesson hurl Russell alchemy alumni 
 
 barrier* superior career Laura dual fellow 
 
 royal oral wearily avail ' layer polish whitish 
 
 Allegheny sherry Ellery ivory Illinois dahlia 
 Ophelia colossal parallel usury 
 
 (145) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 >-< CV "w- W^vxC< V \^- ? 
 
 ^ ^ 7 . .-.^ ^_ 
 
 -C\ 
 
 * In advanced writing words which theoretically end in 
 ruh-ur appear as follows, because a more fluent rendering : 
 
 barrier rare inferior 
 
 carrier interior 
 
STEP VII.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 71 
 
 (14G) CON, COM and COG: 
 
 These common prefixes are denoted by a dot applied 
 like a vowel sign, only at the very beginning of the 
 outline. This pretix-dot is applied after the consonant 
 ptirt of the outline has been written. This in imita- 
 tion of the vowel, because it may be likewise dis- 
 carded ; iii fact, proficient writers often omit the dot 
 for con, com or cog, or denote in some other way. 
 
 commit connect cognate commence communicate cog-wheel (?) 
 
 j '\ < v_x| V - S ^ 7 ~1 /^~ 
 
 _ L. __ I * I 'sip | .6 
 
 (147) A common error in writing words like com- 
 municate, commend, connect, is to consider the double 
 letters (mm mi) as two sounds. The better way is 
 to divide the words comm-unicate, comm-ence, conn-ect, 
 employing the prefix-dot for the comm, or conn. 
 
 (14<S) Con, com or cog within a word is denoted 
 by disjoining, as 
 
 re-cog-nize ac-com-pany dis-comm-ode re-con-cile ac-commo-date 
 
 t .4- 
 
 is makes convenient disposition of the com- 
 pound prefix syllables decom, discon, incon, incog, 
 irwoH, mixron, noncon, recon, recom, recog, uncom, 
 inrecon, unrecog, etc. 
 
 (149) Tlie iillix ing is denoted by a dot at the end 
 of the outline, if the stroke ing will not make a good 
 angular joining, as 
 
 do-ing hop- ing be-ing think-ing eating 
 
 I _\ ....... A_. ....(. JL 
 
72 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP VII. 
 
 (150) The plural ings is denoted by a disjoined 
 circle-S at the end of an outline, when the stroke ings 
 is not convenient, as 
 
 doings beings etchings pickings leavings 
 
 ____ I \ / V_ 
 
 o ~ -- - 
 
 (151) The phrases wg-the and ing-and are indi- 
 cated by the disjoined * tick, as 
 
 having-the making-the fixing-the looking-and taking-a doing-a 
 
 (152) WRITINGS- EXERCISE: 
 
 Compel conceal consist conciliate congeal 
 conjugate concensus convene convivial convulse 
 discontent decompose convey inconsistent com- 
 pile irreconciled incognito misconceive noncom- 
 mittal recognize unconscious 
 
 Confess lacings convey console committee 
 conduce confused conceit commiserate con jury 
 casings consume musings 
 
 Jerry was eating and talking and looking, all at 
 the same time. Having a good influence. A con- 
 cealer of stolen goods. The composer of " lolanthe." 
 He was fixing the arm of the chair.. A sealer of 
 weights and measures. 
 
 The conjuror confessed his power to be of no effect. 
 Choosing the right is always making the best choice. 
 We knew the commodore had reached the vessel. 
 
 * By analogy the phrase forms the-con, Jic-cii, mid-con, 
 a-com might, with discretion, be indicated as follows : 
 
 the -committee and-concede a-company he-commenced 
 
 t r v 
 
STEP VII. ] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 73 
 
 (153) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 t T L (<> -^ .c s< 
 
 i ^_. ^ , ^ V. 
 
 (154) HALF-LENGTH WORD-SIGNS 
 
 (halving adds T or D) : 
 not that could get 
 
 1 ~ ( ^ _ 
 
 READ BLACKBOARD EXHIBIT NO. 5 : 
 
 As soon as the student can write sentences with 
 some readiness upon the typewriter, it is a pleasant 
 task to prepare alternate lines of typewriting and short- 
 hand, using the sentences already given for practice. 
 Make a line for the shorthand with the hyphen of the 
 writing machine, only striking it very lightly lest it 
 puncture and rend the ribbon. Submit all such work 
 to the teacher for correction, adding thereto the date 
 and the name of the writer. 
 
74 1NST1UVTION IN [STKP VII.' 
 
 (155) GROUP WORD-SIGNS LIST II.: 
 
 >C> own J ourself 
 
 s " me, my . v 
 
 ^-^ him, am * r' ysel f, 
 
 '" home ....r^.^b . ln.ns.-lf 
 
 ^~b homes 
 
 th y ^ ^ 
 
 them, they >^ ^ thing 
 
 though ....T^r..^. language 
 
 ^"^ long, along 
 
 ease-y / 
 
 was If advantage 
 
 se( v > V' large 
 
 / ^\ see, saw 
 
 /..Y so, say 
 
 / us, use (n) 
 
 A few of the above are not strictly word-signs, but 
 they complete the groups of three, and help the 
 memorizing of the word-signs proper. 
 
 (156) COMPOUND FORMS : 
 anywhere .dTS^. something 
 
 .Sn-v<^. nowhere \,. anyway 
 
 x Q^ 4 
 
 c/.V-.. wherever \_. whenever 
 
 somewhere ../S. forever 
 
 anyone S^,. never 
 
 no-one ,..T^!-.. whensoever 
 
 someone .^^S-.. wheresoever 
 
 anything A. whosoever 
 
 nothing (no-thing) ...</\..... whereby 
 
STKI' VII.] 1'KACTICAL SIIOHTHAND. 75 
 
 (157) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Cicero and Ca'sar had special fame. Errors of 
 thought justify mistakes of judgment. Allie cast his 
 arrow at the mark. Eflie and Ella never hoped for 
 his arrival. Cyrus asked several times for that reward 
 of merit, but could never get it. Swear not at all. 
 Several of the company's sources of income will soon 
 fail. Whatever is worth doing at all is worth doing 
 well. These things are so common we do not notice 
 them. When you went out where did (half-length) 
 you go? It is not necessary for us all to think alike 
 on the same subject. Anyway, I desire you to come 
 home with me soon. To know yourself, is commonly 
 of much advantage. Ayer's Sarsaparilla will help his 
 health if used in small doses. 
 
 * Will you resume your studies in this room? Saul 
 became the Apostle Paul. The poor peasants of 
 Russia fear the absolute power of the Czar. The two 
 large rear oflices in City Hall are occupied by Samuel 
 Tlinyer, the miserly mayor of Nowhere. Tomorrow 
 will be the wedding day of Mary Murray, who is 
 going to marry Harry Barrow. . Miss Walsh wore a 
 yellowish shawl to the social. Elisha, Elijah, Elias 
 and Elihu are names which are seldom met with now. 
 
 (158) REABING EXERCISE: 
 
 V ' ~ ' ' i__ 
 
 i 
 
 * See foot note, page 54. 
 
76 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 /> \3 
 
 S\ c n S s~tr 
 
 [STEl' VII. 
 
 - c r 
 
 &^ 
 
 v: 
 
 ^P 
 
 S^OL-P / o-x( <_ I 
 
 ' 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS, STEP VII.: 
 
 Do two different strokes for R and L appear to be neces- 
 sary? Why? Do It and L differ from the majority of 
 consonant sounds? To what sreneric group of sounds do 
 the} 7 belong? (Liquids.) Is their treatment in Step VII. a 
 
STKP VII.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 77 
 
 syllabic matter? Would one R or one L indicate the syllables 
 as clearly? Have you ever tested the matter? If not, try 
 writing the words in Section 140, using one form of K or L. 
 Do two strokes for 11 and L assist legibility? Do they imply 
 the vowel if it happens to be omitted? Then it is not difficult 
 to read such outlines without the vowel signs? Then, too, 
 it can be made a step toward dropping the vowels altogether? 
 What is the rule for upward-R? Are there any exceptions 
 to this rule? (See Sect. 141.) Do. shorthand rules generally 
 have exceptions? What is the rule for downward-R? For 
 upward-L. Did you note any exceptions to this? Are they 
 "mechanical" or otherwise? What does the word "me- 
 chanical" stand for in this connection? Give the rule for 
 downward-L. Why is downward-R always Avritten before 
 //;></;? And upward-R after? Does s-rnnh generally come 
 under the same limitation? (Yes.) How would warm be 
 written? And Quorum? (Exceptions.) 
 
 Why is upward-R always required before thuh, dthuh, 
 (huh and/wA? Is this an arbitrary matter? Then it must 
 be remembered? Are good angles important enough to 
 demand this? Which is better, a bookish rule or facile 
 execution? How is lith written when alone? How after S 
 in words of one syllable? 
 
 How are double letters indicated in shorthand? Are two 
 strokes sometimes employed in such a case? When is it 
 necessary? Give three words requiring upward-R. Three 
 for downward-R. Three for upward-L. Three for down- 
 ward-L. Is there much need of indicating the vowels in 
 such a word? 
 
 What are con, com and cog? How are they denoted? 
 What is a common error in this connection? How denoted 
 when within a word? Does not this practically cover all 
 compound prefixes? How may the, a and and be denoted 
 before these simple prefixes? Are coy-wheel, concomitant, 
 fair examples for the use of the prefix-dot? 
 
 How is ing represented? The plural of it? Is this a 
 logical arrangement? When is it proper to use stroke-ing 
 for the affix? How are iny-the, ing-and, etc., represented? 
 How are outlines treated which theoretically end in rnlt-ur. J 
 
 What are compound outlines? What does reducing a 
 stroke to half length mean? What does it add besides the 
 sound of tuttS Name a few group word-signs from List II. 
 Do you remember all the word-signs thus far presented? 
 How many have been given? What has Step VII. discussed? 
 
78 IXSTKUCTlO.N IN [STKI 1 VIII. 
 
 STEP VIII. 
 
 SIMPLE STROKE WORD-SIGNS: 
 
 (159) The word-signs thus far given have Iteen 
 for the most part those which stand for the common 
 and petty words of language. Before leaving Part I., 
 it is proper to introduce another list of acknowledged 
 value, and thereby widen the scope of our writing. 
 This subject is given considerable prominence in this 
 manual, because word-signs are of such importance 
 in practical shorthand writing. The need for abbre- 
 viation permeates the full scope of the Pit manic 
 systems of shorthand, simply because phonography 
 in its theoretic breadth is not adapted to verbatim 
 reporting. The word-sign is the most extraordinary 
 example of abbreviation ; and, lest the intent and 
 meaning be obscured in the abbreviating process, we 
 counsel the learner to give special study to this branch 
 of practical shorthand writing. 
 
 The lists of word-signs which follow may be re- 
 garded as quite long, and somewhat dillicult to manage ; 
 but such is not entirely the case. In Part III. a much 
 fuller list will be presented, and one wherein the signs 
 exhibit all the modifications the stroke is susceptible 
 of carrying. So far as learning the word-signs is con- 
 cerned, that is somewhat a matter of practice. To 
 conquer a few is to lay a foundation; the next in- 
 stallment becomes more easily the property of the 
 student; and by following the plan herein outlined, of 
 actually using the signs in sentences, and absorbing a 
 few at a time, a great many may be appropriated 
 without undue effort. 
 
STK1 1 VIII.] rilAGTICAL SHORTHAND. 79 
 
 (1GO) MISCELLANEOUS WORD-SIGNS: 
 
 accept <~ > ~ ._ magnitude 
 
 acknowledge 
 
 almost 
 
 although 
 
 Massacliusetts 
 
 mathematics 
 
 nevertheless 
 
 ..... L architect-ure 
 <~~ t 
 
 aristocrat-ic 
 
 .^TT>.. . assembl-e-y 
 ./ change 
 
 .../.. charge 
 
 ~ commomveallh 
 
 The adjacent lists represent word-signs formed of 
 the simple stems, with but very little modification. 
 They are introduced, not to display the scope of word- 
 sign manufacture, but to encourage a mastery of 
 valuable material. Quick writing demands a more 
 abbreviated style than ordinarily obtains, and the 
 word-signs are abridged forms devised to more easily 
 accomplish that purpose. Therefore we cannot too 
 strongly urge upon the student the importance of 
 familiarity with as many word-signs as it may be 
 possible to acquire. 
 
 READ BLACKBOARD EXHIBIT NO. 6. 
 
80 INSTRUCTION IN [STK1 \ III. 
 
 L 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 .. dignity ^ regular 
 
 . disadvantage _<__A.___ represent-ed 
 
 . efficient ^ V republ-ic-ish 
 
 . expect ....< \ reepect-ive-f ul 
 
 familiar ^^=: San Francisco 
 February P- satisfac-tion-tory 
 
 V 
 
 honest speak-er 
 
 V. ..infer .>_ sufficient 
 
 irregular k- ; . testify 
 
 ...../.... knowledge -- United States 
 
 (1G1) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 God save the Commonwealth of Massachusetts ! 
 Whatever way you go you are commonly influenced 
 by an advantage. The judge's charge was not just as 
 represented. In all thy ways acknowledge Him, 
 testifying to His goodness. He will allow you to 
 come if you will be subject to him. It is necessary to 
 have special knowledge of some things. She is some- 
 what changed, and getting peculiar in her ways. We 
 must acknowledge that this man has a large store of 
 knowledge on the subject. I wish you could speak 
 the language satisfactorily. You w r ill be always wel- 
 come at my home in San Francisco. Reasons and 
 causes, whys and wherefores are in all things. When 
 
STEP VIII.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 81 
 
 you have made a beginning of mathematics that is not 
 half of it. We will go to New York to see him if he 
 expects us to. He is popular because he is honest. 
 I shall speak this language in whatever assembly I 
 may be, because I have no sufficient knowledge of 
 anything else. I infer that each one was satisfied he 
 had an advantage. In the February tests he had 
 architecture for his special subject. It was the last 
 mistake of any magnitude he ever made. He was too 
 aristocratic to acknowledge that it was irregular. It 
 was a peculiar subject for a speaker of his dignity to 
 select. He represented the United States with dignity 
 and efficiency. 
 
 (162) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 ... 
 
 , ^ V " <-/ ( \ K . \ . 
 
 vJ2 ' "A ^ C 
 
 ^ ^=_LJL 
 
 ^^LZLr_JU 
 -* * \_ 
 
82 
 
 INSTRUCTION IX 
 
 [STEl 1 VIII. 
 
 r 
 
 ~\ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 > c n. L^...^...J <^ \ -x 
 
 (163) PRACTICE MATERIAL: 
 
 The following letter should be written at the nite 
 of sixty words (at least) a minute before the student 
 enters upon the study of Part II. 
 CYRUS WILLIAMS. 
 
 San Francisco. 
 
 Sir: I follow your suggestion to write you in stenog- 
 raphy, because you think it will be to my advantage to 
 become especially familiar with it. I acknowledge that 
 
STKP VIII.] PRACTICAL SIIORT1I AM). 83 
 
 writing the common things of the study many times must 
 be highly advantageous to anyone, but, nevertheless, I am 
 well aware of the peculiarities of the subject. 
 
 I represented this to the youth you sent me in February, 
 and while accepting him I saw that his references were not 
 to his advantage, but hoped he would change in lapse of 
 time, and in my first speech with him charged him with 
 much advice essential to his success. 
 
 Do you think it necessary to have him here with me the 
 whale season? I was almost in hopes that he and Thaddeus 
 would ^ct on well together, but if they will not, I shall have 
 one of them go with the representative to the assembly ; 
 which will be best anyway, because if they are not in 
 company they will do nothing wrong. The representative 
 referred to comes from one of the most aristocratic com- 
 monwealths of the Republic, and all testify to his dignity 
 and popularity as a public speaker; so his influence will be 
 satisfactory, and of no disadvantage to the boy. 
 
 I acknowledge that the young fellow does his work 
 elliciently, and think he will possess sufficient knowledge 
 when he becomes familiar with our customs. Although he 
 is peculiar in some respects, he is thoroughly honest, and I 
 infer that he will now do right wherever he goes. When- 
 ever I refer to his past irregularity he acknowledges the 
 error, and says he is sorry for it; but as it was his first 
 mistake I have excused it, and Avill use my best influence to 
 make him regular in his ways and especially in his language 
 for all time to come. 
 
 As I am going away soon, I shall be happy to acknowledge 
 anything you may do for him in my absence; and if he 
 should leave while I am away, however, whenever and 
 wherever he goes he will have my best wishes. 
 
 Thanking you for your offices in his behalf, 'I am 
 Yours respectfully, 
 
 (164) SYLLABIC SHORTHAND: 
 Correct syllabic division of words lies near the root 
 of pronunciation. It is the strong feature of the dic- 
 tionary to the learner of language ; it is an essential 
 quality of word utterance. Shorthand is most truly a 
 representation of spoken language, and, therefore, the 
 syllabic idea plays an important part in the structure 
 of stenographic forms. 
 
84 INSTRUCTION IN [STKl 1 \ 111. 
 
 Throughout this work constant reference will be 
 made to the syllable as the unit of word analysis, and 
 the influence the syllables have upon the shorthand 
 outline ; and in order to become well grounded in 
 correct procedure, it will be wise for the learner to 
 make earnest effort to execute syllabic outlines. 
 
 The simple rule to write a stroke for a syllable is 
 not difficult to follow, after a clear notion is had of 
 what a stroke consists. The position of the syllable 
 should likewise be understood (see Syllabic Division 
 of Words, Part III, or a standard dictionary). The 
 linear consonant sign and its appendages constitute the 
 stroke^ and it can commonly be made to contain and 
 picture all the sounds of a syllable. There are occa- 
 sional syllables, the sounds of which cannot be con- 
 densed into one stroke, but the operation of the rule 
 is so general, and its results so conducive to legibility, 
 that it stands out strongly as the prime and redeem- 
 ing feature of practical shorthand, making it more 
 nearly a graphic representation of language. 
 
 (165) ANGLES: 
 
 When the obtuse angle is described by a rapid move- 
 ment of, the pen, it is likely to degenerate into a curve. 
 though the acute angle remains unchanged whel lid- 
 written slowly or fast. Hence it is that in shorthand 
 writing obtuse angles are to be avoided as much as 
 possible, and right angles are less desirable than acute. 
 The latter is the quick angle par excellence ! 
 
 When an option is granted in the junction of strokes, 
 the quick angle should be selected because it is more 
 conducive to legibility even when shorthand is carelessly 
 written. We would admonish the learner to be ex- 
 ceedingly careful in this matter, and having in mind 
 the value of good angles, exercise judgment in all 
 
STEP VIII.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 85 
 
 joinings of strokes, ticks, or any shorthand material. 
 The judgment soon becomes trained to discern the pos- 
 sibilities of a situation, and the best selection will be 
 (jiiickly made of many available angles or directions 
 of strokes. Skill in this comes from experience and 
 painstaking from the .beginning leads to that profi- 
 ciency wherein the wisest procedure is almost an uncon- 
 scious act. 
 
 (106) CONVENIENCE : 
 
 Convenience is a ruling motive in shorthand writ- 
 ing. It means the subjection of every awkward move- 
 ment, and every untoward circumstance. Therefore 
 the student must not be surprised if occasional 
 reference be made to convenience as an explanation 
 of some departure from rule or expectation. The pre- 
 cepts of theory may be sometimes ignored and its 
 rules violated, if fluent form and ease of writing can 
 be attained by other procedure. 
 
 Fluency of outline depends upon these favoring 
 features : a cursive direction of strokes, and good 
 angles at points of junction. Inasmuch as fast writing 
 is best fostered by these qualities, it will be readily 
 understood that almost everything which relates to out- 
 line formation must be made amenable to their de- 
 mands. Speed of writing must be secured at any 
 ha/ard, and it can only be insured by convenience 
 or fluency of movement. On the other hand, legibility 
 will be better secured if syllabic structure is main- 
 tained concurrently with good angles and forward 
 strokes. 
 
 The student should pay due heed to the established 
 rules of his shorthand system, and have proper respect 
 for, and confidence in, their teachings ; but at the 
 same time he should remember that convenience quite 
 often asserts itself superior to rules, and more fluent 
 shorthand is the result. 
 
80 . INSTRUCTION IX [STK1> VIII. 
 
 (1(!7) CONCLUSION OF PART I.: 
 
 Part II., which follows, will be characterized by the 
 almost entire absence of vowel signs. This will be 
 the most important step thus far to be taken, but it is 
 warranted by the circumstances. This book is piv- 
 eminently a practical shorthand teacher, jinir/ /</, 
 in the sense that it presents a style of shorthand that 
 can be written rapidly, and shorthand cannot be rapidly 
 written which contains disconnected vowel signs. The 
 latter have always been associated with the so-called 
 " corresponding style," which has no style or place in 
 the business of shorthand writing. On the otlu r 
 hand, practical is the adjective applied to shorthai.d 
 that is adapted to verbatim reporting, and to all the 
 requirements of such writing as a bread-winning pro- 
 fession. 
 
 At the same time it must be admitted that the vowel 
 is the great word identifier. If the consonant strokes 
 properly constitute the skeleton of a word, then arc 
 vowels unmistakably the flesh and blood. Therefore , 
 it would be impossible to leave them entirely out of 
 consideration ; they must be implied in some way, and 
 vowel implication is one of the most ingenious and in- 
 teresting features of Pitmanic shorthand. 
 
 We almost hear the query: Why ever learn vowels, 
 when they are to be so soon discarded? The quick 
 reply is : They must be learned in order that the pro- 
 gression to vowel implication may be logically made. 
 Besides which, the rare insertion of the vowel sign 
 may be demanded, and it must be known where they 
 should be even if they are not seen. 
 
PART II. Business Shorthand. 
 
 CLASS WORK. 
 
88 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP IX. 
 
 (168) PREFATORY REMARKS : 
 
 . Shorthand is a dry subject at its best; and the 
 earlier it can be invested with agreeable features, the 
 better for the student. The aim thus far has been to 
 introduce a variety of work, in order to awaken and 
 maintain interest and originality is claimed for this 
 arrangement. 
 
 In a "Plan of Instruction in Shorthand," published 
 seven years ago, the idea was advanced that >'//'//>/// 
 and reading shorthand in sentences and paragraphs, 
 suited to the successive stages of study, should take 
 place from the very beginning. The value of this was 
 amply demonstrated in actual teaching ; and the favor 
 with which the idea was received is best illustrated by 
 the eagerness with which teachers adopted it, and by 
 the fact that the more recent text-books present that 
 plan of procedure. 
 
 In most of the early manuals the tedium of principle 
 and precept is hardly relieved in the primary steps by 
 anything more exciting than the writing of long pro- 
 cessions of words, words, words. This cannot fail to 
 be dull labor, even for the most ambitious inquirer, 
 and enthusiasm soon weakens under such heroic treat- 
 ment. Therefore we cannot help believing that the 
 difficulty of shorthand has not been so much a bar to 
 its progress as the unmanageable text-book. The live 
 young person is not so much deterred by obstacles 
 when they appear in reasonable guise, as he is crushed 
 by difficulty when it is a veritable weight of woe. 
 
 The so-called corresponding style (i.e., writing 
 with all the vowels) has gone by. The transfer of 
 shorthand writing from the boudoir to the business 
 office has given it a quietus. The extraordinary' 
 
STEP IX.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 89 
 
 demand for stenography in commercial affairs calls 
 for a more expeditious way and Business Shorthand 
 is the response. 
 
 The sub-title Class Work has special reference to 
 the use of this book in schools.* Desk work, even 
 with most persuasive helps, cannot surpass in interest 
 and value the exercises of the classroom, with their 
 lectures and suggestions by the teacher, the drawing 
 forth of knowledge, and the incentive which comes 
 from association with other learners. 
 
 As this work progresses, the student should pay 
 due heed to the many details which compose these 
 Steps. Let him be common-sense in investigation, 
 diligent in practice, and tangible results will surely 
 follow. 
 
 * We are of the opinion that the best results from short- 
 hand study can be gained in a well-conducted school. Self- 
 instruction is a legend which beckons to devious ways and 
 success deferred. 
 
 The very day this book was conceived an editorial in a 
 leading Boston daily said : " It is a notable advance in in- 
 dustrial education to have shorthand taught in all the pub- 
 lic schools of Boston from this time onward .... It will 
 be found to be one of the most effective methods by which 
 the accuracy and completeness of an English education may 
 be tested .... Boston is simply following in the wake of 
 other cities, where these studies (shorthand and typewriting) 
 have been introduced ; and nothing could have been added to 
 our school system which is more likely to be popular and 
 to make less encroachment upon valuable time." 
 
 Taking the cue from this strong expression of opinion, 
 we have arranged the substance of this manual for " all 
 schools " public and general, as well as commercial. 
 
90 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP IX. 
 
 STEP IX. 
 
 INITIAL HOOKS. 
 
 (169) COALKSCENT L AND R: 
 
 Certain consonant sounds coalesce (blend) more or 
 less freely, and become the expression of almost a 
 single vocal impulse. Such coalescents already noted 
 have been st, s/, sw, and other blendings of the 
 appendage S () with other consonants; and the man- 
 ner of representing the same has been illustrated. 
 
 (170) A more common coalescence is that of L 
 or R with a preceding consonant. L and R are called 
 liquids because they unite so readily with other sounds ; 
 and in shorthand this blending is pictured by small 
 initial hooks. 
 
 (171) THE L-HOOK: 
 
 A small initial hook turned on the right side of 
 upright strokes, and upon the upper side of horizon- 
 tals, stands primarily for a coalescent sound of L, :is 
 
 PI Bl Kl Gl Fl 
 
 K \ C- y_ g. 
 
 in plow, blow, clue., glue, /fo/r ; though for the sake of 
 securing a brief outline the hook is made, secondari'I;/, 
 to stand for sounds not coalescent, as 
 
 Tl Dl CHI Jl VI THl DTII1 SHI ZSH1 Ml XI Rl 
 
 r r A/'IC Ccjo'^ 
 
 in words like tell, c///7/, j<nl, rule, shell, kell, etc. 
 
STK1> IX.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 91 
 
 The foregoing comprise all the consonant stems to 
 which the L-hook may be attached. 
 
 (17'2) The L-hook is an appendage, and should be 
 read next after its stroke. Although written first, 
 when a stroke is executed that is to picture a word or 
 syllable, the order of reading will be : 1st, the princi- 
 pal stem, '2d, the L denoted by the hook. 
 
 (173) The L-hook upon TH and DTH is of rare 
 occurrence. SII and ZSH receive the L-hook upon 
 the lower end, and are written upward. This to dis- 
 tinguish from final N-hook, which will be described 
 farther on. 
 
 facial visual racial initial bushel casual 
 
 I; ^> ^J ^J V -J 
 
 (174) The L-hook upon M, N and R is written 
 large, to distinguish it from the wuh appendage, simi- 
 larly prefixed, as 
 
 camel canal barrel knoll final ferule 
 
 (175) The steins S, Z, L, ING, W and Y per- 
 mit no L-hook attachment. 
 
 (176) THE R-HOOK: 
 
 A small initial hook turned on the left side of 
 uprights, and on the under side of horizontals, stands 
 l>rini(i ril;i for a coalescent R, as 
 
 Tr Dr Pr Br Kr Or Fr THr 
 
 1 1 *\ -\ - ^ *) 
 
 as in trtii/, <lr<nr, yv///, bmir, <-rtr, <jrn', fray, throw; 
 
92 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP IX. 
 
 though, secondarily, it is made to stand for uucoalescent : 
 
 CHr Jr Vr DTHr SHr ZSHr Mr Nr 
 
 77 ^ ") J J ^ <^ 
 
 in words like cheer, jar, over, other, sure, azure, humor, 
 honor. The foregoing comprise all the stems to which 
 the R-hook can properly be attached. 
 
 (177) Inverted Forms. The outlines for Fr, 
 Vr, THr and DTHr, as above, will attract attention 
 because of their exceptional form. It is obvious that 
 to turn the hook upon the convex side of the curve 
 would be impracticable ; therefore, while the stems last 
 named exhibit the L-hook regularly, they have to be 
 reversed to show a hook at the left, namely, the R- 
 hook. Only F, V, TH and DTH are subject to this 
 apparent irregularity, and the seeming anomaly occa- 
 sions no hardship when it is clearly understood that 
 neither uR, Wuh, S or Z, which the inverted F, V, 
 TH and DTH resemble, are ever modified by a hook. 
 
 Fr Vr THr DTHr 
 
 "> *> 1 
 
 as in free, very, through, there. 
 
 (178) M and N are shaded when modified by the 
 R-hook, to distinguish it from the wuh appendage 
 similarly applied, as 
 
 more near marshal nourish rumor pioneer 
 
 V- 
 
SIK1' IX.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 93 
 
 (179) The stems S, Z, L, R, W, Y, H and ING 
 
 have no H-hook appendage. 
 
 (180) UNCOALESCENT L AND R^ 
 
 As previously stated, the L and R hooks primarily 
 represent sounds that unite in utterance ; but in practi- 
 cal writing the scope of the hook may be widened so 
 as to embrace words, wherein a vowel sound obtrudes 
 between, the consonant and the L or R denoted by the 
 hook. Such outline formation is allowable when no 
 conflicts can occur, it being a resort to secure fluent 
 form. Examples : 
 
 tell full term sure church chill chair 
 
 r Q. u j? ; r ? 
 
 (181) In cases of this kind where there might be 
 some obscurity, the presence of the vowel may be 
 implied by cutting a tick across the stroke near the 
 hook. It is not often necessary to indicate the exact 
 vowel, but simply that some vowel is strong between 
 the consonant and the L or R sound denoted by the 
 hook, as 
 
 column course bill terse fulfill bark salty 
 
 c^-s ^ \ I \ V_ fl" 
 
 This use of the tick may be adopted to show any 
 uncoalescent sequence of sounds, as illustrated by the 
 last example above ; but the need for it will be rare. 
 
 (l.s-2) The hook is not necessarily employed at 
 the beginning of a word, but has equal application at 
 the beginning of syllables. This situation sometimes 
 
94 INSTRUCTION IN [STKI' IX. 
 
 gives rise to a faulty junction of strokes, or it is 
 likely to in rapid writing. A symmetrical hook can- 
 not always be executed between strokes, because such 
 painstaking would be a clog to fluent procedure. In 
 this event the hook can be only partially formed, and 
 what is termed the imperfect hook must ensue. The 
 following outlines illustrate the improper and the 
 proper way to write the words reply, baker, rewal, 
 admire, cable : 
 
 Unnatural and 
 
 unallowable hooks : 
 
 V- ^- U ~\ 
 
 Imperfect, but */\ \ 
 
 :t 1 1< i u M I il < hunks \ * 
 
 (183) HOOKS NOT ALWAYS USED: 
 
 It should be understood that the hook is to be used 
 with judgment. The situations of word structure 
 have to be expressed in shorthand, and the various 
 abbreviating expedients may be employed. The hook 
 may or may not apply. Nevertheless, it is a valuable 
 auxiliary in the representation of syllabic outlines ; for 
 it is apparent that such appendages make possible the 
 carrying out of the rule, a stroke for a syllable ! 
 
 But the hook is not invariably employed. To 
 illustrate the point, two examples of outline formation 
 will be given. First, the stroke is used in words like 
 fail, fall, false, pale, fool, deal, tool and goal, to dis- 
 tinguish them from the hooked forms flay, flaw, flaws, 
 play,fleic, idle, until, glow. Second, in order to indicate 
 the strong sound (trill) of r, which so many ignore 
 in pronunciation, the stroke is used in words like fur, 
 fur, fore, farm, firm, etc. 
 
 This peculiar situation is really brought about l>y 
 the way the r in far and fur modifies the sound of the 
 preceding vowel, and it is proper to refer to this in 
 
STKI' IX. J 1'KACTICAI. SHORTHAND. 95 
 
 tliis Stt-p (wherein vowels begin to be discarded), 
 because by expressing the r strongly * the adjacent 
 vowel is implied, and vowel implication should generally 
 take place when vowel indication ceases. 
 
 (1.S4) Note particularly that the L and R hooks 
 arc always initial ; that they are written first, 
 though read next after the stem to which they are 
 attached; that the L-hook on M, N and R is made 
 large; that M and N must be unmistakably shaded 
 to admit the R-hook ; that SH and ZSH have the 
 L-hook at the lower end, and are invariably written 
 upward; and that the hook is an appendage, 
 having no vowel position or implication. 
 
 (is;,) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 (.Omit vowels, and write every word on the line.) 
 
 Take make shake ache sake hake How 
 bless joke fray grasses pray claim cloak 
 glow frame clay press flesh railroad Blake 
 relic peck trace coke crush owes racial haze 
 baker fuzz able sways fakir rope inutile 
 tusk poker casual lake local thumb nullify 
 nervous prose oval blaze place cluster ochre 
 u'laze dress maime gloaming nun grace shame 
 trust maize wail braces save gunwale hate 
 brazier yoke gray hut maker swore choker 
 dozed Heck broker well sundry glazier basis 
 
 (186) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 These words all have second-place vowels in the accented 
 syllable, and arc therefore written upon the line, accord ills' 
 
 *" Strongly," because the stroke obviously expresses a 
 consonant more powerfully than an appendage. 
 
96 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP IX. 
 
 to the rule for Position given in this step. The order of 
 reading is first, the implied vowel (if any) before the con- 
 sonant expressed by the stem ; second, the consonant ; 
 third, initial hook, if any; fourth, vowel after consonant; 
 fifth, final S, if any. This order of reading applies to 
 single syllables. 
 
 (187) OMISSION OF VOWELS POSITION : 
 
 The vowel signs should be made to disappear at 
 this Step, and only vowel implication remain. This 
 is accomplished by position. 
 
 (188) Definition. Word position is the term 
 applied to the attitude of an outline with 'respect to 
 the line of writing the ruling of the paper. 
 
 (189) There are three positions : (1st) above, 
 (2d) upon and (3d) across the line. The third posi- 
 tion of horizontal strokes is just beneath the line. 
 
 (190) A word outline earns its position by reason 
 of its accented vowel, which explains sufficiently why 
 vowel indication may end when position begins. 
 
 (191) Definition. The accented vowel is 
 the one in a word which receives the greatest 
 
STK1' IX.] I'KAC'TICAI, S1IOKTIIAND. 'J7 
 
 stress of voice in pronunciation. The accented 
 syllable is the one which contains such a 
 vowel. 
 
 (192) Rule. An outline is first, second or 
 third position, according as its accented vowel 
 is first, second or third place, as previously, 
 understood. 
 
 (11)3) With the vowels fully indicated, an outline 
 is readable wherever written ; but the moment they are 
 discarded the word will incline to illegibility, unless it 
 is given the position of the most accented vowel 
 omitted. Even then three vowels (or possibly a 
 diphthong) are implied, and the true meaning must be 
 in a measure conjectured from a knowledge of the 
 context. The right conclusion will, however, be 
 easily reached with practice in reading. 
 
 (194) SHORTHAND POSITION 
 ILLUSTRATED : 
 
 make meek make mark take talk take took 
 
 (195) Rule. The three positions of a single 
 vertical stroke are : 
 
 1. The entire stroke lifted about one-half of 
 its height above the line. 
 
 2. The stroke resting upon the line. 
 
 3. The stroke " cut " across the line. 
 
 1st Position 2d Position 3d Position 
 
 i O r\ . 
 
98 INSTIIUCTION IN [STKl 1 IX. 
 
 (196) The three positions of a double- stroke out- 
 line, if one part vertical, are denoted by the position 
 of the vertical stroke, which follows the above rule. 
 If both strokes are vertical, the first takes position. 
 
 1st Position 2d Position 3d Position 
 
 (197) The three positions of a single or double- 
 stroke horizontal outline are above, upon or just 
 beneath the line. 
 
 1st Position 2d Position 3d 1'osition 
 
 (198) The position of an outline containing more 
 than two strokes is no more or less than the position 
 of the first vertical stroke, the accented syllable of 
 the word deciding what position that stroke shall 
 occupy. 
 
 1st Position 2d Position 3d Position 
 
 (Position to be continued.) 
 
 At the same time Step VII. should not be forgotten, 
 wherein it is shown that the vowel can be implied by 
 the direction of certain consonant strokes. 
 
n ,\KER 
 
 R 
 .TEXAS 
 
 STKP IX.] PRACTICAL SIIOllTIIAN'l). 99 
 
 (l'J9) ENLARGED L AND R HOOK: 
 
 The sound of R can be added to an L-hook stroke 
 by enlarging the hook*; and the sound of L to an 
 R-hook character similarly. The first is called ler, 
 and the second rel. 
 
 blur April corporal liberal control clergy nostrils 
 
 ^ <\ -A A 1 7 ^l 
 
 (-200) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 (I'lace all words in position.) 
 
 Prize fly glue please blue agree bluster 
 clew analogy author rule hither oppress grist 
 1'io.st precise crisis bloom crack bleach flywheel 
 broom problem brewery drear Greek throng 
 frozen pupil ripple feeble rumor reel former 
 Ilallelt tunnel colonel funnel nickel battle 
 Helena youthful initial solstitial laughter banner 
 euamor dinner shark paralyze figure lover 
 qualify procure disclaim marvelous require evil 
 Mitchell inquire legal heel title teacher ladder 
 oillcial lodger Thalberg neuralgia feathery oblige 
 swagger philosophy tremble reclaim depress 
 worker propose flavor overflow orchestra literal 
 Buffalo scholar dabbler portray clapper clearer 
 astral illiberal blamcr girl thrush gruel tolerable 
 trip prime settler vulgar pastoral trial liquor 
 copper orchestral hallelujah idler sprawl 
 
 * The enlsirrin.n of the hook of the H-stroke (suggested 
 by D. L. Scott-Brown) to add L in the same syllable with 
 II, seems to be quite in analogy with the above, as 
 
100 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 hill eyebrow muscular cars honor sincerely 
 thoroughly contralto chiefly hydraulic personally 
 briefly 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS, STEP IX.: 
 
 What radical departure marks the beginning of Tart II.? 
 (The omission of vowel signs.) What is the "correspond- 
 ing style"? What is here termed business shorthand? II<>\v 
 should the student investigate shorthand principles? Is 
 diligent practice always essential? 
 
 What are coalescent sounds? Name a few. Why arc I, 
 and 11 called Liquids? How is the blending of sound 
 pictured in shorthand? What is the L-hook? Is it an initial 
 or final hook? What does it stand for primarily? What is 
 its secondary use? Give an example of a coalescent sound 
 of L. An uncoalesceut. Is the hook read before or after 
 its stem? Why is this? What is peculiar about the, L-hook 
 on SH and ZSH? How is this hook applied to M, N and It? 
 What stems permit of no L-hook attachment? 
 
 What is the It-hook? Has it likewise a primary and sec- 
 ondary application? Name a few words illustrating both 
 phases. What stems are inverted to admit the It-hook? Is 
 this productive of difficulty? Would it not be really more 
 difficult to apply the hook upon the outside of the curve? 
 What law would such a shape ottend? Why are M and N 
 shaded to take the R-hook? What stems do not admit the 
 R-hook? 
 
 Which is the more difficult to read, a coalescent sound in- 
 dicated by the hook, or an uncoalescent? How can the ex- 
 istence of the vowel be denoted in an uncoalescent L or 
 R-hook outline? Is the hook always employed wherever L 
 or R occurs? Does syllabic division have anything to do 
 with it? Do the hooks assist in the promotion of syllabic 
 writing? 
 
 What is an imperfect hook? Is the less labored outline 
 commonly the best? What is position? What is it for? 
 How many positions? What governs position? What is 
 the accented vowel? The accented syllable? Is position a 
 perfect substitute for vowels? When it fails of its intent 
 what must be done to decipher the outline? What are the 
 three positions of the single vertical stroke? Of the double 
 stroke Avhen partly vertical? Of the horizontal? Of the 
 extended outline? What is signified by an enlarged R-hook? 
 By an enlarged L-hook? What are they called/ 
 
sri:r x.] PRACTICAL snoirniANn. 101 
 
 STEP X. 
 
 It will be noticed that the title Step docs not always 
 mark the presentation of a single shorthand principle, 
 but is more particularly a division of a variety of 
 mail-rial into convenient allotments of study and re- 
 vim. Instead of being a linger-post to show a cer- 
 tain and single direction to go, it is rather a stopping- 
 place after a fair day's journey, where one can pause 
 for a time, and look back to see what has been accom- 
 plished. Therefore a principle may or may not be 
 exhausted in one step ; if it be of far-reaching im- 
 portance it may recur, the aim being to make the ex- 
 hibit interesting as well as logical and progressive. 
 
 (201) CIRCLE-S PREFIXED TO HOOKS: 
 
 S prefixed to a hook requires special attention, not 
 only on account of the care necessary, but because of 
 the abundant meaning conveyed. 
 
 (202) CIRCLE-S AND L-HOOK : 
 
 S prefixed to an L-hook is written entirely within 
 tin 1 hook, to distinguish from S as attached to an un- 
 modified stem, as 
 
 sp spl st stl sb shl sk 
 
 suji sujiplo set settle sob sable sake 
 
 LJ 
 
 (203) The order of reading is first, always the 
 fircle-S; second, the vowel before the stroke; third, 
 the principal stroke ; fourth, the hook ; fifth, the vowel 
 aflcr the stroke. 
 
102 IXSTUUCT10X IN [STKP X. 
 
 (204) S prefixed to the L-hook between some 
 strokes must needs be imperfectly formed, like 
 
 explode feasible gospel peaceful taxable 
 
 (20r>) CIRCLE-S AND R-IIOOK: 
 
 S applied closely (and initially) to the R-hook side 
 of a stem implies the R and the outline is read first, 
 circle-S ; second, the principal stroke ; third, the R 
 implied by the position of S, as 
 
 spr-ay str-ay scr-nll str-etchcr str-iker spr-ij; 
 
 \ i T I 
 
 ~~ 
 
 (20(5) Between strokes circle-S before an R is 
 shown clearly within the hook, as 
 
 extra posture rostrum bow-string disappear dishonor 
 
 L 
 
 (207) In a few words, S before R follows the pro- 
 cedure recommended in Sect. 48, Step III., being exe- 
 cuted outside the angle at the junction of strokes for 
 the sake of fluency of writing. In rapid work a correct 
 motion is important, and in this case the reading will 
 not suffer materially. For example : 
 
 discourse proscribe disgrace ja per subscribe manuscript 
 
 V-v 
 
STK1' X.] PRACTICAL SIIOUT1IAM). 103 
 
 (20.S) Two sounds of S before the R-hook can be 
 denoted by prefixing Ses on the R-side, as in the words 
 i-, exasperate. 
 
 (209) A limited (and uncoalescent) use of S on 
 the R-side of a stem is illustrated by the following out- 
 lines, which prove fluent and sufficiently suggestive : 
 
 supper saber cycle cedar sooner seeker sneer 
 
 \ \ *- 1 ^ ~ ^ 
 
 (210) TN, UN OR EN BEFORE CIRCLE-S : 
 
 ///, ?//*, or en before unsyllabic S are denoted 
 by a small "curl" formed outside the stern, opposite 
 the circle. This is specially convenient before str, spr 
 and like combinations, where the S is turned by in- 
 volute motion, and the N-stroke does not readily 
 attach. For example : 
 
 instructor insuperable unscrew insulate unscrupulous 
 I n A Q <O I 
 
 Where the N-stroke joins easily, as in unsuitable, 
 I'IIMIHC, tnixuid, it is unnecessary to employ the back- 
 curl for >'//, uu or en. 
 
 (211) In words like uninstructed, uninspired, tin- 
 inftcribed , there seems to be no alternative but to re- 
 peat the curl to express the double prefix, although 
 
104 INSTRUCTION IN [STK1 1 X. 
 
 this almost trespasses upon the province of the In-hook 
 of the Burns system, which the following words 
 illustrate : 
 
 endorsed insure entry entrust endear untrue 
 
 1 D "\ 1 "1 1 
 
 Although doubling a hook is condemned by some 
 and classed with impracticable expedients, certainly 
 for the above words it obviates an awkward joining of 
 the N-stroke to the R-hook, the dynamics of it appear 
 to be good, and it is quite in analogy with the double 
 Dual hook for V-shun, which appears as a part of this 
 system in Step XII". 
 
 (212) WRITING EXERCISK: 
 
 (Employ position instead of vowels.) 
 
 Unsaleable explore subtile saddle distress 
 noticeable scream enslave sidereal unswayable 
 insecure suppress stress disable scrap striker 
 saber bicycle strapper sinner physical summer 
 unsocial blissful cider descry cigar disagree 
 gastric setter texture sucker steeple dishonor 
 stable stifle secrecy honor prisoner beseecher 
 streamer sipper suffer listener atmosphere 
 disastrous eccentric nostrum smear personally 
 graceful mistress stager classical remorseless 
 massacre depositor outstretch traceable discourage 
 sobriety unseemly tricycle secular inspire 
 unsettle speller suburb insuperable supreme 
 soprano unswathe inter incisor distrust crucible 
 gossamer engross as-per (phr. ) solder. 
 
STKP X.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 105 
 
 (213) GROUP WORD-SIGNS- 
 
 ' 1 r\ either 
 / \ ^tli-fire eir 1 
 
 -LIST III. : 
 
 Dr. (doctor) 
 ,-dear, direct 
 during 
 
 bring, liberty 
 ..remember.membe' 
 number 
 
 appear, proper 
 
 o^ / other 
 
 ' r \ _ over 
 
 * ^V....^very very 
 
 V 
 
 ^5 
 
 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 c-v ' favor 
 
 1 ^\ form 
 / from 
 
 ^ - "*" - ^ mere, remark-able 
 -__ __.. ^_. ....in ore 
 n c^ humor 
 
 V C fl". awful 
 
 V- .fiill.y 
 
 practic-e-al 
 
 internal 
 tru-e-th 
 
 1 
 
 utter 
 
 equal 
 _dillicult 
 calculate 
 
 real 
 ,.rela-tive-tion 
 rule 
 
 \ C belong 
 
 \ \ ab', blow 
 
 ^l/ 
 
 ^ to-be-able 
 
 ^^ 
 
 (-214) MISCELLANEOUS WORD-SIGNS VI. : 
 
 1 
 
 people I .strong 
 
 J .strength 
 
 -describe 
 
 inscribe 
 
 ^r 
 
 -secure 
 
 -insecure 
 
 .instruct 
 
 -value 
 
 .pleasure 
 
106 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP X. 
 
 c=z_character __l___measure 
 
 consider 
 
 influential 
 
 These and all word-signs should be -written over 
 and over again until the outlines become as familiar 
 as the words they picture. 
 
 (215) L AND R-HOOK PHRASES: 
 
 o 
 
 -in-all 
 Jn-her 
 
 in-onr 
 
 J_ which-are 
 
 P__at-all 
 
 . as-it-wore 
 of-all 
 
 (21 G) N-stroke followed by upward L or R 
 occasions an awkward junction, and the need for a 
 quick angle suggests a clever use of the initial hooks. 
 At the same time it illustrates when the pressing 
 need for a fluent outline overcomes a strictly syllabic 
 rendering. We refer to the phrase form in-re as 
 employed in cases like the following : 
 
 in-respect in-reference in-rcply 
 
 in-writing in-rrcei])t 
 
 !-! 
 
STKP X.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 107 
 
 (217) The same is not only advantageous in 
 phrases, but likewise in words beginning with en or un 
 preceding r, as 
 
 enrich unreliable unregenerate unrecognized enrage 
 
 Y 
 -\ 
 
 (218) Words beginning unl (or enl) are similarly 
 treated, as 
 
 unload unlikely unlawful unhealthy unwholesome unlucky 
 
 The word forms exhibited in Sects. 21G, 217 and 
 218 show how spoken language sometimes differs 
 from written. In voluble speech words are "run 
 together"; and here are shorthand outlines similarly 
 treated. They are illustrations also of the proper 
 phrase. The nearness to coalescence of the sounds 
 gives warrant for close junction of the signs ; and 
 where phrases so result, they may be considered natu- 
 ral and allowable. 
 
 (219) A shaded M can be made to stand for the 
 double consonants MP or MB, as in the words 
 
 embarrass empire trump embezzle imposed amply 
 
 j> / 1 
 
 *-**/ *~+^ \~^ 
 
 The conventional names are Emp and Emb. 
 (220) MP WORD-SIGNS: 
 
 import-ant-ance improve-ment ImpOflBlb-le-lllty may-be (phr. 11 
 
108 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 (221) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Employ in this writing all the word-signs and principles 
 thus far presented, and after the shorthand rendering has 
 been corrected, use it for reading practice. Proper phrases 
 are marked by the hyphen. 
 
 When you have conversed with-him you-will come 
 away with considerable knowledge. The-orator de- 
 livered-a stump speech from-the rostrum with special 
 vigor. There-is-nothing for children to do here unless 
 they play " I spy." Messrs. Field & Flood, real 
 estate people, have much available property which-is 
 very valuable. In-her reply to-our inquiry she ex- 
 pressed just the-proper view of-the difficulty. The- 
 deer in-the park frolic from one side to-the-other of- 
 the enclosure. Influence is valuable to-have once in 
 awhile ; the influential usually occupy high places in 
 a-community. Truth forms the-basis of-all real 
 knowledge. Phrase and-fable were fully described 
 in-the three volumes of prose. She truly manifested 
 marvellous nerve for-a person paralyzed. It-will-be 
 wise to consider analogy in-the study of-the subject 
 discussed in-this-work. 
 
 *In-our day all honor is given to-the Greek poet 
 Homer. It-is-a noticeable fact that-the visible sup- 
 ply of wheat is far in excess of-all possible necessi- 
 ties. The migratory fowl will fly fast, and-not stop 
 until they reach a warmer clime. The enamel was 
 only on-the outside of-the small silver barrel. All 
 real authors are allowed free access to-the classical 
 library over in Allegheny. The prisoner seems to 
 think nothing of-his dishonor. The-trial of Charles 
 Blair, the-guilty teller, will occur in April. 
 
 * See foot note, page 54. 
 
X.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (-2-2-2) READING EXERCISE : 
 
 109 
 
 In this and subsequent exercises vowels will appear 
 only in the outlines for proper nouns, which generally 
 require special identification. Other words must be read 
 with reference to position, except the word-signs, which, 
 in addition to position, have contracted forms for the most 
 part. Some halving appears ; see Sect. 223. 
 
 Copy the shorthand of this exercise many times for 
 writing practice, and acquire the ability to read at sight : 
 
 \ 
 
 L 
 
 
 P Co * 
 
 '.X. 
 
 c. v^ . 
 
 1 
 
 \ 
 
 
 .1 S, 
 
 \ 
 
110 . INSTUUCT10N IN [SIKT X. 
 
 i i . - ^ ^ ~ > 
 
 *) ^ ) ~ \> "N. 3 
 i \ 
 
 
 r 
 
 ) ( ^i ^ r ^ S v 
 
 ' 
 
 (223) THE HALVING PRINCIPLE I. : 
 
 Shortening is an important principle, and the 
 irregularity of its application causes so much dilliculty, 
 it is proposed to present the subject in installments. 
 
 (224) Rule. A consonant stroke represent- 
 ing a word or syllable may be shortened to one- 
 
1'KACTICAI. SIIOIJTHAXI). 
 
 Ill 
 
 half its ordinary length to add the sound of T 
 or D, us 
 
 .me, meet, 
 
 fay, fate 
 
 6 
 
 -about 
 .doubt 
 ..saved 
 .slight 
 -called 
 
 C .old 
 
 f* sold 
 .cr. cared 
 
 (22">) No special distinction need be made for T 
 or 1), leaving it generally for the context to decide ; 
 though L, M, N, R (dovvnward-R) are shaded to add 
 I), except when modified by a linal hook (see Sect. 
 313), as 
 
 mate made 
 
 neat need 
 
 heart hard 
 
 eent send 
 
 (22G) The full strokes Wuh, Yuli, Kmp and Ing 
 need never be halved, and Huh and Huh are never 
 halved when standing alone. 
 
11^ INSTUUCT10N IX [STK1* X. 
 
 (227) The position of a shortened outline follows 
 the rules for full-lengths. 
 
 (228) The power of the halving is always read 
 last, except where final S occurs, when it is next 
 to last, as 
 
 sends needs doubts words goods ni^lit.- 
 
 1i> c-P O 
 
 (229) IdpThc legibility of the shortened stroke 
 is better maintained if its length is made a trine less 
 than n half, though it should exceed the length of the 
 tick. 
 
 It it a common and serious fault of beginners to 
 lose sight of the relative size of strokes. Establish a 
 certain length for the full stroke, and make the short- 
 ened characters certainly no more than half. This is 
 as important as proper stroke direction and careful 
 angular junction. 
 
 (230) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Pit bet cheat caught jet feet void taught 
 meet cat apt get let met vote fat east fed 
 net eased went wilt thought got wound 
 
 Plot bright great glad ironed sound gold 
 hired sent sword killed consent remit orbit 
 repeat vivid cottage modify hatched favored 
 plead rapid haggard agreed honored rhymed 
 qualified hammered required loosened watched 
 replied afraid broad threat roots feats rebate 
 renewed fitly invert caught ward sealed lived 
 codify retreat ratify carried 
 
 (Halving to be continued.) 
 
STi:r X.] PRACTICAL SIIOHTHA.M). 113 
 
 (231) DICTATION: 
 
 De i tr Sir : 
 
 I received your letter, and it was a surprise to hear that the 
 (15) package has not reached you. It enclosed some valuable 
 books to assist you in your (30) studies. There were several 
 especially good for reference, as they represent the views 
 of the (45) ablest writers, and one could get considerable 
 knowledge from them. 
 
 II seems peculiar, since the (60) necessary postage (PsJ) 
 was prepaid, that they should be so long on the way. How- 
 ever, it (15) may be all right, and possibly you will receive 
 them by tomorrow. If you do (30) not, please advise me 
 by very early mail. 
 
 Yours truly (10), 
 (100 words.) 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS STEP X.: 
 
 How is S prefixed to the L-hook? Why in this manner? 
 When does the circle-S applied to the L-hook look more 
 like a loop? How are the trigraphs str, pr, -sAr, etc., denoted? 
 I low is the S 'applied? Is the R sufficiently implied? How 
 does S appear in the words extra and poxtnre? How in the 
 words </t.sr/(.sx and disgrace? How are super, soaker and 
 sin <' r written? 
 
 When do in, un or en before S have to be represented by 
 the back-curl? When otherwise? What position do the 
 following words occupy : honor, yracefnl, crucible, setter, 
 (llt'iiilf. sutler. What do the hyphens stand for among 
 the group word-signs? What is the best way to memorize 
 word-signs? 
 
 Name a phrase in which Nr saves making an awkward 
 stroke. Name a Avord outline made fluent by the same 
 agency. What does shaded M stand for? 
 
 What is halving? What is the rule for halving? What 
 stems are shaded to add D? When is such shading waived? 
 What strokes are never halved? When can Huh and Huh 
 be shortened? What positions can a halved stroke take? 
 When is the power of the halving read? 
 
 Have you memorized all the Avorcl-signs thus far pre- 
 sented? Have you written and read all the sentences of 
 Step X.? Have you had the letter dictated to you? How 
 many times? Can you now write it correctly and readily? 
 
114 INSTRUCTION IX [STEP XI. 
 
 STEP XI. 
 
 FINAL HOOKS F, V AND N: 
 
 (232) A small final hook on the right (or circle-S) 
 side of a straight stroke, or the upper side of a hori- 
 zontal, adds the sound of F or V in the same syllable. 
 
 pave buff tough dove chafe 
 
 \o V I. L / 
 
 Jove cuff gave ravo hoof 
 
 (233) A similar hook upon the opposite side 
 
 stands for N ; as 
 
 been ten done John can 
 
 \ J J A 
 
 chin gone hen run 
 
 J - 
 
 (234) The foregoing applies only to straight 
 strokes. A small final hook applied to the concave 
 side of a curve stands generally for the sound of N. 
 
STEP XI.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 115 
 
 There is no F or V hook for curves : the strokes must 
 be used. 
 
 often even (wi)thin ocean alone 
 
 ^ ^ t j c 
 
 leave move 
 
 3c 
 
 (235) Reading the final hook. In any syllable 
 the power of the final hook is read last, except when S 
 is added, which is always read last. 
 
 (236) S joined to an F or V-hook, or to an N- 
 hook on a curve, is written within the hook, so as not 
 to conflict with simple final S ; as 
 
 paves doves achieves fines loans 
 
 \ I i ^ r 
 
 but S, Ses, Stuh or Ster, written upon the N-hook 
 side of a straight stroke, simply adds those sounds to 
 the N which is implied ; as 
 
 chance reigns chances bounced punster 
 
 J 
 
 (237) The application of the final hooks is syllab- 
 ic, and therefore the term "stroke" is employed 
 above with judgment. If more than one syllable is 
 
[ STK1' XI. 
 
 considered, each is treated on its merits. Obviously, 
 words like the following do not require the final hook : 
 
 many 
 
 tiny 
 
 funny 
 
 rainy 
 
 (288) It will generally be found desirable to con- 
 dense all the sounds of a syllable into one 
 stroke ; and the abundance of initial and final hooks, 
 as well as other abbreviating material now provided, 
 combine to make this procedure more and more 
 reasonable and wise. 
 
 On the other hand, the introduction of the V-hook 
 gives also an illustration of how the need for a 
 "quick" angle overrules the intent to write syllabi- 
 cally. We refer to the un-angular junction of T 
 and V, T and F, P and V, and the consequent ne- 
 cessity of writing the following words thus : 
 
 devote profane provoke denied define 
 
 defense 
 
 U 
 
 provincial typhoon superfine 
 
 outfit 
 
 L, 
 
 Other examples of unfavorable junctions, and the 
 alternative procedure, will be given further on under 
 the head of Angles and Direction of Strokes. 
 
 (239) The use of the final hook also obviate! 
 writing the awkward stroke iNG as occurring in words 
 like : 
 
 bank 
 
 Frank 
 
 lank 
 
 rank 
 
 crank 
 
STF,1> XI. J 1'KACTIOAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 117 
 
 (240) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Staff cabinet skiff cough shave mantels 
 enough serve cover woolens behave tariff 
 endeavor rough shingles chairman economy 
 hotel piquancy condensed shellac Quincy 
 swollen messenger (Ms-Jr) vacancy tenth throne 
 convenience panic cancer hank foreign punish 
 Spencer dances veneer wagon perhaps adjourn 
 serenely stanza kangaroo replevin Lancaster 
 penury remain endorsed instances German 
 lancers behoof champion Kansas believe tracer 
 
 (241) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 u 
 
118 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 [STEP xi. 
 
 (242) GROUP WORD-SIGNS LIST IV.: 
 
 </ 
 
 religion 
 .^. general 
 imagin-e-ation 
 
 u ciivini 
 
 Jl I.... differ 
 
 I, advai 
 
 divine 
 
 'en-t-cc 
 ance 
 
 opinion 
 none, known 
 union 
 
 I 
 
 (. thine, within 
 / then 
 
 v than 
 
 men 
 man 
 human 
 
 denomination 
 
 (243) MISCELLANEOUS VII. : 
 
 . *\ 
 
 V 
 
 -punctual-ity 
 
 .proficient 
 
 happen 
 
8TKP XI.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (244) PHRASES: 
 
 110 
 
 /<~^^_p 
 
 
 p as-fnr-fls 
 
 c 
 
 
 P as-fast-as 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 o Bach-as 
 
 qy 
 
 
 a can-be 
 
 j 
 
 
 \ 
 
 \> to-have 
 
 r 
 
 at-length 
 
 c ^ care-of 
 
 J 
 
 inore-tlitin 
 
 careful 
 ray-own 
 
 
 /Mir-own 
 
 . L set-forth 
 b but-if-Chave) 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 
 
 (245) 
 . wherein 
 
 COMPOUNDS : 
 
 fe^j whereas 
 
 / 
 
 wliir.h fiver 
 
 t^^^ whereof 
 
 1 
 
 truthful 
 
 cheerful 
 
 I 
 
 watchful 
 
 c/ therein 
 
 "} 
 
 herein 
 
 \ hereinbefore 
 I at-once 
 
 t 
 
 whoever 
 
120 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP XI. 
 
 POSITION Continual : 
 
 (246) The importance of Position should not be 
 over-estimated. Although presented in the theory of 
 phonography as a substitute for vowels, it is obviously 
 not a perfect substitute nor is it vitally necessary 
 that it should be. 
 
 Immediately upon discarding vowels, when the 
 learner is extremely in want of a word identifier, the 
 theory of position serves to inadequately bridge the 
 gap ; but in later and more practical writing a very 
 small proportion of the vast number of words in 
 common use require position for their identification. 
 
 (247) In advanced shorthand the need for a special 
 position is principally in the following situations : 
 
 (1) For the single or simple stroke word- 
 signs which have a multiplied meaning. (See 
 group word-signs generally.) 
 
 (2) For the outlines which stand for more 
 than one word of the- same* part of speech, and 
 containing the same consonant sounds ; as 
 
 prominent pre-eminent permit promote expect accept 
 
 w v y -A 
 
 (3) For special distinction in the case of a 
 few outlines to assist legibility ; as 
 
 women woman appear practice gentlemen gentleman 
 
 * Different parts of speech can have the same outline 
 without much clanger of conflict. 
 
STF.P XI.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAXD. 121 
 
 tril)ute attribute wait await today* tonight 
 
 I 
 
 (4) As a special feature of word-signs in 
 general. Always identify the word-sign very 
 much by its position. 
 
 (5) Long outlines can usually be written 
 upon the line, as their full rendering makes 
 them sufficiently legible. 
 
 (24<S) The position of the derivative should not 
 commonly depart from that of the primitive ; as 
 
 sensi-ble noti-fy success-ful question-able 
 
 (249) WRITING EXP^RCISE : 
 
 His fall into-the cistern was considered-a serious 
 disaster. I-saw-the publisher, ami-he promised 
 earnestly to-be punctual with-the work. Truth never 
 fears to-be examined. How much we measure-the 
 character of others by-our-own. Must I tell you 
 Rgam-and-again to-be watchful. When you-have 
 made a-beginning, that-is-not-all there is to-an en- 
 deavor. Different people have different views ; but 
 what-is your opinion of-the government? It-was-a pe- 
 culiar circumstance, you-will readily admit. A-Will 
 generally begins, " Know all-men by these presents." 
 Hopes and-cares, angers and-fears, divide our lives. 
 He-was never known to change his opinion on-any sub- 
 ject. Poverty is-a great disadvantage unless one is 
 industrious. Though a-trifle prejudiced, I-have-a clear 
 
 * Below the line 4th position, so called implies to. 
 
122 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP XI. 
 
 remembrance of-the circumstance. Zeal nerving 
 a-Vernet when in-a fierce tempest to sketch the-waste 
 of waters. Dr. Burchard said: "Rum, Romanism 
 and Rebellion." In-her reply to- the inquiry she ac- 
 quired just the-right tone of voice required. 
 
 * Stopping free coinage caused a-pauic which re- 
 duced-the people to penury. The-serene syren gave-the 
 seaman Simon seven saline salmon for-his dinner. 
 The-thinness, fineness and-evenness of-the table 
 covering was remarkable. Lenora Lenox will-have 
 to remain in-a lonely nunnery as-long-as she-is a-minor. 
 Assyrians, Italians, Romans, Africans aud-Arabians 
 may-be found in Paris. 
 
 (250) NUMBERS : 
 
 It will be realized sooner or later in the business of 
 shorthand writing that the Arabic figures cannot always 
 be written rapidly enough to satisfy every exigency ; 
 and while the cardinal numbers one, two, three, and 
 the ordinals, first, second and third, are sufficiently 
 facile when represented by the customary shorthand 
 material, that other figures often demand a quicker 
 presentation. 
 
 The system of writing numbers here introduced was 
 invented by RUEL SMITH, Esq., who has been for over 
 twenty years official stenographer of the Maine Su- 
 preme Judicial Court. Mr. Smith permits the use of 
 his method in these pages, and has kindly supervised 
 the exhibit. 
 
 (251) LESSON I. : 
 
 The digits, ten, eleven and twelve are written as 
 follows : 
 
 123450 789 10 11 12 
 
 CD \ /^ ^ i - v i ^ J r [_ 
 
 *See foot note, page 54. 
 
STKI' XI.] PUACTICAL SHORTHAND. 123 
 
 These characters are distinguished mainly by form 
 and direction, and their phonetic quality renders them 
 easy to memorize. Short forms for figures are prefer- 
 able to long, if the hand of the writer can be trained 
 to that nicety of procedure. The wuh-sign for one 
 turns to the left or right as usual. The sign for 
 figure two is made short in analogy with the tick for to. 
 
 (252) The direction for writing these number- 
 signs is for the most part identical with their shorthand 
 counterpart. The strokes for figures three and seven 
 have two directions and two or more angles of incli- 
 nation for the sake of convenience. 
 
 (253) Figure outlines are sharply distinguished 
 from other stenographic characters by a curved line 
 drawn beneath, with the concave side toward the figure. 
 
 (254) EXAMPLES OF TEN-GROUPS: 
 
 Numbers between 20 and 100 are denoted by join- 
 ing the signs given for the digits. 
 
 23 24 25 2G 28 31 32 33 37 38 
 
 > *> 
 
 \> 
 
 39 41 43 45 42 46 47 48 49 56 
 
 59 CO 05 69 75 77 78 87 
 
124 INSTRUCTION IN [STK1> XI. 
 
 83 85 58 27 8T> CS 92 55 4-1 
 
 We are aware of the prejudice that has existed 
 against writing figures in stenography ; but having 
 been in situations where the Arabic numerals were 
 painfully inadequate, were prompted to learn the 
 Smith system, and from experience believe it to be as 
 good as (if not better than) any yet devised. 
 
 (Numbers to be continued.) 
 
 (255) DICTATION: 
 
 My Dear Sir : 
 
 We have your favor of the 1st, and wish to say in reply 
 that we fail to (20) see why there should be anything missing 
 from the goods sent you a week ago. We will, however, go 
 over (40) our check-list, and see if we have made any mis- 
 take; and if we have, will at once notify you (60). 
 
 We are always ready to make good such losses, and if this 
 is our error, will correct it right away (80). Will bring 
 this special case to the notice of our principal, and if it be- 
 longs to us to act, he (20) will direct us to do so. 
 
 It is our invariable practice to calculate fully the items 
 of a consignment (con-sN-Nt) previous (40) to shipment; 
 and if we did In this case, it will appear by marks on the 
 box. If you remember (60) the number (we think it was S7) 
 and will describe the stencil, we shall be able to adjust the 
 difficulty (80). 
 
 Awaiting your early advices, we are 
 
 Yours sincerely (8), 
 (168 words.) 
 
 See Shorthand Penmanship, Sect. 309. 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS STEP XI.: 
 
 What does the small final hook stand for? When does 
 it denote /or v? When does it denote n? Do these hooks 
 apply to any stroke? What is the limitation? What final 
 
8TKI' XI.] I'KACTICAL SIIO15TII.V XI). 125 
 
 hook has a curved stroke? How is S joined to the / or 
 t'-hook? How to the u-hook on a straight stroke? How to 
 the M-hook on a curve? How would you write ri)wd, 
 
 Should the application of the final hook be syllabic? In 
 what sense? (Jive an example where the v-hook -would not 
 be used for the final consonant. The >i-hook. How is it 
 possible to condense all the sounds of the syllable into one 
 stroke? 
 
 What consonants have been mentioned that make a poor 
 junction with one another? Do you know of any others? 
 What must be done in such a case? How would you write 
 /)////.-, drink, hi ink, wink with a hook? Is this strictly 
 phonetic? What would be the phonetic way? Are the junc- 
 tions as good? 
 
 (The teacher should ask questions on the word-signs, 
 phrases and compound forms of this step. For instance: 
 ask what the outline is for dcrdop, as-wrtl-as, whichever, etc. ; 
 or, for another test, write the correct shorthand outline 
 upon the blackboard, and call for its interpretation.) 
 
 Is position a perfect substitute for the vowels? When 
 is position most needed? Does it become less and less im- 
 portant as the student progresses in practical shorthand? 
 Name a situation where position is indispensable. Another. 
 Another. What relation has the position of the derivative 
 word to that of the primitive? 
 
 Can numbers be written in stenography? Is it advisable 
 to do this? What, ones are best Avritten in full, or by Avord- 
 sign forms? (The cardinals and ordinals.) What is the 
 form for tirnt, third, three.? What system of figure writing 
 is here presented? According to the Smith system, how 
 Avould you Avrite 2, 7, 11, 12. etc.? Why do 1, 3 and 7 
 have two directions? 
 
 Can the figure characters be joined? Is the ten-f/roup, 
 so called, an illustration of this? Why are tAvo figures 
 called a tcn-tfrnxft/ (In distinction from a group of three 
 figures, to be termed later on the hundred-group.} Are not 
 the joined strokes of the ii'>i-t/rnit/>x very much like placing 
 the Arabic numerals side by side to constitute the same 
 numbers? How would j'cu' write 33, 7 it, 47, 91, 44, 27, 
 31, 32, 87. ' 
 
126 INSTRUCTION IN [STEr XII. 
 
 STEP XII. 
 
 FURTHER FINAL HOOKS : 
 
 (256) An enlarged final hook upon the S-side of 
 straight strokes, and upon the inside of curves, stands 
 for the syllable "shun," variously spelled -lion, -*/'<///, 
 -cJM, -ci'ow, etc. 
 
 action fasljion notion education magician objection 
 
 _j> <o o LJ 7. v 
 
 ambition session oblation vision Hessian cautionary 
 
 ~> J V? *o ^ -^ 
 
 (257) A similar hook upon the opposite side of 
 straight strokes denotes the syllable -tice, as 
 
 consecutive subjective figurative operative effective- 
 
 (-258) Curves necessarily cannot have the large 
 hook for -tive, and for the few words that occur the 
 stroke form Tf * is employed ; as 
 
 native votive motive ablative palliative 
 
 -i. i n. vi NO. 
 
 u 
 
 * Although in a fevf cases, in order to preserve analogy, 
 the following are not impossible forms : 
 
 active derivative native comparative votive accumulative 
 
8TKP XII.] ritACTlCAI, SIIOHTHANL). 127 
 
 (259) S is added regularly to the enlarged final 
 books, though -shun after an S is denoted by con- 
 tinuing the pen movement to a small "back-curl." 
 This is called the " Eshon " (S-slmn) hook. 
 
 po-s-ition physician decision sensation conversation 
 
 V I * 
 
 Mark the special forte of the cxlion curl, namely : 
 to express tthmi only after the sound of S. 
 
 (2(10) This same signification can follow S on the 
 N-hook side ; as 
 
 compensation condensation transition organization 
 y ch <r> 
 
 (201) After the analogy of Eshou, the syllable 
 -*///'/> after a small final hook may be denoted as 
 follo'vs : 
 
 division inclination tension abbreviation derivation convention 
 
 ..I .V 
 
 This, though regarded by some as of doubtful 
 stenographic propriety (see also Sect. 211), has too 
 limited an application to deserve much criticism. 
 
 (21)2) It has commonly been regarded an offence 
 in shorthand to join a hook to a hook ; but in the pur- 
 suit of facile forms there seems to be no serious 
 
128 INSTRUCTION IN [STKl 1 XII. 
 
 mechanical obstacle to writing a few words us illus- 
 trated below : 
 
 expenditure monitor Braintree pantry manager plunger 
 
 
 although in a few like xtnnujcr and dtimjcr the N- 
 hook is omitted altogether, as will be shown under the 
 head of. Omissions, Step XVI. 
 
 (263) WHITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Portion junction affairs advised location 
 various repair subjection illustration losers 
 mohair veal imitation detention Mohammedan 
 occasion factory compunction Smyrna intimation 
 gradation Hardy criticisms operation competition 
 occupation utility beauty allegation commemoration 
 dynamo conversation hesitation Putnam apparatus 
 discussion sanction execution negative Newcastle 
 admission valuation lessees wardrobe succession 
 property animation activity missionary invective 
 minister administration propriety provocative in- 
 relation cautionary preparatory excelsior detri- 
 ment colossal exhibition inexperienced blunder 
 hindrance Ogdeuburg attentively tomorrow to- 
 you reversionary Breckenbridge country penetrate 
 
 (264) GROUP WORD-SIGNS LIST V.: 
 
 opposition 
 position 
 
 possession, apposition 
 
 surprise 
 express 
 suppress 
 
STEI' XII.] 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 129 
 
 (2Gr>) MISCELLANEOUS VIII. : 
 
 O. 
 
 I 
 
 information 
 
 }x . representation 
 
 c 
 
 mention 
 revelation 
 
 
 organization 
 
 <? 
 
 jurisdiction 
 
 i 
 
 association 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 justification 
 
 
 1 
 
 ...direction 
 
 T 
 
 y -instruction 
 
 1 
 
 -id , .consideration 
 
 
 consumption 
 
 5 
 
 formation 
 
 Word signs and figures, because not generally 
 of frequent leiMirrence, should he practiced a great 
 deal daily, in order to make them _/o inf/iar material. 
 
 (260) PHRASES AND CONTRACTIONS: 
 
 >"' 
 <Q 
 
 _less-thaii 
 
 .of-his-own 
 
 .iii-his-own 
 
 -uot-less-than 
 
 .of -Its-own 
 
130 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP XII. 
 
 -iii-siich 7^ "as> 
 
 .in-consideration <g ^ JD .in-soine-cases 
 
 / i 
 
 -4L- -Johnson 
 
 (207) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 The-capable doctor is careful in-his prescriptions. 
 There-was one onerous condition we-have-uot men- 
 tioned. I-have given Charles my honest opinion. 
 Charity (CHrt) is-the perfection of every virtue (Vrt). 
 His information finished the-coinmunication. How 
 much fear those evils occasion which never happen. 
 He-was commonly styled the -"General." We relished 
 his representation of-the situation. A-a consequence 
 each profession desires to-be examined first. They 
 lengthen it out, but-have to-make a reduction of-the 
 strength. We-are-all beneath Divine jurisdiction. 
 His generalization was perfect as-he described the- 
 organization of-the association. There- was-a mighty 
 revolution iu-the United States over a-century ago. 
 Do-not allow your expectations to-be those of pre- 
 sumption. The-delegation to-the general association 
 enjoyed the-sensatiou. 
 
 * There- was no occasion for getting into-a passion 
 about the-conditiou of-the Hessian army. The-at- 
 tractive appearance of-the outside was very de- 
 ceptive, ami-only served to hide the-putrefactive, 
 corruptive and-infective conditions existing within. 
 The-skillful physician made-the necessary incision 
 with precision while engaged in conversation with- 
 the sick woman. 
 
 * See foot note, page 54. 
 
STE1' XII. J TUACTICAL SIIOKTIIAXU. 
 
 131 
 
 (268) READING EXERCISE 
 
 
 V 
 
 t T 
 
 U 
 
 -^ r 
 
 1 
 
 V 
 
 "" 
 
 V^ 
 
 ~ u 
 
 J. 
 
 7 ? 
 
 \ % P 
 
 T, ) 
 
 c I 
 
 - -v- 
 
132 INSTKUCTION IN [STEP XII. 
 
 (269) THE HALVING PRINCIPLE II. : 
 
 The order of reading a shortened outline is really 
 the most troublesome feature of halving. Take, for 
 instance, the words xiii><'r!i<l<'ilci<t (sPrnt) and */- 
 round a (sRnds) in the last sentence of Sect. LT..S. 
 Noting the composition of these outlines, which are 
 illustrative of a stem modified by 8, the Hooks and 
 Halving, the student will have for consideration this 
 order of events : 
 
 1st. Circle-S or Loop. 2d. Vowel before consonant 
 stem. 3d. Consonant stern, with or without initial hook. 
 4th. Vowel after consonant. 5th. Final hook, if any. 
 6th. Tower of the Halving (r or L>). 7th. Final S. 
 
 (270) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 (Syllabic halving.) 
 
 S < 
 
 3 
 
 a ^ 6~ U 9 
 
 V 
 
 V ^ ^- -^ (5 L , V ^ 
 
 V S 
 
 r 
 
 \Q^ '<i_^ ^. <^^ ^ J> '^ "\ J" 
 
 / 
 
 ^^ 
 
 \ 
 
 j X 
 
 ^ ^ ^ r , \ 
 
 V ^ cK^^-^^^^V 
 
 >> 
 
STK.r XII.] I'UACTICAI. SHORTHAND. 133 
 
 (271) Incidental to the halving principle, particular 
 attention should be directed to a logical representation 
 of the syllable -EJ3. -El) is the termination regularly 
 denoting past tense ; and although the past tense sel- 
 dom needs to be indicated in practical shorthand, yet 
 when it is demanded the rendering should not depart 
 from syllabic consistency. Stroke-I) is the proper 
 sign for the syllable -El), and none the less after a 
 half-length primitive. For example : 
 
 not-ed (not no-tcil) vot-ed act-ed crowd-ed fltt-ed 
 
 **- 
 
 (272) For the sake of legibility the D sometimes 
 h:is to l)c disjoined; as 
 
 trcat-cd decd-cd mcditat-ed freight-ed doubt-cd 
 
 (273) Although when the final sound is T the 
 thuil stroke may lie halved. 
 
 dropped (dropt) tracked tripped cropped crushed 
 
 1 I 1 
 
 J 513. 
 
 (II.alvin.ir to lie continued.) 
 
 (274) NUMBERS LESSON II. : 
 
 This figure system exhibits two valuable character- 
 istics, viz. : In the grouping of the signs the arrange- 
 ment of the Arabic numerals is imitated to advantage. 
 
134 IXSTKUCTION IN [STKP XII. 
 
 For instance : 2 beside 7 is 27 ; 3 beside 3 is 33 ; 
 8 beside 6 is 86 ; and the quality of being joined 
 makes the forms fluent. 
 
 The second feature is, that the signs denoting the 
 degrees of increase in the numbers take their shape 
 from the words of language expressing the increase, 
 making the system easily a rescript of the N/W.v// 
 figures, and therefore valuable for purposes of dicta- 
 tion. Lesson II. illustrates this. 
 
 (275) Numbers in "teens" are denoted by adding 
 the N-hook to the sign of the digit ; as 
 
 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 
 
 ^t'},^,-^, J, I ^>J \. 
 
 The character for 18 is lengthened to prevent con- 
 flict with 10, and the n-hook is often joined to the 
 sign for 2 two-teen (?) in combinations, for con- 
 venience of junction ; as 
 
 22 25 27 29 20,000 20,000,000,000 
 
 (276) Numbers having the " ft/ " ending are de- 
 noted by adding S to the sign of the digit ; as 
 
 20 30 40 50 CO 70 80 90 
 
 ~S Q-OX by ^ 
 
 (277) A convenient way to indicate a number 
 (used as an adjective), and so dispense with the 
 curved underscore, is to write the first stroke of the 
 
Slid' XIi.J PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 135 
 
 modified word across the sign for the figure, or <-i<-i> 
 ; as 
 
 30-days 40-milcs 2(VInchCfl /0-hours IS-acres 
 
 
 (27H) Although multiples of ten (the "tys") are 
 denoted as above, other ten-groups are written as 
 slio\vn in Section 254, the S being omitted, and the 
 whole outline imitating the juxtaposition of figures 
 observed in the Arabic notation. A hundred-group 
 made up of digits from 2 upward may be written in 
 the same manner, the digit signs being simply joined 
 one to another ; as 
 
 All other "hundred" combinations will be explained 
 in Figure Lesson III. 
 
 (Numbers to be continued.) 
 
 (270) DICTATION. 
 
 The student of piano playing is given a lesson once 
 :i \\H-ck, perhaps; and it is expected that several hours 
 a day shall be devoted to the practice of that single 
 task. Such a plan faithfully carried out results in the 
 mental discipline which leads to quick reading of music 
 and that training of the lingers which conquers the 
 dilliculties of keyboard manipulation. 
 
 The same practice should obtain in shorthand study. 
 "Set a copy," and work upon it with diligence. Im- 
 
13(5 INSTRUCTION IN [STF.P XII. 
 
 pose a stint, and practice on that one thing until head 
 and hand operate so harmoniously that the writing is 
 done quickly and well. This advice applies particularly 
 to the letters herein given, which arc for a practical 
 demonstration of the knowledge derived from other 
 pages of the manual. 
 
 Di-ar Sir : 
 
 Yours of the first instant received, and in reply will say 
 I am greatly obliged for your kind favor in (22) desiring 
 me to prepare specifications on your proposed residence. 
 But, under the circumstances, don't you think it would be 
 better for you to (45) secure some one in your association 
 to estimate on it; as you are occupying a public oflice. and 
 by going out of (07) town it might occasion a feeling among 
 your constituents? 
 
 Nevertheless, I shall be pleased to make you some figures, 
 and only mention this (00) in the way of a suggestion which 
 the situation may or may not warrant. 
 
 Will call to see you in a few (22) days; and if there arc 
 any points I can give you in regard to building, shall be 
 most happy to do so. 
 
 I (45) am, sir, 
 
 Your obedient servant (50). 
 (140 words) 
 
 M;i Dear Sir : 
 
 We are in receipt of your letter of the 2sth instant, 
 asking for an extension of time on your account (22) which 
 is now overdue. 
 
 In reply would state, that while we are in much need of 
 money at this time, having several heavy (45) bills coining 
 due and payable next week ; still, from our past transactions 
 and experience with your firm, which have been of a ((!") 
 most satisfactory character, we cannot do otherwise than 
 comply with your request. 
 
 We therefore extend the time of credit thirty days from 
 this date (HO), at which time we shall draw on you at sight 
 for account in full, and trust you will honor draft, and so 
 (22) accommodate 
 
 Yours very truly (4), 
 (116 words.) 
 
3TK1' XII.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. ]'.\7 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS STEP XII.: 
 
 How is the syllable -tinn denoted? Does the varied spell- 
 ing of this termination have any weight? What is the 
 live-hook?' To what stems is it applied? Why cannot 
 curves admit this hook? What phase of the, -tion situation 
 docs the Eshon-hook mark? How is slum denoted after 
 Ns? 
 
 How is -tii-i- expressed after curves? Is this the in- 
 variable practice? When may exception be made? How 
 may ii'i/in-, nc/ii-c. rot in- he written? How would you write 
 n<'t. iti-tfil, iti-lnul, etc.? What root form is preserved? Is 
 a like analogy followed in the other words given? 
 
 How is shun represented after a final hook? Is this the 
 best of stenographic material? Why not (see Sect. 202) ? Is 
 it generally proper to join a hook to a hook? When may 
 the objection be waived? Is not this the reason for writing 
 ((irisioti, ti'itsiiiii,, etc., as in Sect. 2*11:' 
 
 \Vh:it is a clever way to write Jvsx-tlmn, Benson, Mununn? 
 In these words what sound is the shun in analogy with? (N.) 
 Is this more unreasonable than some of the approved out- 
 lines for word-signs? 
 
 What is a difficult feature of halving? Give the order of 
 reading in the words xfr<u'<'<I, supplant, considered. What 
 does the syllable -<<! stand for in language? How denoted 
 in shorthand? Why is it seldom necessary to denote the 
 past tensc-f? Is 1) so used regularly joined or disjoined? 
 When disjoined? (See Syllabication in Shorthand, I'art 
 III.) 
 
 What features of the figure system are noteworthy? 
 Why? How are numbers in teen* expressed? What is the 
 sign for 15, 14? How is a number ending with the syllable 
 -///written? What are the signs for 16, 19,40,80?' Why 
 is the character for 18 double-length? When is 20 con- 
 sidered as two-teen ( ? ) What other way of calling attention 
 to a ligure besides the underscore? What is a ten-group? 
 A hundred-group? What kind of hundred-group can be 
 represented by the material thus far given? 
 
138 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP XIII. 
 
 STEP XIII. 
 
 THE BUSINESS LETTER: 
 
 (280) The simplest use of a not profound knowl- 
 edge of shorthand is in the business office for the ex- 
 pedition of commercial correspondence. Stenographers 
 of all degrees of proficiency are available for this, be- 
 cause such dictations range from the slowest speed 
 upon a familiar subject up to reasonably sw4ft writing 
 upon more exacting matter. 
 
 But for the most part business correspondence is a 
 primary development of practical shorthand : for the 
 reason that the writer becomes well acquainted with 
 the technicalities of a single business after a short 
 period of service, and the work is likely to run much 
 in the same channel. Writing letters, then, is an ap- 
 propriate occupation for the beginner in stenograph}', 
 and from that he can progress to more ambitious effort. 
 
 (281) SOME BUSINESS WORD-SIGNS: 
 
 1 advance ' interest 
 
 L appreciate ^manufacture 
 
 O 
 
 average 1 merchandise 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 -balance 
 bankrupt. ~7 mortgagee 
 
 \ 
 
 .negotiate 
 
STKP XIII.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 139 
 
 , "-^ i commercial -5_ 
 
 "X 
 
 -consignee ^ _ principal 
 
 % 
 -customer . -profit 
 
 \r deficiency U_ 
 
 .deficiency , U quotation 
 
 -dollar 5= secretary 
 
 .exchange ! signature 
 
 n 1 L 
 
 I , guarantee *"~ 
 
 -instant P transfer 
 
 (282) BUSINESS PHRASES: 
 .bill-lading 
 
 .account-current C?. ...account-sales 
 
 1> .. 
 
 \ _ balance-account V " bills-receivable 
 
 V^ 
 
 bill- (of; -sale 
 
 bank-stock _^\ Board-(of )-Tradc 
 
 r 
 
 dear-sir fea. _...in-settlement 
 
 yours-trulj 7 ' ..flC\ _yours-respectfully 
 
 by-express .....A ..charter-party 
 
140 INSTRUCTION IN [STKl' XIII. 
 
 (283) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 Acceptance accommodation annuity assets 
 assignment (S-N-Nt) brokerage capital clearance 
 commission contraband correspondent currency 
 debenture deficit discount dissolution dividend 
 draft duplicate entry finance failure firm 
 foreclosure forward shortage funds import 
 reimburse installment insurance inventory investment 
 (N-Vst-Nt) invoice license lien manifest market 
 minimum panic partner payee policy protest 
 ultimo proximo sub-agent financial surety rebate 
 remittance renewal revenue schedule solvent 
 traffic tracer tariff trustee voucher wire transit 
 
 (284) COMMON PHRASES OF THE BUSINESS 
 LETTER : 
 
 Yon-will-notice enclose-herewith we-enclose bills- 
 payable discount-day invoice-book in-settlement 
 in-answer per-annum per-cent power- (of ) -attorney 
 duly-received sight-draft esteemed-favor lot-us- 
 know forward-at-once await-your-reply we-eu- 
 close-check we-shall-be-pleased at-the-same-price 
 we-enclose-copy be-kind-enough kindly-examine 
 without-protest proof-of-loss in-reply pleasc-re- 
 ceipt we-decline we-will-be-pleased at-present in- 
 relation-to-the-mattcr in-receipt-of in-every- respect 
 you- will-notice in-this-matter early-as-possible has- 
 been-received this-figure we- may- receive course- 
 of-bnsiness in-this-mail on-the-way by-special- 
 delivery express-paid according- (to) -agreement on- 
 account-of under- (the) -circumstances National-bank 
 
 (285) Note the simplicity of all the phrases presented. 
 Certain word groups arc of frequent occurrence, and are 
 oftei uttered rapidly. The stenographer should be able to 
 write them quickly. Judicious phrasing of such expressions 
 is admissible; but do not labor to phrase. The most useful 
 composite outline is that which takes shape almost of itself. 
 Do not force the process ; simply yield to a natural impulse. 
 See Phrasing, Part III. 
 
STEP XIII.] PRACTICAL SHOHTHAND. 141 
 
 (iso) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 The following sentences should be written many, many 
 times. True progress in shorthand writinjr does not consist 
 in hurrying over a vast iimonnt of matter; but more lasting 
 benefit Avill result from dwelling a long time upon one task. 
 Kverv |>ieee of writ ing sliould be read. This is an indis- 
 pensable re<|iiisile of proper procedure. Writing trains the 
 hand ; reading, the mind : both must be educated in this 
 study : 
 
 The-business man's first wish was-to please every 
 customer. The-principal of-the firm considered it for- 
 his interest to perform his duties well. To-be capable 
 in business one-must have a-general knowledge of com- 
 mereial affairs. The-balance (or difference) is correct, 
 and-when you average it properly no deficiency exists. 
 The-guariinty iu-tlie charter required the-managers 
 of- the corporation to divide the-stock into equal shares. 
 The-president recommends the-secretary to make a- 
 ca refill investigation of-the irregularity in-the accounts. 
 The-lioanl-of-Trade directs all business transactions 
 according to practical rules. Thirty years ago a-civil 
 war agitated this country, and-the finances of-the 
 nation were disturbed by-the unequal distribution of 
 exper.ses. The rate-of interest to-be obtained in Eng- 
 land at that time was only three per cent, while in-the 
 United States it-was eight or ten. The-striugency 
 of-the stock market is beyond belief, and-prices on-all 
 securities rule high. The-$50,000.0p (;>() -f thuh) of 
 borrowed capital was covered principally by collateral 
 (Kit-Ill) trust bonds and-preferred stock. Wall Street 
 is-tlie feverish center of speculation (sP-Klshn) and- 
 finance. The-Bank of England h^s reduced its rate-of 
 discount from three to two per cent. If bank clear- 
 ances may-be considered an-indication of general 
 trade, then the-year 1<S!)2 (l<S-f'J2) inust-have-l)eeu 
 a- fairly favorable one. The consignee was-a good 
 
142 INSTRUCTION IN [STEI 1 XIII. 
 
 customer, and-believed he-could realize a-satisfactory 
 profit if quotations could-be given by telegraph. 
 Pres. Ingalls said: "Last year only 4,000 miles 
 of railroad were constructed in-this country, aud-there 
 should-have-been 10,000." Since-the passage of-the 
 Sherman Act of 1890 the-belief has grown that-the 
 United States is moving iu-the direction of-a silver 
 basis country. The-manufacturer directed his ste- 
 nographer to telegraph the secretary of the Co. to 
 negotiate for-a stock-of supplies ; but learning that-the 
 price of exchange had advanced, that sales of mer- 
 chandise were slow, and-an average consumption 
 could-not-be guaranteed, he-refused to affix his signa- 
 ture to-the despatch. The-transfer of-the bankrupt 
 stock-of merchandise was accomplished on-the 18th 
 instant. The-mortgagee questioned the-terms of -t lie 
 mortgage much the-same as would a-lessee the-pro- 
 visions of-a lease. 
 
 NUMBERS LESSON III.: 
 
 (287) Three ways f speaking numbers contain- 
 ing the word hundred are heard. For example: (1) 
 Hunclred-and-five ; (2) Five-hundred-and-five ; (3) 
 Five-hundred. The position, initial, medial or final. 
 which the word hundred occupies in the nmm-ncal 
 sentence, governs the manner of indicating the short- 
 hand outline. 
 
 (288) The peculiar application of this idea may 
 be expressed as follows : Initial hundred is denoted 
 by the circle-S prefixed. Medial hundred is de- 
 noted by the S executed medially. Final hundred 
 is denoted by a pendant loop. All of which are 
 amply illustrated on the next page. 
 
sricr xiii.] 
 
 I'KACTK'AI. 
 
 SHOUTHAXI>. 
 
 
 ua 
 
 105 .-. 'i.-. 500 
 
 V.7 706 
 
 600 700 
 
 no 
 
 150 155 
 
 t, *. v< 
 
 "3y X. 
 
 / fy i?; 
 
 L 
 
 P P 
 
 V^y ^i 
 
 5- ^ fx 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 }^ 
 
 110 Hi; 406 
 
 460 114 
 
 215 61!) 
 
 200 
 
 3(K1 NCI 
 
 P N ~^_ 
 
 J ^ l / <=*. / 
 
 ' L_0y ^ 
 
 t \^ y ^ 
 
 / V, 
 
 ' -*/ k 
 
 1!H) 3500 
 
 4(K)0 
 
 1100 1200 
 
 1400 
 
 1500 I'.KX) 
 
 2_0^ -^\> > 
 
 X,, 
 
 ^y b/ 
 
 "5/ 
 
 ^y ^ 
 
 Note the forms for 1100 and 1200. That for the 
 latter is prrfcnible to the regular way, which might be 
 taken for o:500 or 8300. 
 
 The hooks of curved figures in teens are 
 made large to admit the loop for final hundred, as 
 illustrated by the last three examples above. 
 
 In a hundred-group of figures, made up 
 of digits from two upward, the medial-S is usually 
 omitted, as stated in Fig. Lesson II. ; but it may be 
 inserted at pleasure if convenience of junction de- 
 mands. The observant writer will see upon the in- 
 stant the "slow" angle that can be quickened by 
 the insertion of the S. 
 
 2-21 -270 2!!l 567 217 5114 sss 117 666 
 
 (-;'!) Thousands, millions, billions, etc., are 
 denoted by joining the regular character for such 
 numbers. 
 
 Large numbers are also represented by disjoining 
 for thousands, millions, etc., imitating the groups of 
 three figures of the Arabic notation. 
 
144 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 [STEP XIII. 
 
 5,000 10,000 100,000 500,000 S,000,000 14,000,000,000 
 
 k 
 
 13,750 104,963 
 
 14,002 33,936,015 25,006 190C 1,900 
 
 (2'J2) Dollars and cents may be denoted by 
 drawing a straight line (like tin extended Rub) under 
 dollars and over cents, ami dispensing with the 
 curved underscore ; as 
 
 !j;3JO 
 
 $40.25 $100 23.50 $103,000 
 
 o/ >/ 
 
 4 
 
 (293) Fractions are denoted by writing the sign 
 of the numerator over that for the denominator. 
 Fractions with 1 for the numerator are denoted by 
 simply joining the sign for I to the denominator : 
 
 50 
 
 ,';;: 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 ,'H 
 
 A 
 
 These three lessons in the writing of numbers will 
 serve for all ordinary usage. Jf the student desires to 
 go further he is recommended to consult SMITH'S 
 SHORTHAND NUMERALS,* which may be obtained of 
 any dealer in shorthand literature. 
 
 * SMITH'S SHORTHAND NCMKUALS, by liuel Smith, Bau^or, 
 Maiiie. Price, 25 cents. 
 
vr ].! xiii.] 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 145 
 
 (-21)1) NAMES OF PEOPLE AND PLACES: 
 
 Employ the same principles iu writing proper names 
 as 1'or ordinary words, only remember that they are 
 less common, and therefore their outlines are less 
 familiar ; so it will be wise to make extra efforts for 
 legibility, giving heed to syllables, angles and sug- 
 estive contour of form. 
 
 / AtvliUmi Providence 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 llhode Island 
 
 7 
 
 Europe 
 
 X 
 
 Santa Fe 
 
 V- > v 
 
 x Framini^ham 
 
 M 
 
 Utah 
 
 lYj, 
 
 Hartford 
 
 n 
 
 Wisconsin' 
 
 \ 
 
 Hersey 
 
 j 
 
 Twitchell 
 
 *) 
 
 Kentucky 
 
 2 
 
 Forrest 
 
 r ^_ 
 
 
 ^>_ 
 
 - Haybrook 
 
 9 
 
 Nashua 
 
 7 
 
 r 7 
 
 Chandler 
 
 (295) Names of places of compound form con- 
 taining the word AV/r may be written as follows : 
 
 New Kng. Newport New Hamp. Newcastle Newark New Jersey 
 
14G INSTRUCTION IN [STKP XIII. 
 
 (29G) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Annapolis Arkansas Amherst Attlcboro Ayer 
 Arizona Albany Augusta Atlantic Alabama 
 Aldrich Abbott Bangor Biddeford l>re\\ster 
 Beverly Buffalo Baltimore Brooklyn Burlington 
 Braintree Baring Burton Belcher Butterworth 
 Bicknell Blanchard Clinton Cottage City Cin- 
 cinnati Chicago California Carolina Charleston 
 Colorado Cleveland Columbia Candler Carroll 
 Couant Detroit Delaware Denver Dover Dululh 
 Elizabeth Eastport Edinburgh Fredericksburg 
 Florida Eall River Francis Gloucester Greenfield 
 George Gordon Hyde Park Halifax Hinghain 
 Harrisburg Helena Houghton Herbert Indianapolis 
 Idaho Illinois Ipswich Iowa Jersey City 
 Kingsley Louisiana Lawrence Loud Lovell 
 Minneapolis Montpelier Montreal Michigan 
 Maiden Middleboro Manchester Nantucket 
 New Orleans Oregon Newburgh New Mexico 
 Newcomb Ohio Orange Omaha Peabody 
 Pittslield Portland Provincetown Pennsylvania 
 Philadelphia Partridge Rockport Randolph 
 Raymond Savannah Swampscott Salem Steven 
 St. John Stillman Seabury Sanborn Sheppard 
 Taunton Toronto Tallahassee Turner Teunessce 
 Topeka Tiukham Vermont Yosemite Young 
 Washington Weymouth Wellesley Woonso(;ket 
 White Willimantic Wilson Wilkins 
 
 (297) LETTER WRITING : 
 
 Further on will be presented a business letter in 
 shorthand, arranged as it should appear on the note- 
 book of the student. When taking a letter from 
 dictation the following points should have attention : 
 
STEP XIII.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 147 
 
 (2 ( ,)<S) Begin the notes, and carry them along to 
 the end, imitating the form of letter presented in the 
 Suggestions for Typewriter Practice accompanying 
 this manual. It is presumed that the shorthand 
 student, particularly if in a commercial school, has 
 now reached that stage in his typewriting when a let- 
 ter can be transcribed upon the writing machine. 
 
 (2',) ( J) Arrange the shorthand notes of the letter 
 <nl'lr<'*x very much in the same order that the formali- 
 ties of typewriting would demand. Have the "Dear 
 Sir" begin the next line below, and either write a 
 dash (the underscore character) or drop to still another 
 line to begin the botly of the letter. Indent for para- 
 graphs, beginning a new line for same as in any 
 writing. By so doing the stenographic page will be 
 rendered legible quite as much because of a proper 
 order of action, and by the "daylight" let in upon the 
 characters, as if the outlines were exquisitely geo- 
 metrical in form. 
 
 (300) Leave a space of about one inch always for 
 the period, and postpone other punctuation for atten- 
 tion when transcription takes place. The amanuensis 
 must know how to punctuate ! 
 
 (301) Write proper names in shorthand if they are 
 familiar, and the outline can be made unmistakable. 
 Invariably underscore such words. Unfamiliar names 
 should be freely vowelized ( ? ) , and only as a last re- 
 sort should they be written in longhand. The learner 
 should become acquainted with the outlines for the 
 countries, cities, rivers and mountains of the world, 
 as well as for the names of people. 
 
 (302) Write all initials in small letters of long- 
 hand script; because such can be joined in fluent 
 fashion, and any saving of pen-lifting is important. 
 
148 INSTRUCTION IN [STKT XIII. 
 
 Write figures according to the system explained in 
 these pages. 
 
 (303) READING EXERCISK: 
 
 Also copy this letter* in shorthand many times, .in order 
 to acquire the style of arrangement. Follow the same plan 
 in writing from dictation. The date given below should head 
 a day's dictation, but not necessarily appear over every letter. 
 
 C \ 
 
 styi*/ /? *- 
 
 r T/ JT 
 
 ; 
 
 c 
 Hr 
 
 a 
 
 ^ \ ( I 
 
 \ o \ \ v~ o 
 
 * Adapted from BKALK'S BTSINKSS LKIIKKS, issued by 
 Beale Publishing Company, Boston. 
 
.STEP XIII.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 149 
 
 > ~ I d s 
 
 f " ' I) ' 
 
 \ 1 X-x C 
 
 ^n ; 1 o K-* 
 
 1 >-> 
 c 
 
 ( ( I r> . i -^ v~ 
 
 1 I 
 
 S' J 
 
 S~Zs 3 c c\ \ n / ( 
 V n i cJ- / V<v 
 
 \ 
 
 2 \ 
 
 ^ ' 4 
 
 V, 
 
 *r 
 
 (304) DICTATION : 
 
 Messrs. HOWE & HIGH, 
 
 17^ Lisbon St., Auburn, Me. 
 Gentlemen : 
 
 Replying to yours of May 2d, would say that the Western 
 Investment Co. does not guarantee the payment (20) of the 
 bonds, but simply the interest. 
 
 If the bonds are not paid at maturity, the trustees for 
 the bondholders (40) would make entry for foreclosure, 
 unless the bondholders accept some new proposition from 
 the company for extending the bonds with (CO) the guaranty 
 of interest. 
 
 The chances are, however, that nothing of this kind would 
 be required, for it never has (80) been in any of our syndi- 
 cates. If the property should not sell for within fifty per 
 cent of its cost (20), the bondholders would have received 
 back their money and savings bank interest at four per cent. 
 If the property sold (40) for fifty per cent less than cost, 
 
150 INSTRUCTION IN [SlT.l 1 XIII. 
 
 they would have received their money back with interest for 
 .five years; but (60) under the terms of either trust, the 
 property cannot be sold unless it realizes double its original 
 cost. 
 
 Yours truly (80), 
 (100 words.) 
 
 Messrs. HAYES, HILTON & HARRIS, 
 
 I486 Pointdexter St., Baltimore, Md. 
 Gentlemen : 
 
 Your esteemed favor of the 22d instant has been duly 
 received, and contents carefully noted. 
 
 We enclose herewith check to your (22) order for twenty- 
 five dollars, in payment of bill attached. Kindly acknowledge 
 receipt, and oblige. 
 
 We wired you yesterday as per copy below, and (45) this 
 is to confirm the same : 
 
 SHIP BALANCE HY KXI'KKSS, AND DRAW ON US ACCORDING 
 TO TKRMS 1'RKVIOUSLY GIVEN. 
 
 Please pardon the (<>7) error in relation to former con- 
 signment, referred to in your advices of the isth. U'c ac- 
 knowledge the mistake, and will cheerfully refund the (00) 
 over-payment. We are sincerely sorry that such a tiling 
 should happen, and assure you that the next shipment will 
 be in (22) excellent condition. 
 
 Soliciting a continuance of your patronage, we are 
 
 Yours very truly (13), 
 (125 words.) 
 
 The figures in parenthesis occurring at intervals in 
 these and all the letters presented for dictation practice 
 are for the convenience of the dictator in timing the 
 speed of his reading. Each letter is divided into 
 quarter minute portions on a basis of sixty words 
 and upwards, according to the stage of progress. 
 
 While it is not desirable to dictate with watch in 
 hand, exposed to the sight of the student, yet it is 
 equally unprofitable to read at random, ignorant or 
 careless of the rate of utterance. The reader should 
 have a speed gauge ; but let not the writer be di- 
 verted from diligent endeavor by thoughts of it. 
 
STF.r XIII.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 151 
 
 Typewriting affords a pleasant relief to the tedium 
 of shorthand study ; and the tasks of the day should 
 be divided into convenient proportions of each. Ob- 
 serve the make-up of the Business Letter as described 
 in Suggestions for Typewriting, Part III. Sufficient 
 skill in the management of the machine should now 
 have been attained, so that all dictations can be tran- 
 scribed upon the typewriter in correct form and with 
 some despatch. But make no special effort for speed ; 
 strive rather for style and accuracy, and the matter of 
 speed will take care of itself. 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS STEP XIII.: 
 
 What development of shorthand does correspondence 
 ordinarily represent? Is extraordinary proficiency re- 
 quired? Then business correspondence provides ofttimes 
 a good stepping-stone to better things? What kind of 
 phrasing is here recommended? Mention a phrase of 
 common occurrence. 
 
 Give the three ways of speaking hundreds in figure par- 
 lance. What is the rule for representing hundred-groups? 
 In what direction is the loop for final hundred written? Is 
 the medial S always employed? How would you write 
 I, sot!.* I tow are million, billion, etc., denoted? How are 
 dollars indicated? Cents? Does this oblique line have a 
 use in English money? What? What is the general way 
 of writing fractions? The special way for fractions with 
 1 for the numerator? 
 
 What form should the notes of a dictated letter take? 
 How is the address written? What is the address of a 
 letter? Is it a correct address if the town or city be 
 omitted? Is it a useful address if the street of a large 
 city be omitted? Is the rom/ilfti' address always neces- 
 sary? What does "indent" mean in this connection, 
 :uid" in reference to typewriting? What punctuation is 
 indicated in a shorthand letter? 
 
 What is the instruction as to proper names? What are 
 familiar names? Should not good outlines be as ready for 
 them as for any familiar matter? What treatment is 
 recommended for unfamiliar names? Then it is important 
 to remember how to manage the vowels? What outlines 
 should always be familiar to a. citi/.en of the United States? 
 How are initials to be written? Why so? 
 
152 INSTRUCTION IN [.STEP XIV. 
 
 STEP XIV. 
 
 FURTHER DEVELOPMENTS OF HALVIN( J : 
 
 (305) The same may be said of halving as of 
 many an abbreviating principle : do not overdo it ' 
 Halve with judgment and with caution. In Exercise 
 270, examples of halving in the correct syllabic division 
 of words were shown, and that phase of it could not 
 fail to give satisfaction ; but disciples of syllabic short- 
 hand cannot wholly felicitate themselves when halving 
 is concerned. The principle is so erratic in its ap- 
 plication (when made conducive to fluent procedure), 
 that the practical writer is content to let it take its 
 wayward course. This Step will exhibit a few of its 
 vagaries. 
 
 (306) To secure variety of form where conflict 
 might be dangerous to legibility, some outlines aiv 
 shortened, while others which picture similar sounds 
 (but vary syllabically) are not ; as 
 
 operate part separate support errand earned 
 V a V < \ "V> "3 
 
 (307) The above might be credited absolutely to 
 the need for syllabic structure, were it not for the fact 
 that the number is great of mixi/lla/iii- forms which this 
 fickle principle of halving makes the best possible 
 
STKP XIV.] 
 
 1'KACTIC.U. SHORTHAND. 
 
 153 
 
 material when speed is considered. We refer to in- 
 stances like the following : 
 
 J^Lret-urn 
 V rftt-nil 
 
 \ 
 
 det-ail 
 
 pot-ato 
 
 (w)isd-om 
 
 det-ach 
 
 .prot-ect 
 
 .int-ent 
 
 .ant-icipate 
 
 bett-er 
 
 part-icipate 
 
 .silent 
 
 .verd-ict 
 
 .ind-icate 
 
 int-end 
 
 .warrant 
 
 .bott-om 
 
 .(h)isto-ry 
 
 (308) In some words where a long vowel pre- 
 cedes T or D, halving is waived, leaving the long form 
 to imply, as it were, the long vowel, and so distinguish 
 from similar words containing short vowels, which 
 may be halved. 
 
 paid put 
 
 late let 
 
 n r 
 
 lead lot 
 
 n c 
 
 date debt 
 
154 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP XIV. 
 
 Under this head come a few R and L-hook words 
 which have a long vowel between the stem and the R 
 or L denoted by the hook ; as 
 
 bleed build breed brought plead plot Made bled 
 
 v 
 
 
 This is not a universal rule, but is ofttimes a help 
 to legibility. 
 
 (309) Do not shorten when the finished outline 
 would not exhibit the fact. Write such forms iu full, 
 and carefully at that; as 
 
 looked affect navigate collect fatigue moneyed 
 
 V- 
 
 _{__ 
 
 __ 
 
 (310) After the fashion of zn, en or un preceding 
 R (see Sects. 216, 217), words beginning in<1<>, iiitli, 
 nndfi can, by halving, be given a convenient form. 
 
 independent indiscriminate undefined indefeasible indispensable 
 
 
 (311) Phrase or compound forms having the 
 words time or take for the last member, can be denoted 
 by halving as follows : 
 everyt ime ovcrt-ake in-the-ineant-ime at-(tlie)-saniet-iinc part-ake 
 
 <JV"~^ 
 
 at-all-times betake in- (a) -short-time some-time several-times 
 
8TKP XIV.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. !.");"> 
 
 (312) The precepts of Step VII. call for a down- 
 ward stroke of It in final syllables where It is preceded 
 }>y a vowel. This is often waived in advanced writing 
 for the sake of fluency, and upward It employed 
 instead. Below is a situation similar in point, includ- 
 ing also a phase of halving : 
 
 veered marred lard fortified fortunate 
 
 (313) L, M, N and It are understood to be shaded 
 when halved to add I) (see Sect. 22;")) ; but this is not 
 necessary when modified by the final hook; as 
 meant mind lent lend renowned arraigned 
 
 (314) Do not confuse the hook modifier with 
 brief-wuh, as in the words ?'v//', //v//'/, //v>/v/, etc., 
 which require no shading; though the outlines for 
 tn'c/il and i/icld may be thickened to distinguish from 
 'in'lf and leaned.* (See wield and yield in word-signs, 
 Part III.) 
 
 (315) It is hardly wise, in the endeavor for fluent 
 and legible writing, to shorten a stroke containing the 
 Kel-hook, Shun-hook or Ses, though it is rarely done. 
 (See consistent and suspend among Word-signs, P:irt 
 III.) 
 
 (310) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Definite authentic offend enlightened unre- 
 pentant in-reporting accident moment excellent 
 servant resilient document encounter cogent 
 incident amusement solvent subsequent oleg.-mt 
 surmount indenture remainder' rudiments blunder 
 
 * We prefer this rendering to associating them with 
 strokes W and Y, which might as well never be halved. 
 
15fi 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 [STKP XIV. 
 
 herald standard manifold consistent advocate 
 advent deliberate impediment fountain reluctant 
 phantom insult insulate insert relevant acquaint 
 ultimatum yesterday (St-Ruh-D) moistened 
 promptly maturity certify apparent preparatory 
 catalogue household fault blankets correspond 
 random clapboards stencilled bundles mouldings 
 handle rectify unavoidable inevitable holders 
 hardware ingredients adulterate saturate deterio- 
 rate implement duplicate innocent appetite 
 polite lantern fatal bait medium deduct 
 piquant horrified on-account-of iu-regard shade 
 kindle diseased figured muzzled editorial terri- 
 tory code whistled dedication antique planted 
 associate acquired gait traded discomfort bel- 
 lowed unreconciled contribute command boat 
 recumbent misconduct comment accommodate 
 coat recommend outstanding in-respect read 
 unwonted erect miscompute incontinent unre- 
 warded fate abdominal examined showed 
 
 (317) HALF-LENGTH WORD-SIGNS 
 GROUP VI. : 
 
 accord-ing 
 
 cared 
 
 accurate, cured 
 
 authority 
 
 third 
 
 throughout 
 
 gentlemen 
 gentleman 
 agent 
 
 astonish-ment 
 c.stabliah-ment 
 
 preliminary 
 
 .parallel 
 
 Parliament 
 
STKT XIV ] 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 157 
 
 Learning the word-signs in groups assists to a firm 
 recollection of them, both by the contrast and the 
 association. It is important for the student to devote 
 a portion of the time each day to the study of word- 
 signs. 
 
 (:'>18) MISCELLANEOUS HALF-LENGTH 
 WORD-SIGNS IX. : 
 
 quite 
 
 v seldom 
 
 -^ somewhat (summat) 
 
 -^ under, hand 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 Immediate 
 
 behind 
 
 _k_evident 
 
 J toward 
 
 private 
 
 virtue 
 
 C 
 
 
 little 
 
 world 
 
 r hold, held 
 
 ~3 fje^ond ''"ns^iuent 
 
 intellect 
 
 (x' certain 
 
 notwithstanding 
 
 intelligent 
 
 vj- 
 
 integrity 
 
 -V department 
 
 j^. word 
 
 ^ compreliend 
 
 <-^ 
 
 
 individual 
 
 ^ movenifint 
 
 _l_defendant 
 
 _i_ plaintiff 
 
158 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 [STKT xiv. 
 
 (319) HALF-LENGTH PHRASES: 
 
 .in-order 
 -it-would (-bad) 
 in-it 
 
 Js-it 
 
 _k_nave-not 
 
 . \vhich-wd-be 
 
 .if-it 
 
 coulcl-not-be 
 
 _rrl<lid-not-kiiow 
 
 .[-have-not 
 .we-are-not 
 
 of -it 
 
 it-would-be 
 *- as-it 
 
 o 
 
 if-not 
 
 / which-would (-had) 
 
 was-not 
 
 if-it-i.s-not 
 
 would-not-have 
 
 ^i 
 
 _v_y not-only 
 _J__it-will-not 
 
 were-uot 
 
 aiul-of-the 
 
 (3-20) READING EXERCISE: 
 
 \\ (V /^l 
 
 \. < ^~~$ I ( VD / o 
 I ^ j ^. 
 
 Si 
 
 /-f 
 
STKP XIV.] I'UACTICAI, SHORTHAND. 
 
 159 
 
 V 
 
 v r - Sry c 
 
 U 
 
 --M 
 
 >, 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 v L ^ -if 
 
 \ 
 
 
160 INSTRUCTION IN [STKI 1 XIV 
 
 \ 
 
 /I 
 
 (321) SPEED PRACTICE: 
 
 The theory and practice of phonographic writing aie 
 not of themselves very complicated ; but the element 
 of speed required somewhat involves the process. In 
 the operations of life, we do readily that which we 
 know perfectly and have done many times. The 
 speed of shorthand consists in performing with facility 
 what the mind has been educated to conceive and 
 the hand trained to execute. Discipline is highly im- 
 portant (and stern discipline at that) ; for it does not 
 signify that what can be written slowly can likewise 
 be written fast. Haste confuses the faculties : hence 
 it is necessary that the intellect be cultivated to a tinr 
 degree, and the lingers made extremely skillful before 
 rapid writing can ensue. 
 
 As some writer has said, speedy shorthand writing 
 is simply executing rapidly what we know 
 how to do : and that is no doubt the truth of it. 
 
STEP XIV.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 101 
 
 (322) COMMON WORDS: 
 
 As a preliminary to more varied speed practice, writing 
 and reading exercise should be had upon the following 
 simple words until all can be Avritteu without the least 
 hesitation and at a good rate of speed : 
 
 All am an and any are as at be but 
 by can did do for get go had has he 
 her him his how if in is it may me my 
 no nor not now of on or our out own 
 she so the to two us was we who why 
 will yes yet you 
 
 After been come done down during ever 
 from have here into made make many might 
 more most mine much never often only over 
 some same such that them then than this 
 thus they upon unto very were with what 
 whom when your 
 
 (323) About among already always because 
 before behind beyond could every either how- 
 ever neither never other ought shall should 
 since their there these those though where 
 which whose within whether under unless 
 until without would whence 
 
 Begin care far fill feel full God good 
 give great Heaven hope just know kind life 
 like little Lord love man near one people 
 part quite right see send tell thank thing 
 think told truth time use usual way went 
 wish word world work whole 
 
 (324) Previous to the introduction of halving fast 
 writing has been out of the question, except upon the 
 special matter designated ; but now that most of the 
 
162 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP \ I V . 
 
 abbreviating principles have been applied, more prac- 
 tice for speed will be appropriate, though even now 
 it would be better to confine . it to only the tasks 
 specified. 
 
 The student should receive dictations as a part of 
 the daily duty, a portion of which should be at a rate 
 a little faster than can be comfortably performed. 
 After each writing carefully examine the work, and 
 note where haste has clogged the memory, outstripped 
 the reasoning faculties, and so impaired the legibility ; 
 and repair the fault at next writing. 
 
 The same matter written many times will 
 produce better results than to frequently 
 change to new. 
 
 The requirements of rapid writing develop such 
 latent strength as the student may possess, and the 
 teacher can decide whether it is wise to continue the 
 practice. The reading of such notes discloses to the 
 writer every weakness, and the faithful in self-criticism 
 will derive much good from the lesson. 
 
 Our advice is to confine for the present all fast 
 dictation to the sentences and letters thus far presentl-d 
 in the Steps. They contain the fundamental elements 
 of language, as well as of shorthand, and will be 
 found adequate. 
 
 Speed practice which is fast travelling in the direc- 
 tion of error is of no particular value ; for faults of 
 execution cause illegibility, and illegible writing has 
 no practical utility, the time given to heedless scrib- 
 bling being time worse than wasted. Moderate, well- 
 considered writing produces good work ; and good 
 work persisted in leads naturally to a swift perform- 
 ance. The idea of repetition is an excellent one, and 
 is always prolific of better results than the aimless 
 haste and frequent changes to new matter which so 
 often characterize speed practice. 
 
STEI' XVI.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 103 
 
 (325) COMMONPLACE MATERIAL FOR 
 
 SPEED PRACTICE: 
 
 These sentences, being composed of the common words 
 (which are the scdles of typewriting), furnish the best 
 possible practice upon the writing machine. Transcribe 
 them from the shorthand notes for an exercise in type- 
 Avriting : 
 
 Where were the other two? "What will you have, 
 and what shall we do? Can that be so? Come over 
 when you can. They were beyond you. Before you 
 made this. About every one can come. Now, then, 
 here we are! How can they do it? Some of them 
 were mine. From whence do you come? What will 
 you do about it? Have you ever been there? He 
 would not be here without her. Would you make two 
 more for me? She has always been behind you. It 
 might have been well. Can you do this for me? 
 What can he do about it unless they all come? That 
 was made here while you were out. They were there, 
 yet we did not see them. 
 
 (326) It will do no good because always in the 
 way. It is not mine to give. You will never know 
 until the time comes. Think a little before you begin. 
 Do great good in such way as you can, for you have a 
 work none other can do. Tell me when you send it 
 to her. You begin, and the others will do the same. 
 Wli:it can we do for the Lord? They went out of the 
 usual way. Make good use of your time. We will 
 see what can be done about it. She will give you as 
 much as you ought to have. All the people came 
 from there. They tell what they can do, but never do 
 it. They did ilot think of it in time to do any good. 
 Why do you always send the goods that way? This 
 is the last time I shall have you do it. How much can 
 be done in the time that is given you? Why did you 
 not send it out to me? Life is what we make it. 
 
164 INSTRUCTION IN [STKT XIV. 
 
 (.">27) How do you feel about doing the work? 
 We will always thank (lod for the work they have 
 done. Were you there, aud did you see me? They 
 sent far and near for them. Life is full of hope, so 
 work with a will. God is near unto them that love 
 Him. She did not know whether to go or not. We 
 thank you very much for the good time we had. 
 Neither of them told the truth. They feel as if they 
 did not care to go. To whom did he give his word? 
 They think they know the whole truth about it. He 
 did the most of anyone. It was a good thing to begin 
 that way. Do the same as you did before. I shall 
 not send it unless it is good. Who told you that it 
 was so? It will soon be time to begin your work. 
 I have not seen you since that time. Ought they to 
 begin the thing that way? Send me wofd when you 
 can come. When you see this you will think of me. 
 There is much beyond this world. It shall always 
 be a part of this life. It is time to go now. Do unto 
 others as you would that they should do to you. 
 
 1 shall go up and see him some time when I am 
 well. We should always do as good work as we can. 
 Is there anything I can do for you? I have already 
 done what you wished me to do. Think you can do 
 it, and it is done. Of course we did not see him, for 
 he was not there. If he does not go, I do not know 
 what we will do. If I could get one more, it would 
 be enough. We cannot tell all the good we might do 
 here in this world. 
 
 (328) DICTATION LETTER: 
 
 Dear Sir : 
 
 There is but one thing for me to say of the "Perfect" 
 typewriter (TTliuhlluh). It more nearly fulfils my idea of 
 what a machine (23) that takes the place of the pen ought 
 
STKP XIV.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 1G5 
 
 to do than any that has ever been invented. It does not 
 stand between (45) the brain and the sheet of paper as a 
 dead instrument; you forget the machine in your work, and 
 there is no impediment (68) to the rapid expression of the 
 thought, or any restriction upon the action of the mind. 
 
 It has other and great merits (90) ; but I value it chiefly 
 because I can sit down to its keyboard and do my work 
 with the same forgetfulness in rapid (23) writing that one 
 has of the pen which he holds in the fingers. The machine 
 is forgotten while you write ; and yet (45) after confinement 
 at the " Perfect" for four or five hours in succession I have 
 arisen from my seat with far less fatigue in mind ((!8) and 
 body than comes from the continuous use of the pen for 
 that length of time. In this respect it meets with (180) 
 great success the needs of those who wish to use the type- 
 writer for original composition. 
 
 I have grown to like my machine so (23) much that I 
 never use a pen in writing, unless it is absolutely necessary ; 
 and I am more and more satisfied that (45) the typewriter 
 is the only instrument that can be used successfully by 
 those who are called upon to do much rapid and original 
 literary work (70). 
 
 Yours truly, 
 (250 words.) 
 
 The student should not consider it a hardship in 
 speed practice to devote very great patience to repeti- 
 tion. Select matter of literary merit, at least some- 
 thing that contains a variety of words, and practice 
 upon the same piece until it can be written without 
 hesitation. Remember, though, to write wM is of more 
 importance than to write swiftly ; and that thought 
 should always be a check upon a reckless tendency in 
 rapid writing. 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS STEP XIV.: 
 
 What may be said of halving in common with other 
 abbreviating principles? How should the shortening prin- 
 ciple be employed? Can syllabic writing always accompany 
 halving? How are similar words distinguished ofttimes? 
 Is variety of form a matter of random writing? What fea- 
 
166 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP XIV. 
 
 tnres must be attended to? (Analogy, Direction of Strokes, 
 etc.) Why analogy? Why direction of strokes? Why is 
 halving termed a fickle principle? Can the words redeem, 
 detail, potato, protect, intend, anticipate, etc., be written syl- 
 labically? Then why distort them for the sake of halving? 
 Is a brief form always preferable to an extended one? Then 
 why do many of the best writers use comparatively extended 
 and fluent outlines? Isn't it after all a matter of tempera- 
 ment or taste on the part of the writer? (Somewhat.) 
 
 How are some words in this Step distinguished from 
 others of like consonant elements? What other instance of 
 implying the vowel by manipulation of the consonant have 
 you observed in this manual? When is it good judgment 
 not to halve? How are compounds of time and take indi- 
 cated? What does this resemble? (The word-sign for time, 
 i.e., M used by some Graham writers.) 
 
 Why is upward-H used much more in advanced writing 
 than in the early stages? When downward-R is not fluent, 
 what is to be done? How would you write rarer, merrii-r, 
 terrier? 
 
 Why is not F-Tn a good outline for fortune? When are 
 L, M, N, R shaded to add D? When not? How are vi<-l,l 
 and yield written in this manual? Need strokes W and Y 
 ever be halved? What other widened character is next to 
 never halved? Is it wise to halve a stroke beginning with 
 Rel? How would the word brilliant look if the outline was 
 halved? What other like situations do not admit of halving? 
 How would seasoned, fashioned look if the outline was 
 halved ? 
 
 How are the group word-signs learned ? How many word- 
 signs have you entered in your little " knowledge-book" to 
 date? 
 
 Why is shorthand difficult to write rapidly? What does 
 swift writing really mean? How many operations are in- 
 volved in the act? How can great facility of writing be 
 attained? What is haste likely to occasion? How should 
 dictation now be given? What matter is suitable for dic- 
 tation at this stage? Is variety of material necessary;' 
 What does the demand for rapid work develop in the writer? 
 What does reading the notes disclose? What does the ina- 
 bility to read betray? What will self-criticism accomplish? 
 
 Can you write every common word and every common- 
 place sentence given in Step XIV. as swiftly as the fingers 
 can move the pen? 
 
STEP XV.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 167 
 
 STEP XV. 
 
 THE LENGTHENING PRINCIPLE: 
 
 (329) Writing a stroke twice its ordinary length 
 may bo considered to mean the addition of the syllable 
 ter, der or ther (or other, there, their in phrases). 
 
 mother father matter wonder whether order 
 
 (330) The lengthening principle applies more par- 
 ticularly to curves, though straight strokes may be so 
 treated to a limited extent ; as 
 
 rather reporter brother chapter typewriter conductor 
 
 \ 
 
 (331) An n or shun-hook can be read after the 
 power of the lengthening ; as 
 
 return moderation pattern modern eastern federation 
 
168 INSTKUCTIOX IX [STKI' XV. 
 
 (332) Lengthening* adds ker or ger to ing; or 
 er to emp or emb ; as 
 
 anchor longer anger temper lumber December 
 
 (333) It conduces to legibility to exaggerate the 
 stroke as above to a trifle more than double length ; 
 but employ the principle with discretion, like any 
 shorthand material. It seems almost ridiculous to 
 write like the first line below : 
 
 minister rostrum nostrils intrinsic federal 
 
 V 
 
 when the last are more in accord with analogy and 
 syllabication. A doubtful gain in speed does not com- 
 pensate for an involved mental operation. 
 
 * The theory of this is to maintain the widened form; but 
 the tendency among practical writers is to execute a light 
 line when such lengthening occurs in a compound form ; 
 as 
 
 chamber timber September cucumber scamper 
 
STKP XV.] 
 
 PRACTICAL SIIOHTHAND. 
 
 1G9 
 
 (334) SOME OUTLINES NOT LENGTHENED: 
 
 .harder (ardor) 
 
 Arthur 
 
 laundry 
 
 (335) The lengthening principle is also especially 
 useful for phrasing : 
 
 have-their 
 
 \v If-t.here 
 
 'VLL 
 
 
 ' when-there 
 (wlien-they-are) 
 
 jn-there 
 
 
 .^ 
 
 another one 
 ^ (no-other-one) 
 
 *^"^ , ..rather-than 
 
 
 
 * 
 in-other-words 
 
 C^"*^^ where-tliere-is 
 
 
 c 
 
 ~~\ further-thau 
 \ . (from-their-own) 
 
 <f~ *"**^. some-other-reason 
 
 
 (330) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Letter confederation render another center 
 operator when-there exporter entire (w.s. ; see list 
 of Part III.) further writer enter elevator ma- 
 terial (w s.) return-mail think- there Easter 
 
170 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 [STEP xv. 
 
 Chamber- (of) -Commerce oyster halter hinder 
 some-reason- (or)-other smother speculator your- 
 letter- received disorder literary shoulder water- 
 proof as- (a) -matter- (of) -fact stockholder Walter 
 bondholder receipt- (of )-your-letter conspirator 
 northern brother-in-law thither veteran enterprise 
 (Xt-Prs) spatter squander palter calendar 
 psaltery Alexander bother up- there Flanders 
 in-this-matter zither out-there handkerchief 
 among-others copy-holder letter- (of) -credit astern 
 
 (337) MULTIPLICATION TABLE: 
 
 Illustrating hundred-groups of the Smith method of 
 figure writing, and showing when to use the circle-S as a 
 convenient junction : 
 
 j 
 
 r 
 
 i 
 
 J 
 
 
 0? 
 
 f 
 
 e_ 
 
 H. 
 
 S 
 
 u 
 
 H. 
 
 s 
 
 \ 
 
 JL 
 
 
 0? 
 
 vl 
 
 V 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
STEP XV.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 171 
 
 PREFIXES AND AFFIXES: 
 
 (338) The parts of words, whether syllabic or 
 otherwise, furnish situations for the application of 
 shorthand principles. This maybe reiteration; but 
 it cannot be too strongly impressed upon the atten- 
 tion of the student. 
 
 Whenever these situations are frequently recurring, 
 the more needful it is that the special treatment should 
 be simple and well understood, in order to be quickly 
 applied. The Prefixes and Affixes are common to 
 many words, and are quite uniform as regards outline 
 structure. 
 
 (339) PREFIXES: 
 
 Many prefixes like ab, ad, de, dis, ex, sub, are repre- 
 sented by such simple syllabic shorthand material as 
 to call for but casual mention. 
 
 Exceedingly common prefixes are the compound 
 forms 1'oncom, decom, discom, discon, incog, incon, 
 incom, incum, irrecon, miscom, miscon, noncom, non- 
 con, rerot/, recon, recom, recum, uncon, uncom, unac- 
 com, unrecog, vnrecom, unrecon, selfcon, which are 
 denoted by disjoining the sign of the first syllable of 
 the prefix, as illustrated in Sect. 148.* The student 
 should be already familiar with this situation. 
 
 (340) Other special Prefix signs are for 
 Circum denoted by a small circle written in 
 vowel fashion near the first stroke of the remainder 
 of the outline. Self is indicated similarly and 
 sometimes joined. 
 
 * Comic, conic (See Sect. 153), commissary, concomitant, 
 comiti/, commission, comrade, condone, commerce, commode, 
 connote, en n n!re. and consols, are a few words which arc 
 better written without reference to this rule. 
 
172 INSTRUCTION IN [STEP XV. 
 
 For and Fore generally by stroke-F joined, 
 though convenience rarely demands the employment 
 of F-uR or Fr. 
 
 circumference self-defense forsake foremost forgive 
 
 Inter, intro by Nt joined (unless absolutely im- 
 practicable) to the remainder of the form. 
 
 Magna-i by M written above the rest of the 
 outline. 
 
 interpose intermix introduce intercept magnanimous magnify 
 
 Contra, contro, counter by a disjoined tick 
 (or by halving, to save pen-lifting) ; as 
 
 contradict controvert counterfeit 
 
 (con-trad-ict) (con-tro-vert) (count'feit) 
 
 Per and pre. It is deemed advisable to make a 
 distinction of form between these very common pre- 
 fixes, employing P-Ruh for per (except in JHT/HI/)*, 
 |wrc/mse, and where P precedes M), and Pr for pre ; 
 as in 
 
 present per cent pretend pertained previous pervious 
 
 V V*- ^ v^j V 
 
STK1' XV.] 
 
 TRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 173 
 
 (341) Other less common prefixes which ordinary 
 procedure will not cover, are 
 
 Arch by K 
 
 Astro " St-Huh 
 
 Multi " M-Luht 
 
 Post " 1's 
 
 Retro ' ' Ht-liuh 
 
 Stereo " sTr 
 
 Subter " sHcl-Itnh 
 
 Super " sPr 
 
 Trans ' ' Trns or Trs 
 
 With " DT1I 
 
 in archangel, architrave, etc. 
 
 " astronomy 
 
 " multiply, multiform 
 
 " postpone, postal (?) 
 
 " retrograde, retrospect 
 
 " stereotype, stereoscope 
 
 " subterfuge., subterranean 
 
 " superficial, super excellent 
 
 " transact, transfigure 
 
 " withdraw, withhold 
 
 The nomenclature employed above is simply that of 
 denoting the stroke by a capital letter, and its 
 modification by lower-case, nil is made R, and 
 nL would be L. 
 
 (342) AFFIXES : 
 
 The affixes demanding special treatment are rather 
 more numerous than the prefixes. Ant, ent, ate, cle, 
 /f.s.s and mi.rd are easily written. The advantage of 
 an upward and downward form for R and L assists in 
 making legible art/, er, or, a/, el and Zy. /Shun, tii-c 
 and ed have been discussed in Step XII. ; good syl- 
 labic rendering disposes of acy and OH.S; w3c'i'i iiuj 
 a id f iii/a were explained in Step VII. 
 
174 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP XV. 
 
 (343) Other affixes requiring arbitrary manage- 
 ment are 
 
 Bleness, fulness, lessness, someness by 
 a circle * (slightly larger than for ings) disjoined. 
 
 Ality, arity, bility, cality, idity, ology, perity, 
 etc. by disjoining (generally) the stroke for the 
 first sound of the termination to be indicated ; as 
 
 teachableness carelessness wholesomeness formality amiability 
 
 ) ^ 
 
 / , O 
 
 ^ 
 
 -A 
 
 zoology rascality validity prosperity verbosity 
 
 Mental-ity by Mnt disjoined. 
 Self, selves by S generally joined. 
 Ship by SH joined or disjoined according to 
 convenience. 
 
 instrumental-ity thyself themselves friendship apprenticeship 
 
 <> 
 
 7 
 
 Head, hood by D joined. 
 
 Worthy by DTH joined or disjoined. 
 
 manhood womanhood girlhood Godh'd fountain-h'd praiseworthy 
 
 * )soodby employs a disjoined Bis, Fs or Ls (3d position) , 
 for bleness, fulness or lessness. 
 
STKP XV.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 475 
 
 ('HI) Ture (allix are) by Tr joined ; as 
 torture culture literature lecture pasture 
 
 
 -f/v is not regularly included in the common lists 
 of postfixes ; but in the mechanics of syllabic writing 
 it deserves a place with the stereotyped forms. 
 
 (345) JUDGMENT IN OUTLINE BUILDING: 
 
 An entertaining class-room exercise is found in 
 giving a consensus of opinion upon the outlines of 
 words which may be submitted. Often five or six 
 forms can be suggested for a single word, though but 
 one of the number is superior to the rest, either in 
 fluency, angles, analogy, syllabication, or a happy 
 combination of all these necessary features. The 
 reasoner Avho knows the best when it is exhibited is 
 the student who is on the high road to success in 
 writing good shorthand. If any doubt exists, it is the 
 part of the teacher to explain why a certain rendering 
 is to be preferred, and how it must be a matter of 
 knowledge and judgment in the management of ma- 
 terial. The argument might be advanced that the 
 elasticity of shorthand grants a wide freedom of option 
 in respect to outline formation. Not wholly so; it 
 is choice regulated by fixed requirements. A careful 
 reading of some of the contents of Part III. will 
 convince of this. 
 
 Closely related to the idea of exercising discretion 
 in the building of shorthand is the liberty given of 
 writing alternate shapes for some of the aflixes. Good 
 judgment on the part of the writer in this connection 
 leads to the quick achievement of the best results. 
 
I'll INSTRUCTION IN -il.f XV. 
 
 (346) Note the alternate forms presented for (lie 
 following cases, the selection to be obedient to the 
 demand of convenience of joining : 
 
 Vie, 
 Kiit, 
 
 Kst, 
 
 Fall 
 
 bly, by 151 or 15 as . 
 
 " Nt or nt " 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 V 
 
 \ 
 
 s 
 
 
 ist * " St or stuh" 
 
 {_ 
 
 e* 
 
 
 fore " F or F-R " 
 
 ^\ 
 
 
 
 .fully" F, Florf " 
 
 e 3 
 
 y 
 
 \ 
 
 Ment, " Miit or Nt " 
 
 t 
 
 Tt 
 
 i >IX/ I'll III 1' lit. 
 
 Ness 
 
 , :in << .1 !><< Ns or ns" 
 
 c * 
 
 - } 
 
 nchii i-i im nt 
 i',/n fii!iu us, iritiu-.-i.* 
 
 (347) READING EXERCISE : 
 
 * St for est, ist may be written upward if convenience ' 
 requires, as in the words fusionist, closest, opinionistt 
 
8IT.1' XV.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 (348) COMPOUND FORMS: 
 
 177 
 
 .upward 
 
 .backward 
 
 .outward (orT-Rd) 
 
 .downward (or Dn-Rd) 
 
 .understand 
 
 .underwent 
 
 .undersigned 
 
 (349) ELSE-PHRASES AND OTHERS: 
 
 -somethiug-else 
 -someone. else 
 -anything-else 
 .anywhere-else 
 
 -2 or-else 
 
 _ what-else (S 
 
 it-is-not-necessary 
 
 on-the-contrary 
 
 for-instance 
 
 by-soine-uieans 
 for-example 
 
 ! (Sec 360). 
 
 -{-- I lt.ni.--?is.fliiniMli 
 
 some-how 
 
 f or-(the)-sake-of 
 
178 INSTRUCTION IN [STIC!' XV. 
 
 (350) WRITING EXERCISE : 
 
 Christianity pomposity despondency physiology 
 fundamental theology popularity instability faith- 
 lessness incognito selfish questionableness self- 
 hood mindfulness uncontrolled interchange 
 magnesia misconduct magnificent wheresoever 
 inability friability preferment foretaste self-will 
 interrupt unselfish endowment self-love ductility 
 nomenclature picture forewarn forfeit self- 
 reliance forget Legislature forsooth decomposition 
 recumbent forswear introspection international 
 incumbent interjacent intermediate counteract 
 accompaniment interval countermand archbishop 
 intervene post-ollice stereotyped multitude inter- 
 vale asteroid counterpoint postman subtrahend 
 supersede withstand transform superhuman 
 withal supernatural mature unreasonableness 
 
 (;5f>l) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 It matters not whether you or Walter wish to-go to- 
 the theater with- me, for I shall take neither of you. 
 The-telegraph operator was-a fellow-conspirator with- 
 those- concerned in-the strike. It-is-no-wouder that-a 
 slender thread of criticism renders modern society 
 tender on-the subject-of slander. It-is-most in- 
 competent and-incomprehensible testimony, and- we 
 object to- the evidence. The-evil was neither supra- 
 mundane or subterranean, but right iu-our midst. 
 Contradiction has-a different meaning from coittni'lix- 
 ti aft ion. The-interview was of-little interest to me 
 because-the interrogations of-the interviewer were-not 
 intelligible. "Onward and-upward " shall-be-our 
 watchword ever. Though it- was calm to-the leeward, 
 yet, with a squall occasionally to-the windward, the- 
 
STK1' XV.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 179 
 
 " sqiuire-riggor " proceeded swiftly cm-its eastward 
 passage, outward bound. The-cowardly troops of- 
 the queen went backward and-forward, inward and- 
 outward, in awkward evolutions. Boyhood a-id- 
 inauhood, girlliood-and womanhood, are successive 
 periods of human life. The-snail withdraws within 
 its shell, withholding its head and horns, the-better to 
 withstand the-enemy. General literature, with-an oc- 
 casional lecture on Culture, improved this interesting 
 creature wonderfully. " Mr. President, I shall enter 
 on no encomium upon Massachusetts. She needs none. 
 There she is. Behold her and judge for yourself. 
 There-is her history. The- world knows it by heart." 
 We-may apprehend God and-His works, while we- 
 may-not comprehend Him. The-comrades connived 
 to-have the-commission of-the commissary cancelled. 
 Conic sections exhibit either perfect circles, comical 
 ellipses, oblate curves, or frustums, according to the 
 way the figure is intersected by the instrument of 
 cleavage. 
 
 * I wonder how such a tender and slender stalk can 
 support so large a flower as the crysanthemum. The 
 number of wonderful modern inventions of high order 
 is rather bewildering. Neither his mother nor father 
 would say one word in favor of moderate drinking. 
 
 The-prosecuting attorney recommended the-release 
 of-the prisoner on-his-own recognizance. His self- 
 conceit was self-evident, and-enabled him to retain 
 complete self-possession under-the-most trying cir- 
 cumstances. His thoughtlessness, carelessness and- 
 listlessness will hinder his success iu-any branch of 
 industry. The-phrenologist, mineralogist, chronolo- 
 gist, physiologist, philologist aud-theologian were 
 diiscussing-the genealogy of-the etymologist in-the 
 zoological garden. 
 
 * See foot uote, page 54. 
 
180 INSTRUCTION IN [STKP XV. 
 
 (352) MODEL LETTER FOR COPYING AM) 
 DICTATION : 
 
 This letter is written in an offhand style of short- 
 hand, and is a model only as to form not of ^vo- 
 metric outlines. It is a fair sample of a page of 
 notes written very much as they should be in the 
 actual business of amanuensis work : 
 
STKI' XV.] 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 181 
 
 (353) Or it may be that the stenographer is ac- 
 customed to "take" letters involving accounts, and 
 can arrange the dictation in debit and credit fashion 
 as he writes. If so, the following would illustrate the 
 form of letter. At all events it should be typewritten 
 in this latter form, and must sooner or later take that 
 shape in his mind : 
 
 V 
 
 V^J 
 
 k ~~\ I 
 
 "/i li/i 
 
 yu 
 
 / or 
 
 >v 
 
182 INSTRUCTION IX [STKP XV. 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS STEP XV.: 
 
 What does lengthening a stroke denote? To what kind 
 of strokes does lengthening more particularly apply? What 
 does the double-length stand for besides -ter, -der or -ther? 
 To what extent are straight strokes lengthened? How 
 would lantern be written? What does lengthening add to 
 iNG? To Mb or Mp? What is the outline for the word 
 numerator? When may shading be dispensed with in con- 
 nection with these strokes? Should the lengthening prin- 
 ciple always be employed? Name a few words it need not 
 apply to. Why not employed for these words? What else 
 is lengthening desirable for? 
 
 What does the circle-S stand for in the multiplication 
 table? Is it always used in hundred-groups? When may 
 it be omitted? When is it indispensable? 
 
 What is a prefix? Are they numerous? Therefore how 
 should they be denoted? Do the common ones call for par- 
 ticular comment? Why not? Does th'e management of <- 
 com, uncon, recom, etc., present any difficulties? Name one 
 or two words containing con or com that are written other- 
 wise than with the dot. What few prefixes have special 
 treatment? What two ways of writing contra, contro or 
 counter are suggested? What advantage (if any) has the 
 second way? Is it important to make a distinction between 
 per- and pre-9 How would permanent and pre-eminait. be 
 written? What is the outline for multiplication, vitlml, 
 post-office? 
 
 What is an affix? Does syllabic treatment dispose of a 
 great many of them? Is it ever advisable to Avrite the 
 termination shun other than the usual way? Have you a 
 firm conviction as to writing -ed? How would you write 
 locomotive, charmingly, asperity, posterity, frigidity, >/- 
 ciability? In selecting one from many possible outlines of 
 a word, what should govern the decision? How should :i 
 dictation of figure matter appear on the note-book? 
 
STEP XVI.] I'UACTIC.YL SIIOKTHAN'l). 183 
 
 STEP XVI. 
 
 FURTHER EXPEDIENTS : 
 
 (3")4) In addition to the advantages of short 
 phrases for the representation by hooks of the words 
 <tll, in'/l, own, than, ercr, lnir<>, etc., previously illus- 
 trated, and besides the tricks of sign and outline 
 manipulation that have heretofore been presented in 
 their proper relations (as we contend), there are 
 other expedients resorted to by the expert writer to 
 still further elaborate the art. It may be readily in- 
 ferred that ingenuity can be exerted in this direction ; 
 but unlimited freedom of fancy would be dangerous, 
 and a selection is therefore made of those which in 
 our judgment belong to a work on practical shorthand. 
 
 (355) I PHRASED. 
 
 I is phrased initially to other forms by joining a 
 P, ('II or T-tick, according to convenience, the phrase 
 beginning in the lirst position. 
 
 T-ain 1 know I-believe I-can-be I bave I-bave-been 
 
 ^-^ ^ \> L_= o u 
 
 The writer confesses to never having had much use 
 for the I-phrases ; and the reason ascribed is this : 
 The words lie and flic, occur ten. thnex* as often as /, 
 and the oblique ticks become more naturally identified 
 with them than with /. And appears in writing over 
 Jii'i' time* * as often as 7, and therefore the T-tick stands 
 
 * See jiol.e, (mire Is. 
 
184 INSTRUCTION IX [STKP XVI. 
 
 for and with unquestionable propriety. At the same 
 time the enthusiastic phrasier may with judgment cm- 
 ploy the ticks in phrases for 7; as also may the 
 stenographer who reads easily his swiftest notes. 
 
 (356) In situations where lengthening is not feasi- 
 ble, there can be denoted by wjiat is termed the thr- 
 tick. This tick disjoined serves for the termination 
 -ingly. 
 
 siuce-there down-there can-there out-of-their longingly 
 
 (357) Of-the is often denoted by proximity, as 
 
 time-of-the-day day-of-the-week man-of-the-world 
 
 |3 
 
 (358) Notwithstanding the above, and the fact 
 that proximity also denotes con, com or cog within 
 a word, the stenographer is in rare instances com- 
 pelled to dissect an outline to insure legibility. Such 
 breaking up of the form is commonly at the junction 
 of a prefix or aftix, or between the parts of compound 
 forms, and is resorted to because any other procedure 
 would be faulty. Note the words mono: 
 '/K'linuin, wardrobe, supernatural, t'Hjht-kiu't'd, 
 natural, completeness. 
 
 (359) To is quite often denoted by fourth posi- 
 tion, as illustrated in Sect. 247-3, and from 
 
 to by close proximity, or by joining ; as 
 
 to-go from-time- from-day- from-generation- 
 
 to-time to-day to-generation 
 
SIT.I' \VI.J PRACTICAL SHOKTHAM). 185 
 
 (3(50) BRIEF 1 WUH AND YUH : 
 
 The signs for n-e, n-cre, I/OK and your may be in- 
 verted for convenience in simple phrasing ; as 
 
 you-havi' we-can yon-had we-remain sinccrely-your 
 
 '1 
 
 (361) The same signs may be enlarged to add one 
 of the companion words, though great care should be 
 exercised in the use of this material. 
 
 we-were we-w'd you-were you-w'd what-were what-w'd were-we 
 
 c n 3 
 
 (362) Dw, gw, kw (qu) and tw. This system 
 has no special appendage or character for these initial 
 digraphs; and experienced writers ignore the Wuh 
 sound for the most part, writing tin-ell D L, quick K-K, 
 Ix'hri'cn Tn 1 (word-sign). At the same time such 
 neglect does in rare cases jeopardize the legibility; and 
 it is recommended to employ the brief wuh in conso- 
 nant fashion, or by striking it across a stroke, like the 
 way yuh is indicated in the words erroneous and lan-ycr 
 in Sect. 145. 
 
 quiescent Gwendolen equator queen quaff 
 
 (363) Brief wuh and yuh, considered as consonant 
 sounds, can be employed with some freedom in outline 
 formation to assist legibility (see also Sect. 57, Step 
 III.) Words like idiom, cornea, euphony, opium, 
 etc., are made more readable by the actual indication 
 of the wuh or yuh sign,, 
 
1*1! INSTRUCTION IN [STK.I' XVI. 
 
 (364) OMISSIONS OF SIGNS FROM 
 OUTLINES : 
 
 In order to compass the most fluent rendering, a 
 better angle or direction of stroke is sometimes gained 
 by omitting a part of the outline. Note the following 
 omissions : 
 
 K in the words attraction , 
 book-keeper, aitsiottx 
 
 T in custom, postaar, postal 
 
 N in stranger, transfer, at- 
 tainment 
 
 M in commencement, adorn- 
 ment, consignment 
 
 S in controversy 
 bankruptcy 
 
 P in Sampson, consumption, ^_^ s~-\ / 
 jumped < V X -^ =-"J 
 
 The word-sign lists exhibit other examples, some of 
 which are abbreviated for the reasons above given, and 
 others varied in form to prevent conflicts. 
 
 Facility in this kind of abbreviation is gained by ex- 
 perience. There seems to be no general rule for a sure 
 guidance. Fluency is the great aim ; and that is at- 
 tained by dropping this or that stroke of the outline. 
 Then the next need is for legibility, which is secured 
 if the condensed form makes no conflict with any 
 other. 
 
 (365) OMISSIONS OF WORDS FROM 
 PHRASES: 
 
 Unimportant words in phrases may be omitted, if 
 the remaining outline is as suggestive as it is fluent. 
 
 , I'.fiijfucij, CX f \ 
 
 \> 
 
STEP XVI.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 187 
 
 With the exception of a few instances, like those 
 of Sect. 364, unphrased outlines are commonly ren- 
 dered in full. Cases like more'n for more-than, our'n 
 for our-oK'n, are phrased in another way (see Sect. 
 244). 
 
 And from again-and-again, more- ^^^ 
 
 ami-more * -s <^v^ 
 
 A from for-a-moment, in-such-a- ( ^-J> 
 
 Vx^~v-i L D 
 
 The from for-the-sake-of, under- ( 
 
 the-circumstances ? ^f- 
 
 To from it-seems-to-me, will-have- 
 to-l>e 
 
 Of from as-a-matter-of-fact,JIon>w- 
 of- Representatives 
 
 In from for-instance 
 
 (366) POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE WORDS : 
 
 In a manual like this, given up so much to syllabic 
 rendering of words, special instructions for the forma- 
 tion of the negative, as distinguished from the positive, 
 hardly seems necessary, because the regular procedure 
 of the book will serve. 
 
 If the negative prefix be in or un, stroke-N (or the 
 back-hook in situations demanding it) furnishes a suf- 
 ficiently legible rendering of words like unbalanced, 
 iiiiliijnihi, unchanged, insolvent, etc. ; while for nega- 
 tives beginning with dis, im or mis, no particular 
 comment is required. 
 
 For the prefixes ille and irre the precepts of Step 
 VII. have special force, and two suggestions may be 
 now made : For beginners we would recommend the 
 writing of both directions of the strokes L or R, ac- 
 
188 INSTRUCTION IN [STI'-P XVI. 
 
 cording to Sects. 138 and 130; but the advanced writer 
 may use the up-stroke for the initial syllable of the 
 positive, and the down-stroke for the negative ; as 
 
 regular irregular legal illegal responsible irresponsible 
 
 (367) WRITING EXERCISE: 
 
 Application post-office passenger danger ap- 
 portionment postmark testify postman testimony 
 partake irreligious overtake illiberal somebody 
 (sMb-D) steamboat immoral junction postpone 
 Thompson restless mistrustful domestic boastful 
 priestly devolve mostly impure (Mp-Ruh) I-am- 
 pleased inherit I-am-glad inherent cynicism I- 
 assure-you Sawyer campaign I- fear-yon- will-be 
 I-cannot-say incandescent canvas I-dare-say im- 
 material immortal irrelevant stringency therewith 
 assizes contingency attempt impede from-time- 
 to-time did n't you Uriah from-year-to-year in- 
 the-first-place oue-of-the-most illegitimate at-the- 
 same-time first-class Almighty clumsy Norwood 
 all-sufficient stubborn paraphernalia exemption 
 hardware stupendous disenchantment 
 
 (368) SENTENCES FOR ILLUSTRATION: 
 
 Great care will have to be taken in writing these sentences, 
 in order to have the principles and expedients fully expressed. 
 Hyphens are omitted, and the student expected to write the 
 most condensed style without a suggestion. 
 
 When compassed round about by many combatants. 
 In-regard to-going over-there, would-say that-it-seems- 
 to-be wholly out-of-their minds to-do- so. It is 
 necessary to reply in writing, and that as soon :is 
 possible. He stepped past the stake and stood stock 
 
BTK1' XVI.] ru.VCTICAL SHORTHAND. 189 
 
 still. The steamboat stopped at the embankment, 
 and the embezzler embarked. We went down there 
 to see him in reference to the matter. In response 
 to your inquiry, can say that the contrivance contains 
 a combustible compound. The odium of being an 
 opium eater was disagreeable enough ; but continued 
 indulgence in it reduced him to absolute indigence. 
 He was not, as far as known, cognizant of the fact. 
 A vast concourse, in respect to the fame of the 
 Commodore, came down to the wharf to bid him 
 good-bye. It is best never to shun the shuu-hook, 
 except in slione and ocean. In repeating the story of 
 the adventure, his confession of complicity was so 
 interesting to all concerned in the inquiry, that they 
 compelled him to put it in writing ; with which request 
 he immediately complied. Day unto day uttereth 
 speech, and night unto night showeth knowledge. 
 Headache, back-ache, and ear-ache, are all unpleasant 
 bodily sensations. What would you reply if you 
 were questioned? He had not run far distant when 
 he began to distend his cheeks in saucy fashion. I 
 believe fully in a hereafter and in a heretofore, for 
 that matter ! Seize the moment of excited curiosity 
 for the acquisition of knowledge. He was suspended 
 from the order for not paying his dues promptly. 
 Mr. Curtis was courteous at all times. That ap- 
 p:iivnt anomaly among words, ourself, is allied to the 
 editorial ice. The word Jig tire has far different mean- 
 ings in mathematics, geometry, rhetoric, logic, sculp- 
 ture and theology. "Genius detects through many 
 species the genus, through all genera the steadfast 
 type, through all the kingdoms of organized life the 
 eternal unity." " Widdy, widdy, wen, wake cock 
 warning." The counsel of the consul, to console him, 
 concealed his real sentiments. He was bigoted and 
 
190 INSTRUCTION IX [STKP XVI. 
 
 arbitrary; in other words, quite galvanized with Cal- 
 vinism. The fervent embrace of cousin Charlie ;it 
 the station unmistakably embarrassed her. Although 
 he really owed the man, he was not visibly awed by 
 the stern manner of the creditor he was owing. 
 
 SHORTHAND PP:NMANSHIP : 
 
 (369) In Step I. it was declared that there was 
 a penmanship to shorthand as well as to ordinary 
 handwriting ; and at this stage it may be proper to 
 discuss the matter more thoroughly, although not to 
 the length which it deserves, or to the extent one 
 better qualified might venture. 
 
 Position of Body. The student should sit in an 
 easy attitude, with the weight of the body thrown 
 slightly upon the left arm, so as to grant perfect 
 freedom of the right. It goes without saving that 
 the writer should not bend forward extremely, and 
 that the note-book should have a convenient position 
 upon the table. 
 
 Holding the Pen. In longhand writing all the 
 letters slope in one direction ; and the writer having 
 decided upon a correct grasp of the pen between the 
 fingers, the instrument may remain fixed, and all the 
 letters will be made with facility. For such writing 
 a soft grasp of the pen is required, and the. opposite 
 end of the pen-stock should point toward the right 
 shoulder. 
 
 In shorthand writing the lines composing the 
 characters extend in many directions ; although it 
 may be said of correct stenographic outlines, that 
 they are described so as to come within the scope of 
 
STKI' XVI.] I'KACTU'AL SHOHTIIAND. 191 
 
 tin- most lluent movements the pen is capable of per- 
 forming in such writing. For shorthand the pen 
 should be held with the same natural and easy grasp 
 as for longhand ; but the pen-handle should point 
 out waul from the shoulder, because the prevailing 
 action of the hand is to draw the writing instrument 
 rather than push it. It may be added with perfect 
 frankness that the opposite end of the pen-holder 
 points in many directions during the progress of 
 writing, considerable freedom being allowed in this 
 respect. Besides which, there is an action of the 
 thumb in clever shorthand writing quite foreign to 
 ordinary penmanship. This may be described as a 
 rolling of the pen-holder, and is required for the 
 tracing of the shaded horizontal signs (iuh and iNG, 
 which demand considerable manipulation of this sort, 
 while some other strokes call for less thumb action of 
 a similar nature. 
 
 Movement. Leaving the consideration of the 
 above, some of which may be new to the ordinary 
 writer, and should therefore be carefully noted, we 
 come to "movement" in writing. At the outset, it 
 may be remarked that movement in shorthand writing, 
 speaking generally, does not differ materially from 
 that in longhand writing. The "compound move- 
 ment," so called, which is the union of 'finger and 
 mnst;ular action, is demanded in both situations. 
 
 Finger movement is the guiding of the pen 
 solely by the fingers holding it, and is needed more 
 or less for the execution of the smaller and more 
 intricate parts of the outline. 
 
 Muscular movement is the action of the arm 
 .xh'iided and withdrawn, while using the muscle near 
 the elbow as a rolling rest. This movement is de- 
 sirable for the bolder strokes of any fluent writing; 
 
192 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 -^i 
 
 and a very ordinary penman ought, after a very little 
 practice, to be able to utilize it for the less involved 
 shorthand forms. The expert writer will go further, 
 and attain to the facile execution of the tiniest charac- 
 ters and the most critical junctions, by this same 
 procedure. 
 
 Practice for good movement in the management 
 of the pen should have a place alongside the other 
 work of this manual ; and for the assistance of those 
 who would labor in this direction some exercises in 
 muscular movement are appended below. Finger 
 movement need not be illustrated very much, beca use- 
 that comes easily of itself and is not desirable except 
 so far as it may be a necessity; but a well disciplined 
 muscular movement should be the endeavor of every 
 shorthand writer who aims at excellence in all the 
 details of the study. 
 
 The characters of the scheme of consonant signs on 
 page 17 will afford simple practice at first, and should 
 be mastered before proceeding further. 
 
 More valuable and entertaining practice will be 
 found in the following exercise, consisting of joined 
 words and phrases, which have been graded as to 
 diiliculty'by a professional penman. Fill many lines 
 of foolscap paper with each example, all the time 
 maintaining correct position for body, arm, hand and 
 fingers : 
 
 PRACTICE EXERCISE: 
 
.-TK1- XVI.] 
 
 PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 103 
 
 Other shorthand material as good as this, or better, 
 could be suggested. It is not so much what is writ- 
 ten as the way it is done ; and the forms are likely 
 to show by their grace, or by their lack of the ap- 
 pcarance of fluency, whether they were executed by a 
 facile muscular movement or the contrary. It cer- 
 tainly conduces to graceful outlines to have a good 
 movement in writing ; and the difficulties of speed are 
 
194 IXSTKUCTIOX IN [STEP xvi. 
 
 more readily overcome if a good pen movement 
 accompanies other attainments in the writing of 
 shorthand. 
 
 (370) LETTER FOR DICTATION: 
 
 Messrs. STERLING & ELLIOTT, 
 
 .Hampton Suburbs, West Virginia. 
 Gentlemen : 
 
 We take pleasure in mailing you today specimen books 
 of Barnes' National System of Penmanship. These books 
 contain all the copies of the entire system (25'). A Imsty 
 glance will convince you of their superior gradation, utility 
 and beauty. They have never been equalled in mechanical 
 execution. Your attention is respectfully (50) called to 
 the third page of cover, which contains a classification and 
 analysis of all the letters ; to the fourth page of cover, 
 which shows (75) special features of the series ; and to the 
 small sheet of practice paper. 
 
 We will furnish these large books for introduction at 
 eighty-seven cents (100) per dozen, and the small books for 
 forty-seven cents per dozen. We also prepay all mail or 
 express charges; and if you have any books (25) of similar 
 character on hand now in good condition, we will give you 
 an equal number of our new series for them. 
 
 Remember that the (50) whole series is printed from 
 stone by hand, and is far more elegant and beautiful than 
 the cheap copy books that are printed from type (75) on a 
 steam press. The latter will never be used by competent 
 teachers of penmanship. 
 
 These books have been adopted in many cities and towns 
 (200), and are heartily endorsed by more than two hundred 
 of the finest professional penmen in the country. Wo 
 believe that you can make no mistake (25) in adopting them 
 for use in your classes, and trust that we may have your 
 order. 
 
 Hoping to hear from you, we are 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 (250 words.) 
 
 (371) CONCLUSION OF PART II. : 
 
 One of the most disappointing results of the study 
 of shorthand when the principles have been presented 
 
STKP XVI.] PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 195 
 
 closely following one another, with only words for 
 illustration has been that the inquirer knew next to 
 nothing of the practical bearing of the subject after 
 such a hurried passage through the rules. Doubtless the 
 clever ideas of phonography would be entirely appre- 
 ciated as he passed along ; but the learning process 
 was simply heaping one thing upon another, until the 
 store of information was a mass without detail or 
 color ; and when the time came for a general applica- 
 tion, nothing could be handily accomplished : because, 
 although some observation and considerable industry 
 had been exerted, the impressions received were more 
 or less vague at least not quickly distinguishable 
 one from another. 
 
 This has always been a disheartening outcome for 
 both pupil and teacher ; and under such conditions the 
 passage from the handbook to miscellaneous writing 
 was a weighty period and marked the point where 
 many fell in the struggle for a mastery of shorthand. 
 
 We have long believed that if the theory of phonog- 
 raphy be sufficiently relieved and strengthened by 
 practice all along the line, the throwing away of the 
 crutches, as it were, will not leave the learner still 
 crippled. 
 
 We allude to this stage because it has always been 
 a critical one ; not because we apprehend much of 
 such difficulty in the use of this manual. It does not 
 follow the traditions closely enough to inherit the 
 faults of out-of-date methods. The lesson we would 
 now impress is that the underlying principles of the 
 study must be thoroughly understood, before leaving 
 that part ; and lest anyone pursuing these Steps should 
 be deficient at this time, we recommend a careful re- 
 view of Parts I. and II. before proceeding to Part III. 
 and to the work which necessarily accompanies ad- 
 vanced inquiry. 
 
PART III. Advanced Inquiry. 
 
 WORD-SIGN LISTS, SCHEDULE FOR 
 TYPEWRITING, ETC. 
 
198 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 WORD-SIGNS AND WORD-SIGN STUDY: 
 
 (372) Word-signs what for? 
 
 First: To provide brief and fluent forms for the 
 words of exceedingly frequent recurrence ; and 
 
 Second : For those words the regular outline of 
 which would be long and awkward. 
 
 The demands of speedy writing make the word-sign 
 absolutely indispensable ; and rapid writing is becoming 
 more and more the need of the times. At the same 
 time it having become more the custom to dispense 
 with the vowel-sign (and scud along under bare poles, 
 so to speak) , the more necessary it is that the word- 
 sign should be as suggestive, as that the regular forms 
 should be syllabic. 
 
 (373) The word-signs thus far given have been to 
 make easy disposition of the common words, and at 
 the same time to illustrate entertainingly the principles 
 as presented ; though in doing this occasionally one 
 of the less frequent examples of word-sign treatment 
 has been permitted to intrude. 
 
 (374) Learners have a varying capacity for the 
 management of word-signs ; and by that is meant not 
 only the ability to store them in the memory, but also 
 to draw them forth at will. About 750 word-signs 
 are set forth in this manual : 500 might be all that one 
 writer could profitably use ; 300 another ; and it is 
 possible to get on very nicely with less than that num- 
 ber. Nevertheless we would counsel a mastery of the 
 whole list, if possible, and do it so well that they may 
 all be made the ready tools of swift writing as 
 much so as the implement held between the fingers, 
 or the phonetic characters which are the alphabet of 
 shorthand. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 199 
 
 (375) . The word-signs exhibited by the books are 
 really the "combined experience" of expert writers, 
 extending over a long period of time, representing 
 careful investigation, and as such are almost impreg- 
 nable to criticism. Opinions may differ as to the 
 number that should be used, and as to the extent of 
 abbreviation ; but the longer we study these ingenious 
 forms, the more willing we are to concede that they 
 are the outcome of actual experience, and, if intelli- 
 gently employed, that they will contribute to the great- 
 est good of the greatest number. 
 
 (376) Personally we confess to a dislike for a few 
 of these signs, on the ground that it is possible to 
 construct forms that would be less arbitrary and far 
 more suggestive. We allude to the stereotyped out- 
 lines for 
 
 nevertheless notwithstanding hesitate manner whatever without 
 
 which might, it seems, be presented- as last given 
 above. Yet the traditions of the system are so strong 
 we dare not more than whisper thoughts of the innova- 
 tion, and hasten to remark that the standard lists are 
 good enough, and facile enough, considering the possi- 
 bilities of this system of brief writing. 
 
 (377) Word-signs how classified? 
 
 In order to make the word-sign stand out as a spe- 
 cial division of the subject, and as such challenging 
 particular study, we have been pleased to arrange 
 them under imaginary heads, thereby assisting the 
 
200 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 mind to contend with the difficulty. Seven classes 
 have been noted : 
 
 1. Word-signs imitative of long-hand abbreviation 
 illustrated by the list on page 208. 
 
 2. Word-signs by position (vowel implication) 
 as illustrated by the groups on pages 52, 74, 10."), 
 118, 128 and 156. 
 
 3. Word-signs denoting the principal sounds of the 
 word (consonant suggestion) as illustrated by 
 the forms for average, charity, en<j<nj<', iinfnlgc, 
 original, simple, seldom. 
 
 4. Word-signs arbitrary, but feebly suggestive like 
 exaggerate, generation, jurisdiction, information, 
 measure, frequent. 
 
 5. Word-signs purely arbitrary dollar, imagine, 
 hereafter, influence, large, religion. 
 
 G. Word-signs of form more fluent than syllabic 
 explanatory, unless, nearly, voluntary, majority. 
 
 1. Word-signs showing merely a part for the whole 
 form unfortunate, substantial, essential, authen- 
 tic. 
 
 (378) Word-signs how made? 
 
 It profits nothing to make even as imperfect a classi- 
 fication as the above, without the inquirer enters with 
 interest into the composition of the forms, and accepts 
 the above as an illustration of this division of the 
 subject. 
 
 Hence it may be affirmed that the shorthand writer 
 can with judgment invent his own word-signs. Not 
 that he would need to ordinarily ; but if engaged in a 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 201 
 
 business involving technicalities, lie could from obser- 
 vation of the standard lists go about building new * 
 abbreviations for his special convenience. 
 
 The procedure might be like this : If the word has 
 an abbreviation in English, imitate it in phonography, 
 if the resulting form be well constructed. The next 
 best outline will be the one which most clearly voices 
 the word. A part may be given for the whole, taking 
 care to select that portion which proves to be quite 
 unlike any current sign. The word-signs for different 
 and difficult illustrate this point ; in the first instance 
 Df was taken, and therefore Kl was " Hobson's 
 choice " for the latter. As the last resort choose the 
 arbitrary sign ; but if it can be made the least bit 
 suggestive, all the better for its legibility. 
 
 (379) Fluency of form should be the ruling motive 
 in all this effort for abbreviation : it is the why and 
 wherefore of the classes mentioned above ; otherwise 
 there might be one class only, namely, a wise conden- 
 sation ; or another class, namely, one imitative of 
 longhand abbreviation, etc., etc. But, no; the scope 
 of the English language is wide, word elements are 
 vastly varied, the shorthand equivalent has fixed 
 limitations ; and so, in the pursuit of brevity with 
 fluency, many paths have to be taken. 
 
 Then, really, the production of the acceptable word- 
 sign form is a matter of judgment (see Sect. 34o) to a 
 considerable extent. The limitations of a correct 
 mechanical treatment environ also this department of 
 shorthand writing ; and though memory serves to make 
 useful the finished product, yet it is memory assisted 
 by the reason. 
 
 * The Century Dictionary exhibits 50,000 words never 
 before defined in a dictionary : so it is fair to presume they 
 are new to writers at lars?e. 
 
202 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 (380) WORD-SIGNS OF THE STEPS : 
 
 (Alphabetically arranged.) 
 
 Nomenclature : Capital letters represent stems, and 
 small letters the appendages. The hyphen 
 shows a separation of strokes, and the fig- 
 ures mark the position. 
 
 able Bl 2 
 above B-V 2 
 accept Ks-P 3 
 accession Ks eshon 2 
 accord-ing Krd 1 
 account Knt 3 
 accurate Krt 3 
 accusation Ks eshon 3 
 acknowledge K-J 2 
 acquisition Jvs eshon 1 
 addition Dshun 3 
 advance Dv 3 
 advantage J 2 
 after Ft 2 
 agent Jnt 3 
 all B-tick 1 
 allow Lull 3 
 along iNG 3 
 already D-tick 1 
 
 am M 2 
 any N 1 
 appear Pr 1 
 apposition Ps eshon 3 
 appreciate Prs-T 1 
 architecture R-K 2 
 are Ruh 2 
 aristocratic Rs-K 2 
 as s 2 
 ask S-K 2 
 assembl-e-y S-M 2 
 association Ss eshon 2 
 astonish-ment St 1 
 authority THrt 1 
 average V-J 2 
 aware wRuh 3 
 awful Fl 1 
 aye ai 1 
 
 balance Bins 2 
 bankrupt Bnk 2 
 because Ks 1 
 be B 2 
 
 before Bf 2 
 begin Gn 1 
 
 behind Bncl 1 
 
 believe 
 
 belong 
 
 beyond 
 
 bring 
 
 business 
 
 but 
 
 by 
 
 Blv 1 
 Bl 1 
 
 y 1 (involute) 
 Br 1 
 Bs 1 
 
 calculate Kl 3 
 cannot Knt 2 
 capable K-B1 2 
 care Kr 2 
 certain sRuht 2 
 change CH 2 
 
 character Kr-K 2 
 charge CH 3 
 circumstance sTns 3 
 Co. (company) K 2 
 come K 2 
 commercial K-Mr 2 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 203 
 
 C Continued 
 
 common K 1 
 commonwealth K-wLuh 2 
 comprehend Prnd 2 
 condition Dslnm 2 
 consequence sKns 2 
 consequent slvnt 2 
 consider sDr 2 
 
 clear Dr 2 
 defendant Dft 2 
 deficiency Df-SH 2 
 degree Gr 1 
 deliver Dl 2 
 department D-Prt 2 
 describe sKr 1 
 description sKr shun 1 
 denomination Dn l 
 develop Dv-P 2 
 differen-t-ce Df 2 
 
 consideration sDrshun 2 
 consignee sN-N 1 
 consumption sMshun 2 
 correct Kr-K 1 
 cure Kr 3 
 customer Ks-Mr 2 
 
 1) 
 
 difficult Kl 2 
 
 dignity D-G 1 
 
 direct Dr 2 
 
 direction Dr shun 2 
 
 disadvantage Ds-J 2 
 
 divine Dv 1 
 
 do D 2 
 
 dollar D 1 
 
 done Dn 2 
 
 Dr. (doctor) Dr 1 
 
 during Dr 3 
 
 ease-y Z 1 
 edition Dshun 1 
 efficient F-SH 2 
 either DTHr 1 
 equal Kl 1 
 especial S-P 2 
 essential S-N 2 
 establish-ment St 2 
 ever V 1 
 
 every Vr 2 
 evident Vd 2 
 examine sMn 2 
 exchange Ks-CH 2 
 expect Ks-P 2 
 experience sPrns 2 
 explain sPln 2 
 express sPrs 2 
 
 familiar F-M 2 
 favor Vr 3 
 feature Ft 1 
 February F-B 2 
 fill Fl 1 
 first stuh 1 
 
 for F 2 
 form Fr- 1 
 formation Frshun 1 
 from Fr 2 
 full-y Fl 2 
 future Ft 3 
 
 G 
 
 general Jn 2 gentlemen Jnt 1 
 
 generalization Jns eshon 2 give G 1 
 generation Jshun 2 govern-ment Gv 2 
 
 gentleman Jnt 2 guarant-ee-y Grn-T 
 
204 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 II 
 
 had ' D 3 
 half F 3 
 happen Pn 3 
 happy P 3 
 hard Rd 3 
 has s 2 
 have V 2 
 heard lid 2 
 held Ld 2 
 her R 2 
 here R 1 
 herself Rs 2 
 
 high ai 1 
 him M 2 
 himself Ms 2 
 his s 1 
 hold Ld 2 
 home M 3 
 honest Nstnh 1 
 hope P 2 
 how ow 2 
 however V 3 
 human Mn 3 
 humor Mr 3 
 
 I ai 1 
 
 imagin-e-ation .In 3 
 immediate Md 1 
 individual Nd-Vd l 
 infer N-F 2 
 influence Ns 1 
 influential N-SII1 1 
 information Nshun 1 
 inscribe in-sKr 1 
 insecure in sKr 3 
 instant Nstuh 1 
 instruct in sTr 2 
 
 instruction in sTrshun 2 
 integrity Nt-Grt l 
 intellect Nt-Kt 1 
 intelligent Nt-Jnt 2 
 interest Nt-sT 2 
 internal Tr 1 
 into N-T 2 
 
 investigation N-Vst eshon 2 
 irregular R-G 2 
 is 's 1 
 issue SH 3 
 it T 2 
 
 jurisdiction Jrs eshon 2 
 kind Knd 1 
 
 knowledge N-J 2 
 
 language iNG 2 
 large J 3 
 liberty Br 1 
 
 magnitude M-G 2 
 man Mn 2 - 
 manufacture M-N-F 2 
 Massachusetts Ms-CH 3 
 mathematics M-TII 3 
 measure ZSIIr 3 
 
 little U 1 
 long iNG 3 
 
 M 
 
 member Br- 
 men Mn 1 
 mention Mshun 2 
 merchandise Mr-CH 2 
 mistake Ms-Iv 2 
 more Mr 2 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 205 
 
 mortgage 
 
 mortgagee 
 
 movement 
 
 M Continued 
 
 Mr-G 2 
 Mr-G-J 3 
 Mnt J 
 
 Mr. (Mister) 
 much CH 3 
 myself Ms 1 
 
 Mr 1 
 
 nature Nt 2 
 necessary Nss 2 
 negotiate N-Gs-T 2 
 nevertheless N-V-Ls 2 
 new Neu- 
 
 New York N-yK 1 
 next Nst 2 
 
 notwithstanding Nt-sTnd l 
 now Nou 2 
 number Br 3 
 
 
 
 object B 2 
 of P-tick l 
 on Kuh-tick 1 
 only Nl 2 
 oi)inion Nn 1 
 opportunity Prt 2 
 opposition Ps eshon 1 
 or T-tick 1 
 
 ordinary Rd 1 
 organization Gns eshon 1 
 original Ruh-J 2 
 
 other 
 
 ought 
 
 ourself 
 
 over 
 
 own 
 
 DTIIr 3 
 
 J-tick 1 
 
 Us 3 
 
 Vr 1 
 
 N 3 
 
 parallel Prel 2 
 Parliament Prel 3 
 part Prt 3 
 particular Prt 1 
 peculiar P-K 2 
 people PI 2 
 perfect-ion Prf 2 
 plaintiff Pint 2 
 pleasure XSIIr 2 
 popular P-P 1 
 position Ps eshon 2 
 
 possession Ps eshou 3 
 
 question Kn 2 
 quite Kt 1 
 
 real 111 1 
 refer-ence Ruh-F 2 
 regular lluh-G 2 
 rela-tive-tion Rl 2 
 
 practic-e-al 
 
 prejudice 
 
 preliminary 
 
 president 
 
 princip-al-le 
 
 Pr 3 
 Pr-J 2 
 
 Prel 1 
 Prs 2 
 Pr 2 
 
 private Prft 1 
 proficient Prf-SH 2 
 profit Prft 1 
 proper Pr 1 
 pub-lic-lish P-B 2 
 punctual-ity Pn-K 2 
 
 Q 
 
 quotation K-Tshun 2 
 
 li 
 
 religion Jn 1 
 remark-able Mr 1 
 remember Br 2 
 represent-ed Ruh-P 2 
 
206 
 
 representation 
 republ-ic-ish 
 respect-ive-ful 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 R Continued 
 
 Ruh-Pshun 2 revelation 
 Ruh-P-B 2 revolution 
 Rs-P 2 rule Rl 3 
 
 Luhshun 2 
 Luhshun 3 
 
 sacred . sKrd 2 
 San Francisco sN-ssK 2 
 satisfac-tion-tory sT 3 
 second sKnd 2 
 secret sKrt 1 
 secretary sK 2 
 secure sKr 3 
 secured sKrd 3 
 seldom sLd 2 
 several sV 2 
 shall SH 2 
 should Ruh-tick 2 
 signature sG-Tr 2 
 somewhat sMt 2 
 
 soon sN 2 
 speak-er sP 1 
 special sP 2 
 spoken sPn 2 
 stenograph-y-er stub N 2 
 strength -sTr-TII 2 
 strong sTr 2 
 subject sB 2 
 sufficient sF-SH 2 
 suggestion sJs eshon 2 orsJ 2 
 suppress sPrs 3 
 surprise sPrs 1 
 system ssT 2 
 
 telegraph Tl-G 2 
 testify Ts-F 2 
 thank TH 3 
 them DTH 2 
 there DTHr 2 
 thing iNG 1 
 think TH 2 
 this DTHs 2 
 those DTHs 3 
 though DTH 3 
 thousand TH 3 
 throughout THrt 3 
 
 thus DTHs 3 
 thy DTH 1 
 time T 1 
 to P-tick 2 
 together G 2 
 tonight Nt 3 
 too P-tick 2 
 toward Trd 2 
 transfer Trs-F 2 
 truth Tr 2 
 two P-tick 2 
 
 under Nd 2 
 union Nn 3 
 United States Nss 1 
 unless Nls 2 
 until Tl 3 
 unto N-T 3 
 
 us S 3 
 use (n.) 
 use (v.) 
 usual-ly 
 utter 
 
 S 3 
 Z 3 
 
 ZSII 2 
 Tr 3 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 207 
 
 value 
 very 
 
 VI 3 
 
 Vl-2 
 
 was Z 2 
 
 \ve w 1 (e volute) 
 
 were \v 2 (e volute) 
 
 what w 1 (involute) 
 
 when wN 1 
 
 where wlluh 2 
 
 Avliich CII- 
 
 Avho J-tick 2 
 
 whole Luh 3 
 
 V 
 
 virtue 
 
 Vrt 1 
 
 W 
 
 whom J-tick 2 
 
 will Luh 2 
 
 wish SH 1 
 
 with w 1 (evolute) 
 
 within DTHn 1 
 wlluhd 2 
 (w) Ld 2 
 w 2 (involute) 
 
 ye y 1 (evolute) 
 year y 1 (evolute) 
 yet y 2 (evolute) 
 
 you y 2 (involute) 
 your y 2 (involute) 
 youth TH 3 
 
 Word-signs how learned : 
 
 There is no better way to learn word-signs than 
 by use ; yet the student confronted by an appalling 
 list of more or less arbitrary forms would not be 
 benefited by such advice as this, simply because he 
 would not know how to use them advantageously. 
 But in this manual a few word-signs have been pre- 
 sented at a time, and so blended with related matter 
 that they can be used with the proper setting of lan- 
 guage. Therein lies the merit of the progressive 
 word-sign study feature of the book. More than half 
 the word-signs required for ordinary writing have been 
 so impressed. A good foundation has been laid ; and 
 as dictation work progresses the following lists should 
 be referred to as a dictionary would be, for such 
 words encountered as may be fit subjects for word-sign 
 treatment. 
 
208 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 (382) WORD-SIGNS IMITATIVE OF LONG- 
 HAND ABBREVIATION: 
 
 (These are by far the simplest word-signs to memorize 
 and use.) 
 
 -^- 
 
 ad. advertisement 
 astron. astronomy 
 Benj. Benjamin 
 "biz."* business 
 Calif. California 
 capt. captain 
 cash, cashier 
 Cath. Catholic 
 "cert." certain 
 chap, chapter 
 -= Co. company 
 I deft, defendant 
 
 L 
 
 Dem. Democrat 
 " din"." difference 
 "dig" dignity 
 Dr. doctor 
 Eng. England 
 Esq. esquire 
 exch. exchange 
 Feb. February 
 fut. future 
 gen. general 
 gent, gentleman 
 
 Gov. governor 
 
 * Syllables in quotation-marks are slang, it is true, but 
 most suggestive word-signs. 
 
PKACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 209 
 
 ..uifm. infinitive; 
 Jnst. instant 
 -Jan. January 
 Just, justice 
 .Jr. junior 
 .leg. ledger 
 
 ,Mr. mister 
 Nov. November 
 
 j. objection 
 orcl. ordinary 
 pass'gr passenger 
 Penn. Pennsylvania 
 
 \ 
 
 -mag. magazine ^ perf. perfect 
 
 _manf. manufacture S plaint, plaintiff 
 
 -Mass. Massachusetts <^\...Parl. Parliament 
 
 .mem. memorandum Ji_Z.per cent 
 
 -Messrs __L__Phila. Philadelphia 
 
 .Meth. Methodist J phren. phrenology 
 
 .Mex. Mexico X pop. popular 
 
 t\ 
 
 pres. president 
 
 prof, professor 
 prox. proximo 
 
 -ingr. manager 
 -Mich. Michigan 
 .Mrs. missis 
 
210 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 representative _ 
 ev. reverend, revenuc- 
 
 -Sept. September 
 .super, superior 
 _ult. ultimo 
 -vol. volume 
 
 ;ec. secretary 
 
 Other familiar abbreviations are doc. (D-K 1 ) for 
 document (as "Pub. Doc."), "prob." (Pr-B) for 
 probability (as "Old Prob.") Apt abbreviations of 
 terms in a trade or business may be similarly imitated 
 by the shorthand writer of judgment. 
 
 (383) GENERAL WORD-SIGNS: 
 
 Some of the words in this list have two signs. The 
 omission of K, the most fluent stroke in stenography, 
 has seemed to us an unwarranted hardship, and we 
 are loath to inflict it upon students of this manual 
 without giving an alternative outline. 
 
 Of course in words like direction, instruction, ntfr/n-- 
 tion, there is enough suggestion to compensate for the 
 absence of the K, and words like explode and exj>l<ii,i 
 do not admit it. Ts eshon for taxation, sPs eshon for 
 specification^ Trs eshon for transaction and Prs eshon 
 for j>rosecution, appear far-fetched, except when used 
 a great many times at one sitting. Forms like T for 
 take, M for make, wRuh for ivork, also strike us as 
 being unduly abbreviated. 
 
 A certain design, however, pervades many of these 
 word-signs. For instance, the outline for/or??i is Fr 1 ; 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 211 
 
 and that same shape appears in the compounds, re- 
 form, perform, inform, deform, etc. F likewise stands 
 for -fer, as in infer, refer, and it ought to in prefer. 
 
 The simple root form is for the most part given, to 
 which the terminations attach regularly. The present 
 tense is made to stand for the past, as is the habit of 
 expert writers. 
 
 Words in bold-face type are strictly word-signs ; 
 others are facile forms or desirable phrases. 
 
 Not all the word- signs employed in varied writing 
 are here presented, because a workable list is superior 
 to an inflated one. The systematic progress of the 
 steps has furnished a great many of the commoner 
 forms, the unmistakable tendency of the instruction 
 makes it unnecessary to more than hint at simple de- 
 ductions ; and, therefore, only the more arbitrary word- 
 signs and unusual word-outlines are given. 
 
 A 
 
 ab!e-to 
 
 abundant 
 
 dvancement 
 
 advent 
 
 accompany 
 
 L 
 
 achievement 
 
 -acquaintance 
 -acquire-cl 
 
 -amount-ed 
 
 -,angel 
 
212 INSTl 
 
 Q-;/ annual 
 i anticipate-d 
 ..anybody 
 
 IUCTION IN 
 *\ , .approximate 
 
 \ fippnrtf > n;ni' i < i s 
 
 '\rriv-e-al 
 
 
 _ J art 
 
 .. ,.any-otlier-oiie 
 
 ~b nvt.ist. 
 
 % 
 
 appearance 
 
 "5 artistic 
 
 \~ . .appellate 
 ^ apply 
 . appliance 
 C applicab-le-ility 
 O .applicant 
 V application 
 1 appreciate-d 
 ^ apprehend-d 
 ^ ....apprehensive 
 
 ^ ascertain 
 
 js- - &s 
 
 p ns-it-\v n uld 
 
 
 ^_^-' *L**~ r 
 \ assist-ed 
 
 o 
 
 <y assistant 
 
 9 
 
 O assure 
 
 assurance 
 
 e/ 
 
 I at-first 
 
 D 
 
 P at-last 
 
 ,, , nt-lonst. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 213 
 
 1 at-length 
 - 3 at-our-own, attorney 
 
 bcni ir n;uit 
 
 \ 
 
 x brethren 
 
 
 
 L attain-ment 
 1 attainable 
 
 C 
 ^S Campaign 
 
 attitude 
 
 : ? can-there 
 
 \ auspicious 
 
 (r C 
 
 authentic 
 
 c nnrn, carry 
 
 (> ..avocation. (2) vocation 
 avoid-ed 
 
 Q"1 certificate 
 / chair 
 : characteristic 
 
 ^s? aware-of 
 
 B 
 
 V l)een-thcre 
 
 ^^^ bc^un bc^in 
 
 o ch arity 
 ^cheer 
 P c ircu m stan tial 
 
 V 
 
 civilization 
 
 \ ..behold 
 . belief, believe 
 __iL__benevolent 
 
 f,lear-cd 
 
214 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 1 r 
 
 ^-collateral 
 
 f constitute-d 
 
 P 
 1 constitution-al 
 U 
 
 P 
 constitutive 
 J 
 
 1 1 
 == 1 construct-ed 
 
 *L construction 
 ^ consumption 
 _1 control-led 
 fe conversation 
 .conversion 
 3 convert-ed 
 ^ \ country 
 c ronrsfi 
 
 c. 
 
 ....oollect-ed 
 
 isft. 
 
 ^ft^ 
 
 ~T 
 
 s 
 
 _A_ 
 __1 
 
 2=n_ 
 
 a_ 
 
 P 
 
 combin-e-ation 
 commence 
 commencement 
 comply 
 compliance 
 .compliant 
 comprehensible 
 _comprehension-sive 
 consequence 
 _considerate 
 consist-ed 
 
 
 P 
 
 consistent 
 
 __^__ ri 
 
 P f 
 
 I 
 
 _J_ 
 
 consistency 
 constituent 
 
 creature 
 
 .creation 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 215 
 
 ^creative 
 
 ..criticism 
 
 -cross-examination 
 
 -cure 
 
 -curious 
 
 .curiosity 
 
 -custom 
 
 D 
 
 -deriv-e-ation 
 
 b / .dan ge r 
 n .danger-s-ous 
 
 .endanger 
 
 deform-ed 
 
 .delight-ed 
 
 -delinquent 
 
 -derid-ed 
 .derision 
 
 cr^ 
 description 
 
 descriptive 
 
 -determine-d 
 
 -develop-ed 
 
 -director (See also 330; 
 
 -discharge-d 
 
 -discriminate 
 
 -distinct-ion 
 
 SV; distinctive 
 
 B- distinguish-ed 
 
 I 
 
 U distribut-ed 
 
 s^ disturb-ed 
 
 -J- dollar 
 
 r~0~r.. -domestic 
 1 duration 
 
21R INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 E -=3_S 
 
 except-ed 
 
 > ? 
 
 ... , ftasl. \J 
 
 -exception-al 
 
 j eastern \\ 
 
 ..exceptionable 
 
 L electric - fi- 
 
 
 ^->~~ engaee-d 
 
 excuse-d 
 
 f " 
 
 English Q- 
 
 execute-d 
 
 ^~t enlarge-d 
 
 exhibit-ed 
 
 entire V) 
 
 .exhibition 
 
 "^ P P 
 1 equity T r 
 
 _exist-ed, system 
 
 T ~ equivocate o 
 
 existence 
 
 rv/\ Europe \ \ 
 
 expect-ed 
 
 J every-one >i 
 
 _unexpect-ed 
 
 exact-ed o 
 
 expense 
 
 9 9 exaggerate-ed .^ 
 
 - expend -ed-iture 
 
 <S^ example o 
 
 _explain-ation 
 
 \ pvasnerat-e-fl-inn O 
 
 explainable 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 a 
 
 217 
 
 > explanatory 
 
 JL. formal-ity 
 
 _ 2__ex )lore-ed 
 
 formation 
 
 j*i_- expression 
 
 formal-ly 
 
 J J e-xtenrl-t 
 
 ____^___found-ed-ation 
 
 J U exten-sion-sive 
 
 j fraternal 
 
 c^ tr3.ordiH3.rv 
 
 
 -._, 1 1^ cxtr3.v3,['3.n-t- cc 
 
 frequent 
 
 extreme 
 
 J frpqiipnry 
 
 j extremity 
 
 . J from-all 
 
 
 V. fnllnr 
 
 ^ 
 
 u furnish-ed. furniture 
 
 i 
 
 
 g^ family 
 
 G 
 
 V^~\ ^familiar-arity 
 
 t? generalization 
 
 Qj fluctuation 
 
 . guilt-y 
 
 ^ fm 
 
 
 C\ 
 
 H 
 
 fnrm-prl 
 
 ..-I halve 
 
218 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 X happen-ed 
 
 
 X happ-ens-iness 
 o 
 
 5s3 have- (ing) -been 
 
 ^ have-not 
 
 ? 
 
 hereafter (rft) 
 
 heretofore (rtf) 
 
 <D 
 
 .hundred-th 
 
 identical 
 
 L* identification 
 
 idleness 
 
 ignorance 
 
 . ignorant 
 
 ^ imaginable 
 
 < ifN? impatient 
 . * impenetrable 
 
 A inconsiderate 
 
 7 
 
 1 sJ in-consideration 
 
 ^ 
 
 s^ indefinite 
 
 independent 
 
 indescribable 
 
 indiscriminate 
 
 indulge-d 
 
 inexperience 
 
 inform-ed-aut 
 
 inquire-d 
 
 inscription 
 
 insecurity 
 
 insignificant 
 
 instructive 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 219 
 
 G/ insnranf.fi 
 
 L 
 
 intppritv 
 
 
 
 V , Ian "*h tor 
 
 X 
 
 
 i .it-had (-would) 
 u it-will-have 
 L it-would-have 
 __i___it-would-not 
 
 J 
 -.. LJ j ndicious 
 
 9 / ^ jury 
 d jurisdiction 
 ?C- justice of peace 
 ,. V justification 
 __C .Juxtaposition 
 
 
 len^thv 
 
 ,. . longer 
 
 M 
 
 -magistrate 
 
 , .magniflrpnt. 
 
 , / majority 
 
 ** "^ , material 
 
 r -a , may-have-been 
 
 , mfiflinvhile 
 
 mechanical 
 
220 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 .metropolitan 
 
 .merc-y-iful 
 
 _million-th 
 
 -minority 
 
 .misdemeanor 
 
 .misfortune 
 
 -modification 
 
 -moral-ity 
 
 -mortal-ity 
 
 -movement 
 
 N 
 .nearly 
 
 .neglect-ed 
 .negotiate-d 
 Ino-other, another 
 
 -notification 
 
 O 
 -occurr-ed 
 
 -occurrence 
 
 -of-our-own 
 
 -only 
 
 -on-one-hand 
 
 -on-the-other-hand 
 
 -oppression 
 
 -order-ed 
 
 -organ 
 
 , no-other-one, another- ~7) 
 - one 
 
 organization 
 organiz-ed 
 
 or-if, or-have, I have 
 ornament 
 
1'KACTICAL SHOItTIIAM). 
 
 221 
 
 
 . ! 1 .|JVJllLl^ltMI 
 
 VD 
 
 -owner 
 
 possess 
 
 L^ oyer 
 
 ^ possessed 
 
 o oyez 
 
 V possession, apposition 
 
 P 
 
 -y^ possessive 
 
 *\ -partake 
 
 2 -possessor 
 
 
 V 
 
 \ p a rty 
 
 possible 
 
 
 -V- perhaps 
 
 \> 
 
 poverty 
 
 
 _V_J_.!>erform-ed 
 
 ^ pract-icable-icability 
 
 V-"& performance 
 
 V pyppnrr'-d 
 
 V^^ perpendicular 
 
 ^^ prev6ut~ed 
 
 j^J perpetual-lv 
 
 Jb^ privilege-d 
 
 
 v^v, persevorc-d 
 
 \J 
 
 \J profirient 
 
 
 ^> philanthropy 
 
 nrolit-^d 
 
 Y> philosophy 
 
 -A profitable 
 
 ^ 
 
 c pnlitir.al 
 
 \J ni-oimc 
 
222 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 V .property 
 . ...A propriety 
 V.> publication 
 . ^ ,punish-ed-ment 
 V"T...\a... purpose 
 
 Q 
 
 1 .quality 
 ~~5 questionable 
 ! -quarter 
 
 R 
 C^l .railroad 
 
 ^^ , rather (1) writer 
 
 S 
 ^^ sanguine 
 
 ^"^ sanguinary 
 
 school 
 
 
 
 e_ 
 
 
 ^n 
 
 u set-forth 
 
 C 
 
 Sfit-Oft' 
 
 ^X shall-have-been 
 signi-fy-fied 
 
 , .-^^ rational 
 
 realize 
 
 significant 
 
 reform-ed 
 , ^s relinauish-pd 
 
 simi1ar-ity 
 
 simnlp iritv 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 223 
 
 simplest 
 
 Vr> ^ t- 
 
 single -d 
 
 Q 
 
 singular-ity 
 
 
 c 
 
 situation 
 
 ^_y 
 
 vr siDcrficial 
 
 e D 
 
 -skillful 
 
 a superintend-ed-ent 
 
 . 1 somebody 
 
 southeast 
 
 f 
 
 ^ .southern 
 
 , spectacle 
 
 ence 
 
 <? .supplant 
 
 ^ ., ..supplication 
 
 V \ jsupprossion 
 
 spirit 
 
 ? suspend-ed 
 
 
 u ....suspension 
 
 V- 
 
 spiritualistic 
 
 T 
 
 J taken fta'en") 
 
 spiritu q1i'7ati^n 
 
 a stranger 
 
 V 
 
 >~\ temporary-ily 
 
 9* ' .testimony 
 
 subordinate 
 
 ") therp-xyniilfl 
 
INSTRUCTION 
 
 1 they-had . L 
 
 IN 
 
 2 transient 
 
 ( P 
 
 ** they have 
 
 (j twel-ve-fth 
 
 r 
 
 5J they-will-have 
 H 
 
 U 
 
 i 
 
 undefined 
 
 t-O-gl V*' 
 
 / -uniform 
 
 v_r 
 
 tn-<ro , .. 
 
 ) 
 unfortunate 
 
 J^ to-have-been v 
 to-him / 
 to-it, (to wit:) 
 
 tnlprant ^ 
 
 upon-there 
 usurp 
 
 V 
 
 Virgin-ia 
 
 vi'rtM-^-al 
 
 
 * 
 
 to-you 
 
 . virtuously 
 
 a tracer V3 
 1 *. 
 
 vocation, (3) 
 void, avoid 
 
 1 ^^ 
 
 UX. trancfr>rnn_orl 
 
 . volnntarv 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 225 
 
 who-have, \vho-of, 
 whoever 
 
 O__^you-\vere-\vould 
 
226 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 SOME UNCLASSIFIED WORDS, WORD- 
 SIGNS AND PHRASES: 
 
 * 
 
 abstract 
 
 C O genius 
 
 1 
 
 accuracy 
 
 Y genus 
 
 7 
 
 adiournment 
 
 ^ greater 
 
 v/ 
 
 ? 
 
 alternative 
 
 *""*( impulse 
 
 
 ancestor 
 
 ^~\ employs 
 ^ implies (1^ 
 
 V 
 
 proximate 
 approximate (3") 
 
 infinite 
 
 ^ix 
 
 daughter 
 debtor 
 
 int6m&] 
 
 <? v^: 
 
 bondhnlrlpr 
 
 C intolerahlt. 
 
 i 
 
 c 
 
 eloquent 
 
 A/ // jiidifial 
 
 3o 
 
 emphasis 
 emphasize 
 
 \^) junction 
 
 7 7 
 
 employee 
 Mayo 
 
 kingdom 
 <-.nnimnn 
 
 r ^ 
 
 insrrftdlfint 
 
 1 Ifiarn 
 
 -4.... 
 
 enthusiasm 
 enthusiastic 
 
 (_ luxury 
 
 p y 3 
 
 eternal Lll . 
 
 ^~W~N maximum 
 
 ^ 
 
 event. 
 
 ^~^v ^ s minimum 
 
 ~c n 
 
 ? extinguish 
 1 extinct 
 
 b mistress 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 227 
 
 L 
 
 technical 
 
 \J obligation 
 
 
 territory 
 
 ^~ ...... obstacle 
 
 ? 
 
 thereof 
 
 C~^ overwhelm 
 
 L 
 
 P 
 
 tolerate 
 
 <\ / premature or 
 W^ Pr-M-Tr 
 
 1 
 
 and-of , of-an 
 
 ^^^^ peremptory 
 
 -*-9 
 
 common- 
 sense 
 
 \j. prefer 
 
 0, ^ 
 
 c.o.d. f o.b. 
 
 v 
 
 Ey proffer 
 
 L 
 
 direct-ex- 
 amination 
 
 \ \ s power 
 
 y V 
 
 50.000 
 500,000 
 
 "\, -^ rfltifipfltinn 
 
 -v 
 
 notary- 
 public 
 
 r state 
 
 ^ 
 
 . oftentimes 
 
 ptfltnt.p 
 
 \ \ 
 
 party-of-the- 
 flrst-part 
 
 9 
 
 st.raiglitpn 
 
 \ \ 
 
 party-of-the- 
 second-part 
 
 ^ stupfiTidnns 
 
 \ 
 
 real-estate 
 
 \; 
 
 VT snperfififl.1 
 
 1 
 
 so-far-as 
 
 ^ snporn.at.nrnl 
 
 s 
 
 take-care-of 
 
228 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 "V 
 
 mysterious 
 
 IL 
 
 extinguish 
 neuralgia 
 Australia 
 Carlvle 
 denunciation 
 time-will-tell 
 
 what-we-want 
 
 it-is-further- 
 agreed 
 
 ^ 
 
 synonymous 
 
 V 
 
 
 owner 
 
 
 
 thoroughly 
 
 ^T 
 
 (^ 
 
 function 
 
 L 
 
 \ 
 
 proba-ble-bility 
 
 I 
 
 \^ 
 
 prompt 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 
 turn 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 
 
 attempt 
 
 V- 
 
 to-have-and- 
 to-hold 
 
 L 
 
 _, betterment 
 
 V ~V^ 1 
 
 ^^ 
 
 / 
 
 arbitrament 
 
 "V 
 
 in-witness- 
 _ whereof 
 
 ^ 
 
 __ univers-e-al 
 
 \ 
 
 be-it-remem- 
 . bered 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 229 
 
 TERMS PERTAINING TO ELECTRICITY. 
 
 accumulator KM-Lter 
 ampere Mp-R 
 annunciator N-Nn-SHter 
 armature R-M-Tr 
 battery Bt-Ruh 
 cathodic K-TFID-K 
 calorimeter Klr-Mtr 
 candle-power Kud-Luh-P-R 
 centigrade sNt-Grd 
 centimeter sN-T-Mter 
 centrifugal sNter-F-Gl 
 commutator com/Tt-Ruli 
 condenser con/I)ns-R 
 conductivity con/DKt/V 
 coulomb K-Ln 
 deflector D-FlKter 
 demagnetize D-MG-Ts 
 dielectric D-LK 
 dittuse D-Fs 
 discharger Ds-CH-R 
 dynamo D-N-M 
 dyne I)n 
 
 electrician LK-SHn 
 electrode LK-Trd 
 electrolized LK-Lsd 
 electro-magnet LK-MG-Nt 
 electrometer LK-Mter 
 electro-motive LK-M-Tv 
 electro-positive LK-Ps-Tv 
 electroscope LK-sKP 
 electrose LK-Trs 
 exploitation sPl-Tshn 
 farad F-Ruhd 
 fluorometer Flr-Mter 
 fusibility Fs/B 
 galvanometer Glv-Mter 
 generator JNrter 
 henry Hn-Ruh 
 horse-power Rs-P-Ruh 
 hysterisis St-Ruhss 
 impedance Mp-I)ns 
 incandescent N-Kn-I)s-Nt 
 inductance N-DKt-Ns 
 induction N-DKshu 
 
 inductive N-DKtive 
 installation iusTl-shn 
 intermittent Nt-Mt-Nt 
 joule Jl 
 
 kilogram Kl-GrM 
 leyden Luh-Dn 
 luminosity L-Mn/S 
 magnet MG-Nt 
 magnetometer MG-Nt-Mter 
 milliampere Ml-Mp-Ruh 
 molecular Ml-K-Luh-R 
 monocyclic MN-sKlK 
 motor Mter 
 multophase Mlt-Fs 
 multipolar MLt-Pl-R 
 ohm M 
 
 polarity P-Luh-Ruh-T 
 polarization P-Luh-Reshn 
 polyphasal P-L-Fs-L 
 potential P-Tu-SH 
 quadruplex KD-Ruh-PlKs 
 reactance R-K-Tus 
 regulators Ruh-G-Lters 
 reluctivity Rl-Ktive-T 
 remanent R-Mn-Nt 
 retardation Rter-Dshn 
 rheostat Ruh-sTt 
 self-induction s/N-DKshn 
 sinusoidal sN-sD-L 
 switchboard swCH-Brd 
 synchronism sN-Kr-NsM 
 synchronous sN-Kr-Ns 
 thotometer THt-Mter 
 transmitter Trns-Mter 
 triphased Tr-Fsd 
 trolley Tr-Luh 
 vacuum VK-M 
 vibrator V-Brter 
 volatilized Vl-Tlsd 
 volt Vlt 
 voltage Vlt-J 
 voltmeter Vlt-Mter 
 watt wT 
 watt-meter wT-Mter 
 
230 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 (384) SACRED WORD-SIGNS: 
 
 The above title is submitted without irreverence, 
 and such a branch of the subject is presented because 
 sermons and religions discussions are very much re- 
 ported. 
 
 The student of shorthand will often find it con- 
 venient to follow the words of the preacher, and the 
 appearance of the note-book in church is looked upon 
 by both clergy and congregation with complacency. 
 
 -ecclesiastical 
 
 f 
 
 * evangelical 
 
 C evangelist 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 231 
 
 immortal ^^_ rpsnrrfiftin.i 
 
 Immortalize 
 
 /~ ...-.salvation 
 
 intfir^fission 
 
 6 
 
 P 
 
 \v . . Saviour 
 
 ~"ZT 
 
 Jesns Christ 
 Lord 
 
 .Scripture 
 
 spirit 
 
 ^ t,psta.nipntf 
 
 ^"1 New Testament 
 ..../ revelation 
 
 / 
 
 . religion 
 
 f theology 
 
 c 
 
 thine 
 
 / thou 
 
 religious 
 
 thy 
 
 (385) 
 Lord God 
 
 PHRASES: 
 
 Almighty Gnd 
 
 \_ Lord and Saviour 
 Lord's kingdom 
 
 S children of Israel 
 
 \ Christian brethren 
 
 2 
 
 <s~^\ .Tornajilpm 
 
 i 
 
 S\ Holv Spirit 
 
 2_ 
 
 <7* Word of God 
 
232 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 Jesus of Nazareth ^- . . Saviour of the world 
 
 Kingdom of Heaven 0^-3 Son of man 
 religious life IZ!L_wisdom of God 
 
 (386) SENTENCES FOR WORD-SIGN 
 PRACTICE : 
 
 All constituent members must comply with the 
 conditions or take the consequences. He was abun- 
 dantly satisfied with his advancement. The situation 
 was extremely delightful. God's mercy is infinite. 
 Good government is necessary to a good country. 
 The doctor was delighted with his patient. AVe are 
 all under divine jurisdiction. It is a stupendous 
 statement, but nevertheless it is true. Such things 
 are too sublime for us to realize. Do not let your 
 expectations be too sanguine. He was -very much 
 exasperated by the cross-examination he was subjected 
 to. The superintendent and his assistant were both 
 very busy at the time. In all cases of * this kind he 
 suffers the blame for adverse results, no matter how 
 fully his superiors have endorsed his course in ad- 
 vance. There is no subject so taken to the extreme 
 as is religion. It was not of sufficient importance to 
 mention. The English language has this advantage 
 over others, that it is spoken in nearly every 
 country in the world. The supplies of the men in 
 the exploration gave out. He was a member of an 
 evangelical denomination. Eternal is thy truth, O 
 God ! All things are possible to him that belie veth. 
 The document was complete except the signature. 
 Education begins the gentleman, but reading and 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 233 
 
 good company must finish him. Good order is the 
 foundation of good society. People cannot improve 
 when they have no example to follow except their 
 own. He gave a few dollars to the doctor, who 
 delivered him from danger. Astonishment was de- 
 picted in her countenance. He was preferred to the 
 professor of languages. The superintendent was soon 
 at leisure, however, and being satisfied with my 
 appearance and references, engaged me at once. I 
 occupied some time in examining the peculiar object. 
 That gentleman is a distinguished member of parlia- 
 ment. That is not a parallel situation. However, I 
 will refer it to the manager, uninfluenced by any 
 opinion of my own, and profit by his decision. The 
 witness hesitated with some embarrassment, and 
 seemed anxious to equivocate, before answering the 
 question. Another important movement was effected, 
 and the transaction was considerably promoted. The 
 ornamentation of the entablature was beautiful in the 
 extreme. The plaintiff appeared in the supreme court 
 for a, continuance of the litigation. The magistrate 
 fined the delinquent creditor five hundred dollars. 
 There were two parties to the controversy, the doctors 
 and the professors. This is my private opinion pub- 
 llcly expressed. The whole kingdom favored the 
 measure for annexation. The wily politician was the 
 largest owner of stock in the defunct corporation. I 
 have perfect confidence in his judgment and integrity. 
 Impenetrable darkness pervaded the cavern. " Give 
 thanks at the remembrance of His holiness." They 
 have very sanguine hopes in the future of the enter- 
 prise. Afflictions are said to be given to us in 
 mercy. It is difficult to possess ease and great fame 
 at the same time. The physician effects quite a large 
 number of cures. The treasurer received ten thousand 
 dollars to balance account. 
 
2.34 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 (387) THE ORGANIZATION OF AMERICAN 
 EDUCATION : 
 
 MM 
 
 c. 
 
 'l "I 
 
 . i; L ' .1 
 
 IP 
 
 7 
 
 , u ^ \ 
 
 ill 
 
 J ' 
 
PUACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 285 
 
 V 
 
 XI 
 
 V 
 
 V f - JL 
 
 -r 
 
 \P-7- 
 
 u 
 
 .vv 
 
 \. ' 
 
 J > 
 
 "7 
 
 "1 
 
 / 3 Ss V 
 
230 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 \ 
 
 t 
 
 * e * 
 
 V 
 
 N v <0 "V 
 
 \ 
 
 -I "f ^ ' b 
 
 ~~? ^r ^ 
 
I'UACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 237 
 
 V 
 
 \ 
 
 ) N a x b p 
 
 -iri |P 
 
 r 
 
 -\ < 
 
 J 
 
 r/i 
 
 VjjCfo (A 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 r 7^ 
 
238 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 V 
 
 .< ^s... c ~S 
 
 (I *) 
 
 ; ^ ^> 
 
 C (T) . 
 
 V r \<^'&\st( S~ 
 
 J... ....)>....\/\.. C L... 
 
 .\ 
 
PRACTICAL 8IIOKTHAXD. 
 
 239 
 
 2 * [k ^ \ n 
 
 r>...' 
 
 \ I/ 
 ^ 
 
 4* 
 
 ^ c...,f v j 
 
 S 
 
240 
 
 INSTRUCTION IX 
 
 -N 
 
 c\ 
 A 
 
 O )L 
 
 v . 
 
 4 
 
 . > r. 
 
 ( ' ^ I 
 
 ( , 
 
 ^ J- >^ X. 
 
 . U^" L 
 
 "A. 
 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 241 
 
 1/1...L, 
 
 I SJ2 ,\ 
 
 6 p 
 
 A "V/*-J Jl v 
 
 >> V^ o/ 5 
 
242 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 .x.x.x. 
 
 
 I 
 
 C...t..--/t.. 
 
 < *- x > 
 
 L ^ 
 
 ..X...X.X 
 
PRACTICAL SllOUTHAJS'I) 
 
 248 
 
 v 
 
 5 x- 
 
 ./....r. 
 
 .. 
 A! 
 
 C ..O 
 
 y?.. 
 
 y. 
 
 .^... r ...:. i hi. 
 
244 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 <k. 
 -A 
 
 P ex 
 ..\ ) 
 
 D . 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 245 
 
 (388) SYLLABICATION FOR SHORTHAND: 
 
 So frequent allusion is made to the syllable in this 
 manual, it is important the student should understand 
 its bearing in the structure of words, in order to know 
 what shorthand treatment to apply. 
 
 A syllable is produced by a single impulse of the 
 voice. The syllables of a word are not necessarily 
 separated by an absolute cessation of sound, but by a 
 weakening of the stress at the end of one syllable, 
 succeeded by a fresh impulse for the next. Accent is 
 more than ordinary stress of voice. 
 
 The principles of syllabication appear somewhat 
 complicated to the young inquirer; and for the pur- 
 poses of this instructor a simple exposition of the 
 subject will be attempted, the aim being to bring 
 shorthand .practice into harmony with the general 
 structure of words, and so make the acquirement of 
 brief writing easier for those who have only a super- 
 ficial knowledge of language or, we might say, a 
 knowledge derived from usage more than from inves- 
 tigation. Premising that the intelligent student knows 
 how to pronounce English, whether by rote or reason, 
 this presentation of syllabication will be made to start 
 from that beginning. 
 
 The question may be asked : If shorthand can be 
 written syllabically, why will not the regular rules 
 serve for the guidance of the student of stenography ? 
 A partial reply is, that the said rules are based on the 
 conventional spelling, which oftentimes has no par- 
 ticular phonetic value, while shorthand follows quite 
 faithfully the sounds of speech. The one may be 
 called iri-iltci) syllabication; the other, spoken. Then, 
 too, it is not claimed that strictly syllabic shorthand 
 
246 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 can* at all times be written. Such is not entirely the 
 fact ; yet, out of a large number of words furnished 
 with syllabic forms, less than one per cent were found 
 impracticable. So it may be declared that syllabic 
 shorthand, when words are correctly and logically 
 written, is so overwhelmingly a possibility as to make 
 a simple utilization of the idea a most potent aid in 
 popularizing shorthand, because it can be made a 
 favoring feature of primary instruction. 
 
 It will be readily inferred that the great object to be 
 gained is legibility ; and the legibility of the shorthand 
 outline is promoted in the following way : The inquirer 
 is supposed to know what the syllabic division of a 
 word may be, and next what the stroke is for short- 
 hand as herein taught. Then according to the simple 
 rule (see Sect. 117, Step VI.), to write a stroke for a 
 syllable, a syllabic structure is given to the shorthand 
 form by substitution. The notion of a vowel enters 
 into the syllabic idea ; therefore such a structure imjiUc.^ 
 the vowel, making the absence of the vowel sign endur- 
 able ; and with the result, that the whole outline thus 
 logically builded spells the word. 
 
 Knowing the composition of the shorthand stroke, 
 the next inquiry should be how to divide for S3 r llables. 
 Vowels are naturally the bearers of stress of voice, 
 and no syllable is separable which does not contain a 
 vowel. A vowel alone may constitute a syllable, but 
 a single consonant cannot. 
 
 The nature and kind of vowels which may appear 
 are the leading factors in determining syllabic division. 
 
 *A good many words like redeem, intent, indicate, etc., can 
 be Avritten syllabically and the outline be practical ; though 
 it has become the custom to write them otherwise, the 
 logical form having been lost sight of in the endeavor for 
 brevity. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 247 
 
 The following rules will in a general way explain 
 the syllabication of English words : 
 
 RULE I. (a) The Long Vowels e a. a. (as in 
 arm) a (all) 6 66, or u in tu-mor, and the Diph- 
 thongs ai oi eu ou, do not take with them in the same 
 syllable the single consonant following. Observe the 
 words, ha-tred, fa-ther, dra-ma, He-brew, va-ry, 
 ju-ry, neu-ter. 
 
 (b) Two or more consonants following Long 
 Vowels are not commonly joined to the long vowel; 
 as A-pril, pre-scribe, be-shrew. 
 
 (c) The Long Vowels, as modified and shortened 
 in unaccented syllables, are considered as Long Vowels 
 in shorthand writing ; as in miscella-ny, re-treat, 
 po-litical, so-cie-ty. 
 
 Exceptions : 
 
 (w) This (a) gives way to Rule IV., when the deriva- 
 tive retains the original spelling, accentuation and meaning 
 of the root; as in bound-ed, hat-er, mak-er. 
 
 (x) Where the pronunciation demands a division of the 
 consonants, the first goes with the first vowel, as in Rule 
 II. Note the words an-gel, cam-brie, cham-ber, hol-ster, 
 Cam-bridge, moun-tain. 
 
 (y) N, L or V, followed by the sound of Y CYuh), is 
 treated as in the words al-ien, gen-ius, un-ion, behav-ior, 
 sen-ior. 
 
 (//) ST after a long vowel is divided as in has-ty. 
 eas-tern, pas-try; though etymologic division, as in hast-ed, 
 past-er, west-ern, wast-ing (see Rule IV.), is not im- 
 proper. 
 
 RULE II. (a) The Short Vowel* a (as in at) 
 a (ask) e (her) i 6 (box) u (but) 65 (look) (or 
 u in full), attract the single consonant which follows 
 to the same syllable with them, as hab-it, par-ent, 
 liv-id,sub-urb, proph-et (ph=f) epidem-ic, ex-act. 
 
 (b) Likewise the first of two or more consonants 
 which may follow, as ser-vant, en-dure, pet-rify, 
 
248 INSTRUCTION IX 
 
 sub-lime, fil-ter, but-ter, lat-tice. Though this (b) 
 gives way to Rule IV. in words like trans- mit, 
 trans-act. 
 
 Exceptions : 
 
 (x) I 66 or u exclude the following consonant from 
 the sann- syllable with them, as pres-i-dent, tu-tor-i-al. 
 fru-gal-i-ty a as in a-broad, di-a-dem, dis-a-gree, comes 
 under this exception also. 
 
 (y) If the following consonant sound is SIT, ZII or .T, 
 a different division is required, as in spe-cial, vi-sion, 
 re-li-gion. (See Rule I\ T .) 
 
 RULE III. In consecutive unaccented syllables, 
 with a consonant between the vowels, it is often a 
 matter of indifference as far as concerns the pronun- 
 ciation in ordinary speech, whether the consonant 
 sound be regarded as attaching more closely to the 
 preceding or to the following syllable; ns in nomi- 
 nal, defi-nite, felo-ny, phanta-sy, secu-lar, adju- 
 tant. (See also note, page 250.) 
 
 RULE IV. (a) Prefixes and Affixes* (or in 
 shorthand writing syllables considered as such, like 
 -cial, -ture, -hood) are generally separated from the 
 remainder of the word, as hat-ing, con-strain, bak- 
 er, trans-fix, na-tion, aw-ful-ly. 
 
 (b) In ordinary writing this principle may be 
 restricted to derivatives which retain the spelling and 
 pronunciation of the original words, which is not the 
 case in ab-sti-nence from ab-stain; but in short- 
 hand one or the other alternative is followed, accord- 
 ing to the fluency of form resulting which is the 
 main consideration. 
 
 (c) When the syllable affixed causes a doubling 
 of the final consonant of the stern, the added conso- 
 
 * Double suffixes are syllabically divided, and principally 
 according to the general rules. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 249 
 
 nant goes with the added syllable, as glad-den, rob- 
 ber, fat-ten, sub-mis-sive. 
 
 (d) For -ed (the termination for past tense), it 
 is recommended to follow the syllabic division of 
 etymology in all cases, in order to secure uniformity 
 of outline. According to which an-te-da-ted would 
 become an-te-dat-ed ; emancipat-ed, etc. 
 
 RULE V. (a) Double Vowels which constitute 
 diphthongs are never divided into syllables, though 
 two consecutive vowels, sounded separately, belong to 
 different syllables, as a-orta, moi-ety, abey-ance. 
 
 (b) Digraphs or trigraphs (i.e., two or three letters 
 with but one syllabic sound) are not divided, as th, 
 sh, sch, spr, etc. 
 
 (c) In writing or printing, * no syllable is separable 
 which does not include a vowel. Thus chasm and 
 prism are treated as monosyllables. 
 
 (d) Members of a compound word, which are 
 themselves English words with meanings recognized 
 in the compound, are separated in syllabication, as 
 mill-stone, foot-stool, ball-room. 
 
 It is perhaps unfortunate for Syllabication, and the 
 formulation of rules for it, that there are two methods 
 followed, namely, the syllabication of pronunciation, 
 and the syllabication of etymology. It is certainly 
 unfortunate that in the practice of shorthand writing 
 the demand for distinguishable outlines and cursive 
 direction overmasters the precepts of theory. 
 
 Shorthand (Pitmanic) is not an exact science. 
 There is a degree of inexactness in syllabic division 
 
 * For the edification of the typewriter it may be added 
 that by printers' usage le is not allowed to stand alone in 
 the last syllable, as in a-ble, fee-ble. Neither can a single 
 vowel be left alone at the end of a line, nor at the beginning 
 of the next line. 
 
250 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 of words. A range is given to opinion* in both sub- 
 jects, and doubtless the inequalities of one about 
 balance those of the other. 
 
 Nevertheless, there is enough of stability left in both 
 to establish reciprocal relations; and the value of such 
 a connection is considerable to the student who would 
 learn shorthand by the aid of the reason as well :is by 
 memory, and to the instructor who would teach the 
 fickle art with thoroughness and despatch. 
 
 We are indebted to the excellent treatises on Syllabica- 
 tion and kindred topics to be found in the International 
 Dictionary for substance, and to Dr. L. J. CAMPBELL for 
 criticism while preparing this article. 
 
 (389) ANGLES AND DIRECTION OF 
 STROKES : 
 
 Angles. When a shorthand outline is not grace- 
 ful, and the direction of the steins backward, its angles 
 uncertain, the junction of its strokes awkward, it may 
 at once be decided that the character is wrong. It 
 certainly has mechanical faults, and it is the mechani- 
 cal, rather than the intellectual, that rules under this 
 head. Forward strokes are an element of progress. 
 certain junctions assist the laws of motion, distinct 
 
 * " The division of a simple syllable into a consonant and 
 a vowel, in as far as we are to imagine both as independent 
 of each other, is only an artilicial one. In natnre, vowel 
 and consonant determine each other in such a manner that 
 they form to onr ear only one undivided whole. If, there- 
 fore, the writing is to reproduce this natural result, it will 
 be more correct to treat the vowels not at all as proper 
 letters, but only as modifications of the consonants." S > 
 writes Wilhelm von H'.unboldt ; and onr inference is that 
 the best syllabication i.s that which <rroups the sounds most 
 naturally as they are voiced. Unquestionably the syllabica- 
 tion for shorthand is the syllaiiictitinH of pronunciation. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 251 
 
 angles conduce to speed and legibility, and grace of 
 form leads to easy writing of the same : therefore a 
 combination of all these features is the ideal form. 
 
 The necessity for good angles and progressive 
 strokes is a vital one. An analysis of outlines de- 
 velops the fact that acute angles are the swiftest and 
 most legible, and that every departure from the acute 
 toward the obtuse increases the difficulties of writing 
 and reading in a direct ratio. Acute angles maintain 
 their individuality when written rapidly, while obtuse 
 degenerate into curves under like circumstances. 
 
 An illustration of this will be found in the following 
 simple junctions : 
 
 Slow angles 
 
 _<1 
 
 A further illustration will be found in the instruc- 
 tion given for the management of the ticks in Sects. 
 97-102. ' 
 
 Good angles at the junction of strokes conduce to 
 clean-cut, legible forms ; and to secure them it is not 
 considered evil procedure to vary the outline to a 
 marked degree. It is reasonable to expect a fail- 
 average of undesirable angles among the great number 
 of possible combinations in stenographic writing ; and 
 were the segment of the circle and the different direc- 
 tions of the straight line the only material, the situa- 
 tion would be more involved ; but the existence of 
 hooks, circles, alternate direction of strokes, etc., 
 makes substitute forms possible, and the object gained 
 is practical shorthand practical in the sense that it is 
 facile to write and legible to read. 
 
252 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 Some of the more undesirable of the simple junctions 
 are : 
 
 Theoretic Form. Practical Form. 
 
 \ ^ V 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 V_>^^ banana \^ 
 
 ^ ( 
 
 [ earth \ 
 
 s> _ 
 
 ^_ r"i>m ^ 
 
 ^~N "^ 
 
 I^^>-NV admire V- ^^ 
 
 ) 
 
 >, ^ 
 
 survey ^~ 
 
 ^ I 
 
 1 , nrtifii'f 1 \.D 
 
 o \ 
 
 Vo 
 
 X,/ <7i)i/ix/; ^"\S 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 ^ddnnrrft.p _J 
 
 *< 
 
 t 
 
 v^-^7 enrich ^rf 
 
 ^ r 
 
 C\ M 
 
 v * rnliglit.cn d 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 \ , defend t^ 
 
 , ^ 
 
 >1 
 
 1 achievement 
 
 
 v^ 
 
 NOTE The above does not exhaust the possibilities of 
 unangnlar junctions, but the student will get an idea of 
 what to avoid. 
 
PRACTICAL SIIOHTIIAND. 253 
 
 .Thus is illustrated a few of the " slow " angles, con- 
 trasted with the alternate procedure. It is clearly a 
 matter of shorthand mechanics, where the more literary 
 attributes of the art have to yield place to physical de- 
 mands. The substitute forms are likely to offend 
 analogy, syllabication, and all that ; but the impetus 
 of swift writing allows no obstacle in its arrogant 
 path. 
 
 It is perhaps as good an example as can be fur- 
 nished of the difference between theoretical and practical 
 shorthand : the one phonography, the shorthand of 
 definite principles and reasonable rules ; the other the 
 shorthand of expediency difficult to acquire, but 
 when attained, capable of the swiftest execution. 
 
 Direction of strokes. The forward direction of 
 strokes should be sought for wherever an option, is 
 granted. Backward strokes should be avoided as far 
 as possible, although it must be stated that the need 
 for a quick angle is often greater than for particular 
 stroke direction. It is a happy event when both are 
 favorable. 
 
 Of two characters representing a like situation, one 
 straight and the other curved, the former would be the 
 better in advanced writing, providing its direction is 
 fluent. We say advanced writing, having in mind the 
 double directions for R and L which the student when 
 in the formative stage should use ; but as the subject 
 becomes less confusing, a transition may be made 
 from the exactness of theory into the freedom of prac- 
 tice. (See Note, Sect. 144.) A good example of 
 proper stroke direction is shown by the way the ticks 
 arc thrown off at a tangent from the circle-S. (Sect. 
 !!'.) and Blackboard Illustration No. 5.) 
 
 While upon this subject, one point is worthy of 
 notice, namely, the difference of treatment required 
 
254 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 for pen * and pencil. The pen can not naturally execute 
 a shaded curve in an upward direction, while the pen- 
 cil is not limited in its action ; therefore the direction 
 of strokes is sometimes modified to suit the writing in- 
 strument, although in a very slight degree. The 
 words yield, wield, seldom, which will be found in 
 the list of word-signs, are examples in point. 
 
 Good form in shorthand writing consists in an 
 agreeable combination of good angles and cursive 
 strokes ; yet the existence of the contrary is a neces- 
 sary evil, because the teachings of theory are not suf- 
 ficient for the demands of practice. 
 
 Therefore we believe that the dynamics of shorthand 
 forms should be a part of early instruction ; and rather 
 than peremptorily command the student to write such 
 and such outlines because they are expedient, it is 
 wiser to teach him that certain angles are incompatible 
 with speed, that the best strokes are somewhat de- 
 pendent upon direction ; and then the careful writer 
 will make such a selection of material as will lead to 
 characteristic outlines. Painstaking will be required 
 to accomplish this, and experience to prove the inva- 
 riable wisdom of the choice ; but if this inquiry be 
 cultivated from the beginning, the student will grow 
 in ability, until his action in this respect will become 
 as natural as in the other operations of shorthand 
 procedure. 
 
 Ten notes are superior to pencil, because the contrasts 
 between light-line and shaded strokes are sharper and all 
 angles can be made more distinct ; besides which the springy 
 action of the pen lessens fatigue. The beginner derives an 
 immediate advantage from the use of the pen, though the 
 expert writer experiences a little difficulty changing from 
 the pencil; but it is merely transient. It is true there is 
 a smoothness about pencil writing; but it is equally true 
 that it blunts the hand to an appreciation of fine chirog- 
 raphy. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 255 
 
 (390) DISTINGUISHED WORDS: 
 
 Words of different meaning, though containing the 
 same consonant sounds, are of quite common occur- 
 rence. In advanced writing, when vowels are omitted, 
 there is taken away the best identifier of the word, and 
 it is sometimes necessary to devise distinguishable 
 outlines by a manipulation of available material. 
 
 This branch of the subject has always been prolific 
 of trouble, because the language is so broad and the 
 scope of shorthand material somewhat limited. If no 
 thought is taken of word characteristics, arbitrary 
 variations of outline will be made, or the accepted 
 forms will appear so to the mind. This phase of the 
 situation is a difficult one to manage one of the many 
 dilliculties attending the unintelligent study of short- 
 hand. 
 
 But the danger from conflicting words is greatly 
 reduced by an observance of analogy, syllabication, 
 the timely application of position, the double use of 
 R and L, or by more artificial distinctions, like that 
 of Pr for />re-, and P-Ruh for per-. 
 
 Some of the more dangerous word-forms, unless 
 made to differ for a reason, appear as follows : 
 
 Syllabication : 
 
 Support, separate repres- 
 sion, reparation police, \S& X/*"') 
 policy tariff, terrify exe- ~~ 
 crate, excoriate parcel, , e I V V-^ 
 perusal invasion, innova- 
 tion funeral, funereal. 
 
25fi INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 Analogy : 
 Proportion (like portion, f \ <\ 
 
 Prshnn^ nrpnaratirm nnrlp. x \ \ 
 
 Prshun) preparation 
 
 fined (find), indefinite for- . 
 
 ward, froward differ, defer V^, c \ t\ k n 
 
 valuation, violation. ^ ) ] \j 
 
 uR, Run uL, Luh : 
 
 J-^> 
 
 Turn, train fierce, furious . 
 penury, opener approach, v \ cv 
 
 perch hardly, readily ) / 
 display, dispel. T ^ (jb <i. 
 
 Pre (Pr) Per (P-Ruh) : 
 
 Pretend, pertained perhaps 
 
 (p'raps), purpose prosecute, <\ 
 persecute Prussia, Persia o~ 
 prosper, perspire pre- 
 pared, purport. 
 
 \ \S\ 
 
 There is no strong reason why the above outlines 
 should be imputed arbitrary, or particularly difficult. 
 Certain situations seem to prevail which a rational 
 treatment covers, and that is the essence of it. Out- 
 side of these examples there are a few conflicting forms 
 which call for somewhat arbitrary action, but the 
 number is reduced to a minimum by these teachings. 
 
PRACTICAL SH011TIIAXU. 257 
 
 (391) ANALOGY: 
 
 Analogy is likeness, and its application in short- 
 hand is mainly in the direction that derivatives 
 should follow the primitive, and that composite out- 
 lines should exhibit the characteristics of the compo- 
 nent parts. 
 
 For an illustration notice the word write (Ruh-T), 
 some derivatives of which would be 
 
 - vi 
 
 Presumably _ and _ are quicker forms 
 to execute than the above that is, after the habit has 
 been formed ; but while manually facile, they are 
 mentally a variation -from a preconceived notion. The 
 mind has to evolve a new thought : and though the 
 gain or loss in point of time is infinitesimal in either case, 
 yet it is a principle at issue ; and as between the forms 
 the analogical one is the better, because it follows the 
 primitive as far as the primitive goes, and the additions 
 appear as such. 
 
 The words minister and ministration obviously lead 
 
 to administer and administration Jzsz. rr>fe? , and 
 
 besides being analogical, the latter form enables the 
 writer to distinguish between administration and 
 
 demonstration ....:^..., w r ords having the same conso- 
 le 
 
 nant elements. This is not a distinction without a 
 difference ; the difference actually exists, and the 
 unlikeness of the words is clearly apparent. 
 
258 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 Take the case of a compound word. (See Sects. 
 155 and 348.) Granting that iNG, wRuhd and Nd 
 are good forms for thing, ward and under, then the 
 outlines given in the sections cited exhibit just that 
 analogy of form which leads to easy shorthand writing. 
 It would be profitless to vary the outlines under such 
 circumstances, even though an improved mechanical 
 structure were thereby attained. 
 
 A common violation of analogy (and syllabication) 
 occurs in writing -TED for the familiar affix -ED (past 
 tense). Not-ed is sometimes carelessly made no-ted; 
 vot-ed, vo-ted. These outlines should preserve the 
 root forms, as it is possible to do, and thus illustrate 
 the direct affinity that analogy in shorthand has with 
 the relation which exists between primitive and deriva- 
 tive in language. Outline formation is thus made less 
 dependent upon memory, and becomes a subject of 
 reason ; for it is by process of logic that the character 
 is builded, proceeding from the root, and making the 
 resultant form exhibit each step of increment. 
 
 The function of analogy is to assist also in a quicker 
 and better acquirement of the art, by reducing the 
 quantity of new material, and by those promptings cf 
 suggestion which are the best aid to memory. At the 
 same time, analogy will have no attractions for the 
 automatic writer, who perceives his outlines wholly by 
 the eye, and stores them in the mind without having 
 exerted thought in their formation. Such a writer 
 will continue to rely upon memory, and memory over- 
 taxed will often be fickle. 
 
 Therefore we would recommend the beginner to pay 
 earnest heed to the teachings of analogy ; for by 
 building well on a sure foundation the shorthand 
 structure will be made to endure. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 259 
 
 The following are a few examples in point : 
 
 J 
 
 . _ ^> _ Nat-ure, natural, natu- 
 ^ rally, native, unnatural, 
 
 a \ ^_s*^ supernatural, preternatural, 
 
 \>^/ \yx _ innate. 
 
 L | n Tract, detract, extract, 
 
 (_ L contract, attractive. 
 
 Not-e, notify, noted, un- 
 == 1 ^"l -> noted, notification. 
 
 ~^ ^~^_p Mean, meaner, meanest, 
 
 -1 meanness. 
 
 (o ^ ^f^ L (^J> 
 
 , -A Fin-e, finest, finery, fin- 
 
 ^_^^ \ able, fineness, infinity, in- 
 
 v> yJ finitive (word-sign), finish. 
 
 Of course the mechanical limitations which so beset 
 all shorthand writing bestow also upon this branch a 
 share of their aggravations, as will be discovered in 
 the business of shorthand writing. Analogy of form 
 cannot always be maintained ; obstacles to it are im- 
 practicable angles and direction of strokes ; yet the 
 exceptions are so few they do not impair the rule. 
 
 It is an excellent principle in shorthand writing 
 that the best results accrue if the same thing be invari- 
 ably written the same, whether it be prefix, root, word- 
 sign or phrase. The teachings of analogy are in this 
 direction. The possibility of such writing is far greater 
 than has commonly been supposed, and it should be 
 the earnest aim of the student to follow every possi- 
 bility that unmistakably leads to ease of execution 
 and legibility. 
 
2r>0 INSTRUCTION IX 
 
 (392) PHRASING : 
 
 There are, to our thinking, two ways of approach- 
 ing the subject of phrasing. It must be either studied 
 in a simple aspect, coincidently with the investigation 
 of the principles of shorthand, but made so little 
 obtrusive as not to detract from the thoroughness of 
 that inquiry; or else entirely neglected, while the 
 foundations of shorthand are being laid, and then 
 taken up as one of the embellishments of proficiency. 
 
 This conclusion is arrived at because the phrase 
 occupies such a peculiar position. It is indeed one 
 of the elaborations of the art. Many do without it 
 altogether and get on sufficiently well, while others 
 employ it with ease and effect. The ability to phrase 
 cleverly may or may not be a matter of temperament ; 
 but certain it is the beginner should not be attracted 
 from sober study by the allurements of phrase writing ; 
 and on the other hand, no writer can be said to have 
 compassed all the possibilities of shorthand if phras- 
 ing has never been attempted. 
 
 As we have before written, the advantages of the 
 phrase are in the saving of pen liftings, and in bring- 
 ing the thought to a visible focus. A knowledge of 
 the context always assists the writer. The phrase 
 outline is a striking illustration of this idea; it not 
 only presents the forms together, but in a most 
 helpful juxtaposition. 
 
 Phrase writing has its possibilities and its limita- 
 tions. Its possibilities lie in the direction of those 
 liberties granted to all outline formation. The phrase 
 must be fluent in structure. If it can be said that 
 the phrase is a composite outline derived from agree- 
 able elements, then it is equally true that the derivative 
 should partake of the character of its parts, and be 
 identified with them by analogy. The limitations of 
 
PUACTICAL SHORTHAND. 261 
 
 the phrase are equally strong. Do not phrase to 
 excess. There should be conservative treatment of 
 the subject. The tendency should not be to weave 
 arabesques of shorthand delineation, but rather that 
 of utilizing possibilities of combination for those 
 characters that join well and profitably. Besides 
 which, there are grammatical limitations as well as 
 physical. 
 
 Some specific word groups available for phrase 
 writing are : 
 
 The subject of a sentence and 
 iti qualifier: 
 
 The verb and pronomenal sub- 
 ject; Ihe verb and its object: 
 
 The p"incipal verb and its 
 auxiliary : 
 
 Clauses intrjduced by prepo- ' *\^X "1 -, ^""fL 
 
 sitions or conjunctions: 
 
 Adverbial Clauses: 
 
 Sometimes the technicalities * of 
 a business : 
 
 Commercial terms, common ex- 
 pressions, extended titles, 
 
 TRANSLATION OF ABOVE PHRASES : 
 
 1. This notice, human nature, these things, 
 that circumstance, his opinion. 
 
 * It is generally in order to make phrase forms and con- 
 tractions for terms and expressions of frequent occurrence 
 in any writing. 
 
2G2 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 2. We have'been, it can be, consider the matter, 
 call his attention. 
 
 3. There must be, have been received, may have 
 been observed, we shall make. 
 
 4. In every respect, on this occasion, as fast as, 
 of course it is impossible. 
 
 5. By the way, at all events, at any rate, on the 
 contrary, inasmuch as. 
 
 6. 10-Paymeut Life, Reversionary Additions, 
 Policy contract. 
 
 7. Compound interest, House of Representatives, 
 Gentlemen of the Jury, Act of Congress. 
 
 These are proper phrase situations, and they demon- 
 strate the principal features of the subject, namely : 
 
 1. That grammatical divisions of language, or 
 natural and rhetorical groups of words in speech, are 
 oftenest so to be pictured. 
 
 2. That the best phrase form is one composed of 
 word-signs, or beginning with a word-sign. 
 
 3. That the first* member of the phrase maintains 
 its original position. 
 
 In other respects phrases are governed by the rules 
 regulating all outline formation, and come beneath 
 the restrictions of correct syllabication, analogy, angles 
 and direction of strokes. 
 
 The most earnest advice we can give with respect 
 to phrase writing is be simple ! The following 
 tangles are quite the reverse ; and while they are ex- 
 tremely ingenious combinations of forms, and repre- 
 sent possibilities, still they are not probable in actual 
 
 *A few instances like all-those, we-should-say, where 
 some other member of the phrase governs the position, 
 are exceptions. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 263 
 
 writing performed at a high rate of speed. They 
 might be called curiosities of shorthand literature, 
 and show beautifully what can be done in the direction 
 of phrasing ; but for our purpose they only show what 
 need not be done by the business writer. 
 
 .Under-the-Constitution-of- 
 the-United-States 
 
 In-the-other-parts-of-the- 
 globe 
 
 Becanse-they-were-not-to- 
 be-allowed-to-have 
 
 With-her-main-engine-shaft 
 
 Look-into-those-old-modes- 
 of-parti-coloring-yarn 
 
 That-you-will-also-render- //^^ J? 
 
 his- stay <" 
 
 Quless-there-exist-other- 
 reasons 
 
 1 
 
 Why-we-should-believe-that- loo ( 
 
 the Is*-* 
 
 If phrases like the above are the natural outcome 
 of shorthand proficiency, no exception can be taken : 
 one can only marvel at the development of the art. 
 
 On the other hand, the simple examples that have 
 been presented throughout the steps of this manual 
 illustrate the true function (as we believe) of the 
 phrase ; while, as has been intimated, to ignore phras- 
 ing entirely is not an omission fatal to success. 
 
264 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 (393) SYLLABIC-S. 
 
 Special attention is directed to the new name applied 
 to the character commonly termed " Stroke- S " now 
 calling it SYLLABIC-S, because of the pronounced 
 individuality of its use in this textbook which makes 
 syllabic structure so important a feature. 
 
 In Step VI. precept and examples were given suffi- 
 cient to develop the principle, but now on the following 
 page the idea is presented more fully, in order that its 
 entire scope may be appreciated. 
 
 PLATE A (line 1) asbestos, aspect, associate, 
 acid, assassin, escape, escalade, asparagus, assimi- 
 late, esculent (2) ascetic, ossify, Easter, Eskimo, 
 Quincy, sirocco, escutcheon, racy, syringa (3) 
 simoom, Israel, Isis, eastern, isolate, asterisk, secant, 
 assort, aspersion, currency, ecstacy (4) aspirant, 
 esquire, asteroid, sequence, assent, assume, astute, 
 saucy, serum, syenite, esoteric (5) Sozodont, 
 Sorosis, estrange, Lucy, ostracize, astral, silo, seduce, 
 sapient, Osman, siesta, fancy, fussy (6) satrap, 
 osprey, heresy, sedate, salute, espousal, ostler, 
 assuage, ascend, esprit, sojourn, Suez, assign (7) 
 assets, espionage, espy, ostrich, sodality, suet, 
 astound, esplanade. 
 
 PLATE B illustrates a few cases where the Stroke- S 
 appears still further in its role of vowel-implier, though 
 in slight deviation from the rule. The number of 
 such words is too limited to require a special law. 
 
 (B) Ask, asp, east, used, eased, elocutionist, 
 finest, history, osteology, ostensible, isthmus. 
 
 Reference to Section 121 will show a similar situa- 
 tion, namely, the words cease, assess, size and sizes 
 (to which might be added says, saws, sauce, seize, sues, 
 etc.); but where no vowel implication is needed (MS 
 possessing none) the procedure illustrated by PLATE 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 A. 
 
 i>)i 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 V? 
 
 Lr 
 
 2G5 
 
 L^. 
 
 ^ ^ \ ^ ^ 
 
 v.) ....... C } J ) ..... \l I ..... ) 
 
 a 
 
 C. 
 
 ~3 
 
 G 
 
 ' 
 
 v. 
 
 
 i "~\ 
 V?- k 
 
2Gfi INSTRUCTION IX 
 
 C can obtain, because the execution of the more fluent 
 form makes no sacrifice of legibility : 
 
 (C) Cicily, Ceserea, sausage, sesame, saucer, sis- 
 ter, incisor, systole, season, ancestor. 
 
 But in disregard of the rule and for sake of the 
 angle (see Alternatives, p. 267), theCircle-S takes the 
 place of the stroke exceptionally, to secure a facile 
 form. Plates D and E show such treatment of initial 
 and final syllables : 
 
 (D) Asphalt, aspire, consequent, cyclone, eschew, 
 esthetic, escort, sober, escheat, secure, superb, solicit, 
 severe, silent, social, select, secrecy, cycle, cedar, 
 supreme. (E) Controversy, galaxy, sumptuous, 
 obvious, Poughkeepsie, gorgeous, contingency, as- 
 siduous, courteous, serious, previous, stringency. 
 
 (394) ALTERNATIVE PROCEDURE. 
 
 The remarkable prevalence of Alternative Procedure 
 in Pitmanic shorthand is a prolific source of difficulty. 
 At the same time it may be some mitigation of the 
 difficulty to explain briefly and to classify. 
 
 Many words in the language can be but should not 
 be written by the same outline. For purposes of 
 distinguishment a variation of form should be made, 
 and Alternatives of POSITION take place, as in the 
 words : 
 
 PLATE A Absolute, obsolete ; theist, atheist ; 
 promise, premise ; oldest, eldest ; till, until; infliction, 
 inflection ; daughter, debtor ; adopt, adapt ; greatly, 
 gradually ; dissolute, desolate. 
 
 Note that the vowel does not wholly govern posi- 
 tion. In advanced shorthand the need for distin- 
 guishment occasions Position quite as often as the 
 vowel. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 Y 
 
 V 
 
 \ Vri 
 
 I I |\ 
 
 Iff. .......... L....J 
 
 2G7 
 
 V 
 
 > 
 
 . 
 I 
 
 ./. 
 
 \ 
 
 L 
 
 v 
 
 s,.. 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
2G8 INSTRUCTION' IX 
 
 Alternatives of Distinguishable Outlines, as : 
 
 PLATE B Proceed, pursued; fiscal, physical; 
 pattern, patron ; poor, pure ; property, propriety ; 
 probation, prohibition ; prefer, proffer ; decease, dis- 
 ease ; abundant, abandoned. 
 
 It is an axiom that the angle (see Section 104) has 
 the most to do with the difference between theoretical 
 and practical shorthand : hence come 
 
 Alternatives for Improved Angular Junction : 
 
 PLATE C Deficit, denial, continue, agent, pink, 
 mink, Melton, Putnam, intimation, mantel. 
 
 Alternatives of Prefix Junction ; 
 
 PLATE D Unsullied, unsanitary; forgive, fore- 
 warn, forego ; almost, always ; unrelenting, unrepin- 
 ing; unlatch, enliven, unladylike; withheld, withdraw, 
 without. 
 
 Alternatives of Affix Junction : 
 
 PLATE E Pliable, visible; recipient, respondent; 
 toughest, neatest, interest; inward, outward; native, 
 creative; require, acquire, inquire; and-of, hereof, 
 whereof, thereof ; darkness, kindness ; endowment, 
 ornament; wherever, whichever; whereto, thereto, 
 unto, onto ; observance, radiance ; peeping, seeing ; 
 bountiful, doubtful, careful. 
 
 Again, there is danger that a gain in speed will not 
 compensate for an involved mental operation, but we 
 have 
 
 Alternatives of Brevity vs. Syllabic Consistency : 
 
 PLATE F Redeem, affidavit, retail, anticipate, 
 predict, indicate, indent, indignity, intent. 
 
 Then there are Alternatives occasioned by the 
 practical need for halving, or sometimes not ; tome- 
 times the Con-dot, or sometimes not; sometimes 
 Lengthening, sometimes not ; Prefixes or Affixes some- 
 times joined, sometimes not; sometimes the H- stroke, 
 sometimes the H-tick, often neither; sometimes the 
 
n:\rnr.\i. siroKTHAxn. 2G9 
 
 Hook for perfect coalescence, sometimes not and 
 so on. 
 
 PLATE G Enter, entertain ; selfish, selfwill ; 
 fundamental, regimental; moulded, needed; physi- 
 ology, phrenology; commiserate, commerce; term, 
 trim ; governorship, courtship ; hark, hist ; wisp, 
 whisk ; obstacle, refraction. 
 
 (395) VOWEL IMPLICATION. 
 
 It cannot be denied that the actual representation of 
 the dots and dashes which stand for the vowel sounds 
 gives to graphic shorthand a certain definiteness it 
 might not otherwise acquire ; and yet experts the 
 world over have proved that such measures for legi- 
 bility are incompatible with swift writing, and have 
 resolutely discarded them. 
 
 At the same time there is a method of outline build- 
 ing which makes their absence fairly tolerable : namely, 
 that which makes a strong implication take the place 
 of the actual and visible signs. 
 
 Position. Position generally is but an imperfect 
 vowel implier, though third Position is perhaps more 
 definite than the others, because it has the duty of 
 implying the common initial vowel a which, like all 
 initial vowels, it is important to discover quickly. 
 
 PLATE 'A. Await (wait), awake (wake), apparent 
 (parent), affect (effect), adjust (just), accompany 
 (company), attend (tend), admire (demur), advice 
 (device), amend (mend), opposite (up-set), attest 
 (test), access (excess), apparition (operation), assign, 
 assume, assumption, assembly, assort. 
 
 The words above in the parentheses are the 2d 
 position words of the same outline. The last five are 
 a few Syllabic-S outlines properly, but which may be 
 
270 INSTRUCTION* IX 
 
 expressed quite safely in this way. Other suggestions 
 of Position are too familiar to require comment, although 
 it may be well to remind the young writer that the 
 expert cares less and less for the promptings of Po- 
 sition, relying more upon forms lineally characteristic. 
 
 Stroke Indication. A stronger vowel implier 
 than Position is stroke manipulation, which is a 
 syllabic matter according to this textbook. Any 
 expedient which shows the syllable is a vowel implier 
 indefinite maybe as regards the exact shade of vo- 
 calization, but sufficiently suggestive for all practical 
 purposes. Under this head first of all must come the 
 principle a stroke for a syllable or as many 
 strokes as there are syllables. No syllable can be 
 conceivable which does not contain a vowel ; therefore 
 by stroke indication some vowel is implied. 
 
 PLATE B. Fellow, foliage, affiliate, apologize, ap- 
 paratus, resiliency, policy, manufactory, monarchy. 
 Immortal, immoderate, immigrate, immaterial, im- 
 moral, immemorial, immutable, imminent. 
 
 Note that stroke indication is preferred to Position 
 for words like those of the last group. 
 
 Syllabic- S is a strong vowel implier, concerning 
 which it is only necessary to refer to page 264. 
 
 Two Strokes R and L. More definite impli- 
 cation is attained by the two directions of strokes R 
 and L, because they not only show the existence of the 
 vowel sound (as Syllabic-S does) , but they tell by their 
 direction whether it may be heard before or after .the 
 consonant stem. This explains why a logical manage- 
 ment of R and L strokes adds greatly to the legibility 
 of shorthand. Syllabic strokes, Syllabic-S and the 
 dual R and L signification are progressive steps toward 
 a safe rejection of the vowel signs. 
 
1'KACTICAL 8HOKTHAND. 
 
 271 
 
272 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 PLATE C. Loyal, lowly, array, hearer, actually, 
 actual, casual, casually, valiant, violent, fitly, fatal, 
 allay, earl, spoil, compile, allegation, feel, fail, felt, 
 pale, bill, coal. Irrational, irrefutable, irredeemable, 
 irresolute, irrespective, irrevocable, irreverent, irrele- 
 vant. Irreparable, irrepressible, irresistible, irre- 
 sponsible, irremediable, irreclaimable, illegitimate. 
 Irrigate, irritable, erratic, irridescent, arrogate, ir- 
 ruption. Arbor, arabesque, argue, orchestra, argaiid, 
 oracle, ornate, archaic, Czar. 
 
 Exceptions to these are forms purely mechanical 
 (see Sec. 141), for words like origin, orthodox, argent, 
 ardent, orthography, arch, surf, etc. 
 
 The foregoing are mostly syllabic situations which 
 admit of plain treatment under this head, but another 
 class of words exists which are made more legible by 
 stroke management which is not strictly syllabic : 
 namely, 
 
 PLATE D. Erect, elect, alike, elixir, eruption, 
 electric, Erin, irony. 
 
 Still another phase of stroke management has already 
 been illustrated in Section 308, but we allude to it 
 again in passing : 
 
 PLATE E. Beat, bought; date, debt; paid, put; 
 load, let; shade, shut; bait, bet; chewed, etched; 
 code, act ; fate, gate, feed, food, lead. Blade, blood ; 
 plight, plot; braid, bread; bleed, build; crowd, creed. 
 
 The suggestion upon page 172 regarding per r.nd 
 pre deserves a few more examples : 
 
 PLATE F. Provide, pervade ; prediction, perdition ; 
 preclude, percolate ; prosecute, persecute ; Prussian, 
 Persian ; proffered, pervert. 
 
 Thus will be seen a variety of vowel impliers. 
 The writer of shorthand should have grounds for con- 
 
PRACTICAL SHOKTIIAXD. 273 
 
 ficlence in the performance of his pen. His skill 
 should not bo wholly art, but considerably science, 
 at least there should be a minimum of accident in his 
 writing. 
 
 If every stroke can be made to have a design, the 
 intelligent writer will read his notes tomorrow as well 
 as today ; and next mouth or next year he will be 
 equally well able to fathom the mystery. Shorthand 
 to be legible must picture or strongly imply the. 
 essential elements of language. A weak vowel impli- 
 cation is fatal to legibility, and constitutes a grievous 
 fault in any style of shorthand writing. 
 
274 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 (396) EXAMPLES OF FIGURE METHOD. 
 
 (A) Nelson Gordon called by plaintiff. The rec- 
 ords for the years 1838 and 1839 are under my control, 
 and in my possession for 1838 to 1844. Upon exami- 
 nation of my records of assessment for 1838 I find the 
 name of Solomon McFarland. He was assessed in 
 Thorndike for the year 1838 1 House $10.00, 1 
 Horse $20.00, 1 Ox $12.00, 1 Swine $4.00. Total 
 amount of personal $36.00 Total, $46.00 
 
 (B) Cash to witnesses in Morey case July 20, 
 1881 : C. B. Turner, s2 :J2 
 
 (C) From the books I John Huzzey, 2 44 
 am reminded that I made William Henley, 
 
 J M P&VQ 2 04 
 
 the following payments : - 
 
 c M 
 
 3, 1880, $500 00 T . P . Bachelder, 2 (is 
 
 Jan. 19, 1881, 400 00 Examining witnesses, 12 *;; 
 
 May 24, 1881, 300 00 
 
 March 9, 1881, GOO 00 Total, 
 
 (D) Rafts 42 and 45, mixed, contained 51,805 
 feet; rafts 46 and 48 contained 64,136 feet; 65 and 
 69, 63,552 feet; 78 and 82 contained 72,397 feet; 
 86 and 87, 69,479 feet; 113 and 120, 73,803 feet; 
 117 and 118, 80,512 feet. Rafts 67 and 70 con- 
 tained 120,374 feet; 73 and 76, 114,132 feet; 122 
 and 123, 113,679 feet. These last rafts averaged 
 58,023 ; 106 of the rafts averaged 48,858. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 275 
 
 ^ C-c ^o * 
 
 ...^2l..:riA...k.,.-l.A^ _V 
 
 \ ^ si x g-s-z < ^ p 
 
 - ^ -f r:> ? v " 5 "fy- 
 
 u , s. D i e_y ^ 
 
 ^\ r t ^ O .1 e_x ^ <^ _ [j f^, ^ 
 
 T^X o Ao i ^ OK ^ \ 
 
 / ^^ / / --\ 
 
 /x^ \ 
 
 Va ^C...i S? -^rv.H .._\_ 
 
 y ' ^ 
 
 J "^y? ^ZrC'...^. \ 
 
 )> ~~^ !?T!Xx O. ^- 
 
276 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 (397) SUGGESTIONS FOR TYPEWRITER 
 PRACTICE : 
 
 The following suggestions for typewriting are figured 
 to refer to Practical Typewriting, which is the standard 
 text-book of the All-finger method. 
 
 At the outset the inquirer should fully understand 
 his machine what it can do, and what it should do. 
 A typewriter is not a complicated piece of mechan- 
 ism, and the average person can easily come to an 
 understanding of its parts and their functions by an 
 intelligent perusal of the book of directions which ac- 
 companies every machine. This supplemented by the 
 teachings of a good text-book, and the assistance of a 
 qualified teacher at critical moments, will lead to the 
 desired result. 
 
 Have a method of writing ; do not sit down and 
 pound the keys aimlessly. Pay particular attention to 
 the function of the carriage and its parts, the platen, 
 the spacing devices, the scale and margin regulator, 
 the ribbon, etc. Keep the machine clean ; learn how 
 to oil and otherwise care for it. 
 
 Passing to the keyboard, we are confronted with the 
 problem of a technique in typewriting, which is the 
 essence of this method. lu the first place, sit erect, 
 high enough in the chair to admit of the forearm 
 sloping downward the least bit toward the keyboard. 
 Hand position is best secured by dropping the fourth 
 fingers upon P and Q and making the other fingers 
 fall naturally upon the next figures in order, P O I 
 U, for right hand, and Q W E R for the left; then 
 place the right thumb on the space bar, and if the el- 
 bows are close to the body, a good hand position is 
 attained. It can not be too often reiterated that good 
 hand position is the foundation of met/tod in type- 
 writing. 
 
 PRACTICAL TYPEWRITING by Bates Torrey . Fowler & 
 Wells Co., Publ'rs, N.Y., $1.50. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 277 
 
 Touch is the next important feature. In order to 
 begin well, a clear idea of the proper touch should be 
 had, namely, that it is a nervous (in distinction from 
 muscular) staccato movement, followed by a rapid 
 and entire withdrawal of the fingers between each suc- 
 cessive stroke. Inasmuch as the appearance of the 
 writing depends upon the strength of the blow, the 
 letters being very heavy and broad in color, or very 
 faint and light in color according to the force exerted, 
 it will be understood that just the right impression 
 must be the result of skilled finger action. 
 
 (398) SCHEDULE OF PRACTICE: 
 
 Read the early pages of Practical Typewriting to 
 Lesson 1, page 4, also the reference to memorizing key- 
 board, Sect. 18. It may be suggested to commit to 
 memory the letters in both horizontal and vertical 
 rows, or rather slantingly, following the trend of the 
 disks to the right. 
 
 After the right idea of hand position is formed, ac- 
 cording to the foregoing remarks on that point, it may 
 be noted with some surprise that T Y, likewise the keys 
 beneath them, T G B and Y H N, are not covered, 
 simply because in each horizontal row there are more 
 letters than there are fingers to operate them. The 
 disappointment ma}' be but temporary, however, for 
 nature has provided strong index fingers, and the de- 
 cree of the method is that the first and second fingers 
 shall do double duty. The shifting of both hands 
 toward the center when occasion requires is the remedy ; 
 and this accounts for the figuring of the vertical rows 
 of letters, U J M and R F V, which are fingered by 
 1, when the hand is in normal position, but by 2 when 
 the shift brings the first fingers upon Y H N and T 
 G B. This arrangement, however, works no hardship, 
 being rather a convenience. 
 
278 INSTRUCTION IX 
 
 A ONE-MONTH COURSE. 
 
 For first practice, take Lesson 1, which are the 
 4-finger studies of typewriting. Note particularly 
 that the figures refer only to fingers, and that the 
 object of the exercise is to impress three points, 
 namely, memorizing the keyboard, the scope of the 
 fingering, and touch. 
 First day. Practice wholly upon Exercise 21. Em- 
 
 ploy all the fingers with fidelity. Strike the keys 
 
 daintily, yet forcibly enough to secure a legible 
 
 impression. 
 Second day. Continue upon Exercise 22. Begin 
 
 now to form those habits which lead to systematic 
 
 manipulation. 
 
 Third day. Exercise 23, but omitting if desired the 
 
 single letters. 
 Fourth day. Exercise 243, as well as general remarks 
 
 and particular instructions of Chapter for the 
 
 Blind. 
 
 Fifth day. Exercise 245. 
 Sixth day. Exercise 24, always alternating between 
 
 right and left-hand practice. It is advisable to 
 
 practice the left hand more than the right. Fill 
 
 one line (at least) with each word ; otherwise it 
 
 is not good practice. 
 Seventh day. Exercise 246. 
 Eighth day. Exercise 25. 
 
 Write no Capitals during the above practice. 
 
 Make no effort for speed at the beginning. Be pains- 
 taking and accurate. The Ribbon, the Line-space and the 
 completion of the line are three things the beginner must 
 look out for. Heed the Bell. The right margin cannot be 
 even like the left. Operate the Platen with certainty. Ig- 
 nore the top row of keys the figures for the present. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 279 
 
 Ninth day. Review all preceding Exercises. 
 Tenth day. Commonplace words. These are the 
 
 WV//V.S of typewriting, and should be practiced 
 
 every day from now on. 
 
 The Capital is now introduced, and is made by depressing 
 the key marked "upper-case" with the left fourth finger, 
 and holding it down while another linger attacks the letter 
 desired. 
 
 The fingering of capitals under the right hand will be the 
 same as for lower-case ; but in case of the left hand, the 
 fourth finger being engaged upon the shift, the fingers 
 at liberty will execute as consistent a rendering of the all- 
 finger idea as may be expedient. For instance, while hold- 
 ing down the shift with the left fourth, strike the other 
 letters for that hand as follows : 
 
 QA/ WSX EDO RFV TGB. 
 
 Write Exercise 27 and the following sentences : 
 
 lie was. Are yon? Will be. You have. Two more. 
 Had not. Are not. Shall have. Can do. Why not? Could 
 be. Our own. He did not. From whence. Every one. 
 His own. The two. Beyond them. Always here. Come 
 out. Might l)e. 
 
 Begin each little sentence with a capital, and end 
 with the period. After striking the period, continue 
 to hold down the shift key while making the three 
 intermediate spaces, so that the capital of the succeed- 
 ing sentence may be written without superfluous * 
 motions. 
 
 Eleventh day. Exercise 29, followed by these sen- 
 tences : 
 
 Might have been. Either of them. Neither of you. 
 Whether or not. It had been. Before and after. Always 
 can come. Shall have been. There is much to do. Whose 
 was it? How many such? Which was his? It has done. 
 It had not. Why will he come? 
 
 Then Exercise 31,. followed by 
 
 Where were the other two? Come over when you can. 
 What will you have? Before you made this. Can that be 
 
280 INSTRUCTION' IX 
 
 so? About every one can see it. What shall we do? Now, 
 then, here \ve are. They were beyond you. How can they 
 do it? How do you feel about doing the work? Some of 
 them were mine. From whence do you come? What will 
 you do about it? We will always thank God for the good 
 they have done. Were you there, and did you see me? 
 
 Twelfth day. In sentence-writing, endeavor to attain 
 a fluent action of the fingers and hands, writing 
 each character with even motion and touch, in 
 an uninterrupted movement from, the beginning to 
 the end of the phrase. 
 
 WRITE : They sent far and near for them. Life is full of 
 hope. Work always with a Avill. It is now time to go. God 
 is near unto them that love Him. She did not know Avhether 
 to go or not. We thank you very much for the good time. 
 Neither of them told the truth. They feel as though they 
 did not care to so. Do unto others as you would that they 
 should do to you. I have not seen you since that time. 
 Good people always do quite right. He knew they would 
 come at the usual time. All men do not think alike. 
 
 Avoid the habit of lifting the carriage often. Do not 
 move the paper after writing has begun ; start it straight, 
 and then let the regular feed mechanism control its move- 
 ment. Always strike a space after the comma and all 
 punctuation, except the first quotation mark and parenthesis, 
 and the hyphen in a compound word. 
 
 Write slowly ; no speeding as yet. When restoring the 
 paper after removal, adjust the longest line to the platen 
 scale, making the graduations coincide with a thin, vertical 
 letter like i t 1 j or f . Justify the risjht margin by a clever 
 division of words into correct syllables, and mark each 
 division by the hyphen. (See Syllabication, particularly 
 note of Rule V.) 
 
 Thirteenth day. Write 'Exercises 37 and 38, using 
 capitals. Then practice the words in these sen- 
 tences : 
 
 He will value the report. It was a merely technical 
 error. The plump boil makes Johnny pout. This trip the 
 11 Great Mogul" will bring freight from Lapland. You de- 
 serve a divine reward. The witty writer had a quiet kind 
 of power. Bring the dear boy some new milk. He affected 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 281 
 
 a regard for the truth. The Union Mill was the germ of a 
 monopoly. Xerxes retreated nimbly after sacking the port. 
 It was his care to abate the bank tax. The State debt fades 
 to a minimum. All agree that the monk was clad in a 
 black sack. The crew of the French trader were numb with 
 fright. 
 
 Fourteenth day. Prefixes. Exercise 39. Of course 
 these Prefix and Affix syllables alone are but 
 fragmentary; therefore it may be profitable (after 
 a little practice) to apply them in words where they 
 belong, writing the complete word several times. 
 
 Fifteenth day. Affixes. Exercise 40. As a relief 
 to the tedium of these Exercises review previous 
 sentences. 
 
 Sixteenth day. Exceptional fingering. 
 
 The exceptional fingerings of Practical Typewriting arises 
 from two causes, viz. : want of harmony between a fallible 
 keyboard and natural letter sequences; and secondly, the 
 impeding anatomy of the hands. The fingering of IM EDG 
 (See P.T., par. 1C) ECT and ERT is of the first class, and 
 follows the principle (or privilege) of using the next best 
 linger when the situation becomes a trifle involved. SW, 
 .UJ. NT, HY and ()L of the same class are pairs of letters 
 fingered on the diagram the same, and to secure graceful 
 action the next finger is recommended ; but, as the incorrect 
 finger precedes the correct, the sub-flgnres mark the excep- 
 tions. 
 
 The fingering of EV, BE, TE and GE permits the long 
 index linger to help the weak third bridge the gap; and OM 
 (see par. Ifi) is where the stiffness of the third linger is 
 humored. These latter are of the second class of exceptions. 
 None of them occasion any particular difficulty in business 
 typewriting. 
 
 Write Exercises 41 and 42. 
 
 Seventeenth day. Numerals. Read 43 to 50. 
 Write 50 and after noting carefully the direc- 
 tions of 49, practice on p. 65, beginning with the 
 easiest example (the second) ; also p. 82. 
 
282 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 Eighteenth day. Miscellaneous words. "Write 
 
 Exercise 55, followed by these sentences : 
 Be ye up and doing. I have given him my tilings. Not 
 every one can be called good. I have heard it in part. It is 
 hard for him to be patient. I told him the proposition. I 
 do not know how we can discharge it any more equitably 
 than we have done. I am willing she should get the remit- 
 tance. I am out of his jurisdiction now. And over all coun- 
 cils is the great God. Which constitution would you like to 
 see? How many subjects will the argument cover? Only 
 two of us were in jeopardy. I have answered you in the 
 affirmative again and again. I will tell you to the best of 
 my recollection how I made his acquaintance. 
 
 Nineteenth day. Write Exercise 53 and 54. 
 
 I do not believe any more litigation will arise. The citi- 
 zens of northwestern Colorado do a great many things more 
 out of courtesy and kindness than policy. Do not put your- 
 self in the way of scandal. Did the lawyer have this agree- 
 ment executed? If we could get one more representative all 
 would be secure. The property does not belong to the 
 opulent Xanthus. Valiant action will mollify his excellency. 
 Zenobia can tell you more about the question than I care to. 
 We sincerely acknowledge that the medicine assuaged his 
 suffering and refreshed the patient. It is a good time to 
 surrender the privilege. The beginning of the controversy 
 excited some apprehension. 
 
 Twentieth day. "Write Exercise 51 and 52. 
 
 Let us see if the broker will know the endorsement. 
 How long before the interest on the premium-note will be 
 due? You will not get half the commission you deserve. 
 It is a good thing to make an inventory once in awhile. 
 After you examine the collateral let me know its value. We 
 are willing to discount the draft. Recourse was had to the 
 bill-lading of the merchandise. A balance appeared when 
 the account current was audited. The. coupons of the de- 
 benture bonds are negotiable if registered. The principal 
 consignment was sold to arrive for a small percentage over 
 pro rata figures. The semi-annual assessment of the under- 
 writers did not put to the credit of the policy either a divi- 
 dend, an annuity or reversionary additions. Charter-party, 
 salvage, demurrage and manifest, are terms pertaining to 
 the merchant marine. The indebtedness was receivable in 
 sterling exchange. The item of primage upon the invoice 
 was an overcharge. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 283 
 
 Twenty-first day. Exercises 57 and 58. Names of 
 cities, states, etc., p. 105. Write par. 284 of this 
 manual, Step XIII. 
 Twenty-second day. Exercise 56 and par. 249 
 
 (p. 78). 
 
 \VRITE: Your favor received. By return mail. Beg 
 to say. Rein it at once. Duly received. Your esteemed 
 favor. Return by bearer. Your offer respectfully declined. 
 Enclosed please find. Discount for cash. This is to con- 
 tirin. Further advices. Forward by express. Regretting 
 the delay. Send freight bill. Yours at hand and noted. 
 Will send sample. Placed to your credit. Have charged 
 you. Ship the balance. Contents duly noted. Hold for 
 orders. Price less commission. Wired you today. Please 
 protect our draft. Your letter of even date. Start a tracer. 
 London exchange. Accept our thanks. Days of grace. 
 Free on board (f.o.b.) Cash on delivery (c.o.d.) Letter of 
 credit. Bill of exchange. Money order. Power of attor- 
 ney. Price current. As per your order. Kindly return 
 voucher. Pardon the error. Subject to your order. We 
 guarantee satisfaction. Pursuant to your request. Your 
 obedient servant. 
 
 In abbreviations like f. o. b., the period may be 
 omitted ; because when writing with a lever machine, 
 where the force of the blow affects the impression, the 
 tendency is to strike the period as strongly as any 
 character ; but its surface is so small, such an impact 
 makes an ugly mark. Like a good many of the tricks 
 of typewriting, such an omission of the period is allow- 
 able when the writing is improved thereby. 
 
 The direction to WRITE in this schedule of practice 
 really means to write a great deal. If it be a word, 
 that word should be written many, many times. If it 
 he sentences, every sentence should be repeated over 
 and over again until it can be executed readily. 
 
 Twenty-third day. Touch writing.* Touch is the 
 term introduced by the author to describe type- 
 writing without looking upon the keyboard. This 
 
 * See Sections 3:3 to 3G. 
 
284 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 is entirely practicable, as the result of correct 
 hand position, exact finger attack and diligent 
 practice. For exhibition typewriting, and for a 
 high degree of expertness, touch writing can be 
 acquired by practice according to the fingering 
 of the following diagram : 
 
 DIAGRAM FOR TOUCH WRITING. 
 
 LEFT HAND. 
 
 Q W E R T 
 A S D F G 
 Z X C V B 
 
 ( SPACEBAR RIGHT THUMB. ) 
 
 On the other hand, a more elastic definition of the 
 term Touch is to typewrite with only an occasional 
 glance upon the keys. Facility in such writing is 
 easily attained, and is the natural consequence of all- 
 finger procedure. For the all-round writer this liberal 
 version of Touch is more popular than the other. 
 Remember that a fixed hand position is the secret of 
 success in all scientific typewriting. Management of 
 the typewriter partially by touch has positive advan- 
 tages. An operator with no particular skill does a 
 great many things unconsciously ; but with a good 
 method of fingering he would have so much better 
 command of the keyboard that the situations where the 
 attention might relax would become far more numer- 
 ous. Common words and common material of words 
 would be written with hardly a glance upon the manual, 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 285 
 
 the fingers simply dropping upon the keys almost 
 without volition. The practical utility, then, of me- 
 thodic procedure cannot be overestimated. 
 
 W^rite Exercise 62, without looking very much 
 upon the keys; also Sect. 296 of this manual, Step 
 XIII., though not by touch. 
 Twenty-fourth day. Hints for Letter Writing.* 
 
 A typewritten letter must preserve the formalities. 
 Follow a model (see p. 6'.), Prac. T. ; also Step XIII.) 
 Every letter should show a date, and begin the name of 
 the person or concern written to a full space below at 
 of the scale, and prefix a title of respect. Write this 
 address in rhomboid form, with the beginning at the 
 upper left angle, and the end at the right acute angle. 
 Make half-space between the lines. For example: 
 
 Mu. THEODORE TORREY, 
 
 15 Algonquin Street, 
 Indianapolis, Indiana. 
 
 If the second line be shorter than the first, resort 
 to the frustum (inverted) shape: 
 
 ARTHUR CUMMINGS, ESQ. 
 Saco, Me. 
 
 (See examples of addresses, page 68, P. T.) 
 
 It will be noted that the name of the address is 
 written with capitals. This is done to give a certain 
 style to the make-up. Some writers fail to appreciate 
 this, but we c;m only believe it is because they lack 
 taste in arrangement of typewriting. Of course where 
 
 * See Sections 59 to Gl. 
 
286 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 a business man objects to anything of the kind, it is 
 the duty of the amanuensis to follow instructions 
 even to the extent of misspelling a word because his 
 principal orders the perpetuation of error. At the 
 same time a finish can be given to work of any sort by 
 those little touches which distinguish the proficient 
 from the bungler. Typewriting is not exempt from 
 such a privilege. 
 
 At all events maintain the terraced look. Limit 
 the number of lines in an address to three, if pos- 
 sible, and it were better to have only two. Much 
 ingenuity can be exercised in displaying the address 
 of a letter. 
 
 Adopt the same, rhomboidal, or alternative, form 
 when addressing an envelope, though have full space 
 between the lines. 
 
 Drop a full space to the " Dear A*V," which should 
 begin at ; then drop another full space to the body 
 of the letter, which should properly begin at about 15 
 of the scale. 
 
 Write all dates in figures, and sums of money with 
 letters, unless the dictator specifies figures. Para- 
 graph occasionally, and indent to 5, to imitate the 
 em-quad of printing. A short letter should be full 
 space between the lines. The concluding paragraph 
 of a full page may be sometimes condensed to leave 
 room for the signature. 
 
 Punctuate carefully and discreetly. Be painstaking 
 always, though do not "potter"; be business-like upon a 
 business matter. Do not abbreviate unduly. Permit no 
 mistakes, and there will be no smutchy marks of erasure. 
 Go sloAvly at first, so as to cultivate absolute accuracy. 
 With assiduous practice, grace and accuracy will lead to 
 speed, and the battle is won. 
 
 Write for practice letters of Sect. 304, Step XIII. 
 
 Begin the " }'o///-.s /////>/ " at about 25, or at a lower 
 
 number if the subscription be extended. Drop two 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 287 
 
 or three full spaces if a "P/-es.," " Sec." or similar 
 word follows. (See .Ex. 60 of Prac. T.) 
 
 Twenty-fifth day. For instruction in regard to making 
 carbon and mimeograph copies of typewriting, 
 see index for explanatory paragraphs in Prac. 
 T. Teacher will give a practical illustration 
 of taking press-copies, using the outfit of the 
 school-room. 
 
 The following " Alphabet Sentences," collected from 
 various sources, are submitted for speed prac- 
 tice. The habit is too commonly prevalent of prac- 
 ticing for speed upon the sentence, "Now is the 
 time for all good men to come to the aid of the party," 
 which is a combination of short words, extending 
 just a line, and illustrating exceedingly easy progres- 
 sions from letter to letter. Such a "trick" sentence 
 cannot furnish the best exercise for the typewriter. .On 
 the other hand, sentences containing all the letters of 
 the alphabet practice the hand all over the keyboard, 
 and build up a harmonious manual proficiency : 
 
 Pack my box with live dozen liquor jugs of sparkling 
 mountain dew. 
 
 The quick, brown fox jumped over the lazy dog that was 
 fast asleep. 
 
 Frowzy quacks vex, jump and blight everything within 
 their reach. 
 
 Please give the money box to Mr. J. Z. Quack's wife 
 without fail. 
 
 John quickly extemporized five tow bags in which to pack 
 the corn. 
 
 The judicious advocate" will never forget that a good 
 cause may be quickly lost by hasty display of excessive zeal. 
 
 Dazzling jewels pendent from the neck were thrown quite 
 in the shadow by exceeding wit, which ever flashed from 
 her brilliant mind. 
 
 Old and quaint maxims filled the pages of that very curi- 
 ous book, on which, with quiet joy, he gazed for hours 
 together. 
 
288 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 The earthquake wrecked the grand old palace ; next the 
 ruins were in blaze; yet the Junta sat hi tlieir chamber with 
 faces as calm as ever.- 
 
 Our queen was almost crazed with vexation, because the 
 prince would not join the King's forces in the field. 
 
 A doctor's judgment sometimes fails, even when, by ZCN'I- 
 ous endeavor, he has acquired an exact knowledge of the 
 patient's malady. 
 
 Experts in jurisprudence, and learned writers on ethics, 
 are alike greatly puzzled to solve the broad question, " How 
 to repress fierce crime." 
 
 We seized with joy on the thought of rejoining loved ones 
 beyond the grave; it keeps alive exquisite memories of their 
 presence here. 
 
 At the zenith of the Caitiff's power, his subjects were 
 ruined by knavish tax-gatherers quartered upon them, and 
 even life was in jeopardy. 
 
 In yonder quiet nook, away from the exciting jostle of 
 city life, I lay and let the murmuring zephyrs cool my fev- 
 ered brain. 
 
 A willful and querulous priest, seconded by a lazy abbot, 
 excluded the kind and gifted justice from the vestry cham- 
 bers. 
 
 Twenty-sixth day. Write for practice the miscella- 
 neous letters of pp. 119, 120 and 121, as well :is 
 pp. 69 and 95. Select one letter, and write it 
 many times for speed exercise. 
 
 Twenty-seventh day. Refer to model letter of Step 
 XV., and arrange in a proper style of typewriting. 
 Also write the letter of p. 96. Practice familiar 
 matter for speed. 
 
 Twenty-eighth day. Write miscellaneous law forms, 
 first p. 86 ; then pp. 55 to 62, as time will permit. 
 Also pp. 92 and 94. 
 
 Twenty-ninth day. Court testimony. Copy pp. 93, 
 124 and 125. 
 
 Thirtieth day. General review. Fancy typewriting. 
 Continued speed practice. 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 289 
 
 (399 ) Appended is still another way of presenting 
 the model letter of Step XV. Execute the ruled lines 
 with red ink : 
 
 BOSTOX, May 2, 1893. 
 Messrs. GILL & CLARK, 
 
 West Newburyport, Mass. 
 Gentlemen : 
 
 We have your favor of the 7th, enclosing drafts for 
 0620.00, payment for five shares of the Western Investment 
 Stock, for C. M. Brayton; and drafts to the amount of 
 $1,476.55, which you say balances the stock you bought of 
 us when in Boston. 
 
 On referring to our books we find the items stand as 
 follows : 
 
 GILL & CLARK. 
 
 DR. 
 
 CR. 
 
 Apr. 15 
 
 By stock 
 
 $3312.50 
 
 Apr. 15 
 
 To drafts 
 
 $1476.55 
 
 
 
 
 
 " cash 
 
 622.00 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 " deposit 
 
 1095.45 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 " commission 
 
 26.50 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 " balance 
 
 92.00 
 
 
 
 $3312.50 
 
 
 
 $3312.50 
 
 If we are in error, please advise us at once ; something 
 may have escaped our attention. 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
self 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Sect. Page. 
 
 A. AN, AND 100 49 
 
 AFFIXES 342 173 
 
 alternate forms for 346 176 
 
 -hooil -head -worthy 343 174 
 
 -ing -ings 149, 150 71, 72 
 
 -ingly 356 184 
 
 -ture 344 175 
 
 ( 65 34 
 1343 174 
 
 ALTERNATIVE PROCEDURE 394 266 
 
 ANALOGY: 
 
 general article 391 257 
 
 examples 259 
 
 ANGLES 
 
 and Direction of Strokes 389 250-4 
 
 in Shorthand 104 50 
 
 made by hooks 238-9 116 
 
 with L and R 141 69 
 
 when option given If5 84 
 
 in figure writing {gj 1 
 
 as a "study" 104 50 
 
 APPENDAGES 16 18 
 
 circle-S, wuh and yuh 45 29 
 
 hooks 184 95 
 
 BLACKBOARD ILLUSTRATIONS: see Appendix. 
 
 BUSINESS 
 
 shorthand 167-8 86-89 
 
 the letter 280 138 
 
 letters for dictation 113, 124, 136 
 
 " " " 149, 150, 164 
 
 " < < 194 
 
 word-signs 281 ' 138 
 
 nhrasp* ( 282 139 
 
 ' 1 284 140 
 
 dictation 286 141 
 
 CIRCLE-S: 
 
 how written 43, 46 29 
 
 how read 43 29 
 
 between curves 47 30 
 
 straight strokes } 2 ^ ^ 
 
 prefixed to hooks 201-5 lof-2 
 
 two sounds of, before R-hook 208 103 
 
 CON-, COM-, COG- 146 71 
 
 compounded j^jj jij 
 
 CONSONANTS : 
 
 signs 10, 11, 17 
 
 additional signs 114 57 
 
 (291) 
 
292 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 Sect. Page. 
 
 CONSONANTS, Continued 
 
 conventional name of in* 
 
 sound-name of w ' ' 
 
 whispered {3 10,11,13 
 
 voiced 01 
 
 how joined 
 
 CONVENIENCE: 
 signification ol word 
 
 DEFINITIONS: Jg 
 
 appendage , j 45 
 
 diphthong 
 
 emb,emp 219 10, 
 
 halving 
 
 lengthening 329 
 
 outline 
 
 Phra86 ,18 6 8 7 -9 
 
 position | 109 51 
 
 stem 
 
 stroke 
 
 t j c k 97 
 
 vowel 
 
 word-sign 
 
 ( 279 135 
 
 DICTATION: j 324 1(>2 
 
 early 41 
 
 sentence - 
 
 letter at 60 words a minute 231 
 
 80 " " 255, 304 124, 149 
 
 90 " " 279, 304, 328 136, 150, 164 
 
 100 " " 370 
 
 DIPHTHONG: 93 
 
 position of . . . 
 
 reading exercise 
 
 DISTINGUISHED WORDS: 
 
 general article 390 
 
 examples 
 
 I 271-3 133 
 
 -ED : how represented ........ JR U i e iv. 249 
 
 ELECTRICAL TERMS . . . . 2-9 
 
 EM-DASH: 
 
 of shorthand 
 
 used tor underscore . . 
 
 EMB, BMP : definition of 219 
 
 word-signs 220 
 
 EXPEDIENTS: 
 
 brief wuh and yuh inverted 
 
 " " intersecting .... 145,362 70.185 
 
 < ' enlarged 361 185 
 
 " " " considered as conso- 
 nants 56-7,363 32,185 
 
 dw.qu.etc 382 
 
 from -to- - }M 
 
 hook added to a hook 262 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 Sect. 
 EXPEDIENTS, Continued : 
 
 I, phrased 355 
 
 inde, uncle, etc 310 
 
 in, un, en, before initial hook 211 
 
 of-the denoted 357 
 
 shun after hook 261 
 
 there phrased 356 
 
 uncoalescent S before R 209 
 
 unsyllabic Nr and XI 216-8 
 
 HUH 127 
 
 when to use 127 
 
 ( 126 
 
 " omitted {130 
 
 (Note 
 
 before M and R 128 
 
 between strokes 129 
 
 HE : how denoted ) Note 
 
 {^154 
 2*69 
 305 
 
 rule for 224 
 
 power of, how read 228 
 
 8yabic jfJO 
 
 unsyllabic 307 
 
 order of reading outline 269 
 
 distinction for T or D 225 
 
 L, M, N, R 225 
 
 position of 227 
 
 sometimes not employed j 3^.9 
 
 HOOKS: 169 
 
 initial L 171-5 
 
 " R 176-9 
 
 " how read 184 
 
 final F and V 232 
 
 " N 233-4 
 
 " how read 235 
 
 shun 256 
 
 " after hook 261 
 
 five 257 
 
 forms inverted 177 
 
 applied to M and N 178 
 
 uncoalescent L and R 180-1 
 
 particular management 184 
 
 perfect and imperfect l>-2 
 
 when to employ 183 
 
 Rel and Ler 11)9 
 
 enlarged Huh Note 
 
 joined to hook 262 
 
 to L, M, N, R, halved 313 
 
 eshon 25',) 
 
 " after ns 260 
 
 IN, UN, EN : 
 
 before circle-S 210 
 
 compounded 211 
 
 Page. 
 
 183 
 154 
 104 
 '184 
 127 
 184 
 103 
 106-7 
 
 61 
 
 61 
 
 60 
 
 62 
 
 32 
 
 61 
 
 61 
 
 48 
 
 49 
 
 73 
 110 
 132 
 152 
 110 
 112 
 132 
 152 
 153 
 132 
 111 
 111 
 112 
 152 
 153-4 
 
 90 
 90-1 
 91-3 
 
 95 
 114 
 114-5 
 115 
 126 
 127 
 126 
 
 92 
 
 92 
 
 93 
 
 95 
 
 94 
 
 94 
 
 99 
 
 99 
 128 
 155 
 127 
 1-27 
 
 103 
 103 
 
294 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 Sect. 
 
 Page. 
 
 ING, INGS: ............. { }g l\ 
 
 ing-and, ing -the ........... 151 72 
 
 JUDGMENT: 
 
 in joining strokes ..... ..... 165 84-5 
 
 outline building .......... 345 
 
 word-sign making ......... 379 201 
 
 omissions ............ 364 186 
 
 study .............. 40 26 
 
 syllabic treatment ......... 136 65 
 
 halving ............. 305 152 
 
 lengthening ........... 333 168 
 
 L, upward and downward ....... 137-139 67 
 
 examples of .......... ? 140 68 
 
 LEGIBILITY: 
 
 how maintained ........... 229 112 
 
 a help to .............. 181 93 
 
 -ed by disjoining ........... 272 133 
 
 when halving ............ 229 112 
 
 " lengthening .......... 333 168 
 
 by dissecting ............ 358 184 
 
 halving waived for .......... 306 152 
 
 LENGTHENING 
 
 of curves ............. 329 167 
 
 " straight strokes .......... 
 
 " emb.emp ............ j ^ 2 te 
 
 followed by N or shun ........ 331 167 
 
 misguided ............. 333 168 
 
 in phrases .......... ... 335 169 
 
 not employed ............ 334 169 
 
 LETTERS .............. 303 148-9 
 
 shorthand models .......... 352-3 180-1 
 
 business .............. 280 138 
 
 form of, in shorthand ........ 297-302 14(5-7 
 
 for dictation ............ 113, 124, 130 
 
 " ............ 149, 150, 164 
 
 " ............ 194, 
 
 NOMENCLATURE: 
 
 of consonant signs ......... . Note 14 
 
 for advanced shorthand ........ 341 173 
 
 NUMBERS: 
 
 general statement .......... 250 122 
 
 how learned ............ 265 129 
 
 Lesson 1 .............. 251 122 
 
 II .............. 274 133 
 
 III .............. 287 142 
 
 ten-groups . ............ 254 123 
 
 "teens" .............. 275 134 
 
 "tys" .............. 276 134 
 
 hundreds ............. 287 142 
 
 rule for expressing hundreds ..... 288 
 
 simple hundred-groups ........ 278 
 
 hundred-groups with S ........ 290 143 
 
 (see also multiplication table) ..... 337 170 
 
 used as adjective .......... 277 134 
 
 further illustrations ......... 274-5 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 Sect. 
 NUMBERS, Continued: 
 
 thousands, millions, etc 291 
 
 dollars and cents 292 
 
 fractions 293 
 
 OMISSIONS: 
 
 of signs from outline 364 
 
 " words " phrases . . 365 
 
 ORGANS of speech Note 
 
 PENMANSHIP: of shorthand i^ 
 
 attitude of body and holding pen .... 
 
 movement 
 
 practice iu 
 
 PHRASING: 
 
 introductory 67 
 
 general article on 392 
 
 examples 
 
 principal features of 
 
 involved 
 
 68 
 102 
 
 simple 
 
 244 
 266 
 
 tick 108 
 
 else, and others 349 
 
 L and R-hook 215-8 
 
 of time and take 311 
 
 by halving 310 
 
 miscellaneous, half length 319 
 
 by lengthening 335 
 
 ( 282 
 
 business j 234 
 
 the-con, etc Note 
 
 POSITION: 
 
 Introductory 109 
 
 definition 188-9 
 
 vowel I 
 
 ( BO 
 
 word-sign 110 
 
 outline 188 
 
 illustrated 194-8 
 
 first exercise in 185 
 
 second " " 200 
 
 third " " 212 
 
 rule for 192 
 
 of shortened outline 227 
 
 further discussion of 246 
 
 definite procedure in 247 
 
 of derivative 248 
 
 fourth, so called j ^g te 
 
 POSITIVE and negative 366 
 
 / -I 00 ft 
 
 words beginning irre, ille ggg" 
 
 295 
 
 Page. 
 
 143 
 144 
 144 
 
 186 
 186-7 
 
 16 
 18 
 
 190-4 
 
 190 
 
 191 
 
 17, 192-3 
 
 35 
 
 260-3 
 261 
 262 
 263 
 
 35 
 
 49 
 
 53 
 
 63 
 119 
 129 
 
 61 
 177 
 106-7 
 164 
 154 
 158 
 169 
 139 
 140 
 
 72 
 
 51 
 
 96 
 
 39 
 
 42 
 
 52 
 
 96 
 97-8 
 
 95 
 
 99 
 104 
 
 97 
 112 
 120 
 120-1 
 121 
 121 
 184 
 
 187 
 67 
 
 188 
 
296 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 Sect. Page. 
 
 PRACTICE: 
 
 manner of 286 141 
 
 (See LETTERS for dictation.) 
 
 early material for 163 82 
 
 word-sign of the steps 380 202, 207 
 
 " " sentences 386 232-3 
 
 sneed 1 321 16 
 
 8 P eed J3-25 103 
 
 PREFIXES 339 171 
 
 special form for Per ami Pro 340 
 
 less common 341 173 
 
 con, com, cog 146 
 
 compound 148 71 
 
 PROPER NAMES: 
 
 first suggestion 90 45 
 
 people and places 294-6 145-6 
 
 In letter 301 147 
 
 in typewriting 398 5*85 
 
 PUNCTUATION: 
 
 the period J 3 ^ ,*} 
 
 hyphen, parenthesis, underscore .... 54 
 
 R, upward and downward 137-8 67 
 
 examples of 140 68 
 
 final after Run Note 70 
 
 READING: 
 
 shorthand 1 9j * 
 
 without vowels 1U3 97 
 
 daily 54 
 
 practice (advanced) 
 
 order of : 
 
 circle-S 43 29 
 
 books {} 91 
 
 ticks 101 49 
 
 brief wuh and yuh 80 
 
 vowel 80 41 
 
 hooked outline 186 96 
 
 S and the R-hook 205 102 
 
 halved outline 269 132 
 
 Exercises: 
 
 vowels applied to simple strokes ... 84 42 
 
 " between strokes 90 45 
 
 diphthongs 96 48 
 
 strokes S, Z, W and Y 125 60 
 
 huh 131 62 
 
 upward and downward R and L . . . . 145 
 
 con, corn, cog . 153 73 
 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS: 
 
 Step 1 19 
 
 II 27 
 
 III 36 
 
 IV 46 
 
 V 56 
 
 VI 66 
 
 VII 76 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 297 
 
 Sect. Page. 
 REVIEW QUESTIONS, Continued: 
 
 Step IX 100 
 
 X 113 
 
 XI 124 
 
 XII 137 
 
 XIII 151 
 
 XIV 165 
 
 XV. . 182 
 
 RULE: 
 
 lor joining strokes 22 21 
 
 " circle-S to stems 46 29 
 
 " brief wuh and yuh to stems . . 50 31 
 
 applying vowel sign to simple stroke . 81-2 41 
 
 " " " between strokes . 86 42-3 
 
 another rule Note 43 
 
 for syllabic writing 117 67 
 
 stroke-S 119 58 
 
 " Z 122 59 
 
 " \V and Y 123 59 
 
 upward and downward R 138 67 
 
 " " L 139 67 
 
 position in general 192 97 
 
 " of single vertical stroke . . . 195 97 
 
 " double stroke 196 98 
 
 " horizontal outline 197 98 
 
 " extended " 198 98 
 
 halving 224 110 
 
 speed practice 324 162 
 
 S- 
 
 modifications of 58-62 32-3 
 
 stub-loop 58 32 
 
 ster-loop 59 32 
 
 ses, sis, sus, etc 60 33 
 
 a th.rd sound of Cl 
 
 cautions regarding 62 33 
 
 for self, selves 65, 343 34, 174 
 
 after stroke-S j \%\ jjjj 
 
 joined to final hooks 236 115 
 
 syllabic 119 58 
 
 " not used medially 120 68 
 
 unsyllabic 46 30 
 
 SHORTHAND: 
 
 why it has been difficult 168 88 
 
 how to study Note 89 
 
 practical 167 86 
 
 business 168 89 
 
 SPEED: 
 discussion of . 
 
 >_ 1 lo- 
 
 upon common words 332-3 161 
 
 " commonplace sentences 325-6-7 163-4 
 
 how prompted 369 19:i-4 
 
 of typewriting 304 151 
 
 STROKES: 
 
 definition of 16 18 
 
 length of 18 18 
 
 direction of 19 19 
 
298 
 
 INSTRUCTION IN 
 
 STROKES, Continued: 
 S, Z, W, Y 114 
 
 syllabic tendency 
 
 how joined 22 
 
 Direction of (article; 389 
 
 SYLLABLE, the: 
 
 first notion of 115 
 
 in shorthand 104 
 
 general article upon 
 
 Syllabication in Shorthand 388 
 
 for legibility . 
 
 14,> 
 
 in words 136 
 
 tendency of R and L 
 
 when writing some words 142 
 
 and final hook 237 
 
 when practicable 238 
 
 -ed 271 
 
 a unit in word analysis 1G4 
 
 as to vowels 87 
 
 SYLLABIC-S H 
 
 THE : how denoted 99 
 
 relative frequency of Note 
 
 102 
 phrased 10 g 
 
 TICKS: 
 
 definition of 
 
 reason for 98 
 
 why two directions of 103 
 
 as word-signs ' 107 
 
 angles of 105 
 
 phrased 108 
 
 intersecting 181 
 
 TYPEWRITING : 
 
 general article 397 
 
 simple practice 154 
 
 further remarks 304 
 
 the scales of 325 
 
 schedule of practice 398 
 
 in one month 
 
 abbreviations, c.o.d., etc 
 
 by touch 
 
 diagram for touch 
 
 of letters 
 
 diagrams of letter addresses 
 
 best alphabet practice 
 
 model of tabulation 
 
 VOWELS : 
 
 definition of 
 
 how represented 
 
 long scale 72 
 
 short " 74 
 
 position of 75 
 
 OJ _rt 
 
 rules for applying 8( . 
 
 with Ses 85 
 
 Page. 
 
 57 
 57 
 58 
 21 
 241 
 
 57 
 83 
 
 69 
 65 
 67 
 68 
 69 
 115 
 116 
 133 
 84 
 44 
 68 
 2<;4 
 48 
 48 
 49 
 51 
 
 48 
 48 
 50 
 50 
 50 
 49 
 51 
 93 
 
 276 
 73 
 151 
 
 lt>3 
 
 277 
 
 278 
 
 388 
 
 284 
 285-6 
 
 88B 
 287-8 
 
 881 
 
 38 
 38 
 38 
 39 
 39 
 41 
 43 
 42 
 
PRACTICAL SHORTHAND. 
 
 VOWELS, Continued: 
 
 accented 191-2 
 
 167 
 185 
 
 omitted 
 
 200 
 ,212 
 
 implied by tick 181 
 
 by position 187 
 
 " by stroke \\^> 
 
 " by form of outline 308 
 
 assist reading 193 
 
 bearing of in syllabication 
 
 Vowel implication 395 
 
 WORD-SIGNS: 
 definition of 
 
 abbreviation j j 5 g 
 
 reason for 35 
 
 not wholly arbitrary 36 
 
 final forms 37 
 
 to memorize 110 
 
 List 1 38 
 
 "II 64 
 
 diphthong 94 
 
 tick 107 
 
 Group 1 110 
 
 List III Ill 
 
 List IV 132 
 
 Group II 155 
 
 half length 154 
 
 " " miscellaneous 318 
 
 simple stroke 159 
 
 " " miscellaneous 160 
 
 Group 111 213 
 
 List VI. . . . 214 
 
 emb, emp 220 
 
 Group IV 242 
 
 List VI 1 243 
 
 Group V . . . . 264 
 
 List VI II 265 
 
 ( 39 
 
 how learned < 317-157 
 
 ( 381 
 
 business 281 
 
 Group VI 317 
 
 what for 372 
 
 how many presented 374 
 
 how many classes . 377 
 
 how made 378 
 
 of the steps, alphabetically arranged . . 380 
 
 imitative 3S2 
 
 general dictionary of 383 
 
 sacred . . 384 
 
 sentences for practice 386 
 
 unclassified ... .... 383 
 
 299 
 
 Page. 
 
 96-7 
 
 86 
 
 95 
 
 96 
 
 97 
 
 !9 
 104 
 
 93 
 
 96 
 
 58 
 
 69 
 153 
 
 97 
 
 24<!-8 
 2(59 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 78 
 
 25 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 52 
 
 26 
 
 34 
 
 47 
 
 50 
 
 52 
 
 53 
 
 62 
 
 74 
 
 73 
 157 
 
 78 
 
 79-80 
 105 
 105 
 107 
 118 
 118 
 128 
 129 
 
 26 
 
 159-78 
 207 
 138-9 
 156 
 198 
 198 
 199 
 200 
 202-7 
 208 
 
 211-225 
 230 
 232-3 
 2-JC-8 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 OOt 20 I 348 
 
 APR 
 JUL18 
 
 Form L9-25w,-9,'47(A5618)444 
 
Z56 Torrey - 
 
 T63i Instruction in 
 
 short hand < 
 
 
 Z56 
 T63i 
 
 A 000 570 390 5 
 
 ' '"ER 
 
 ZR